Home

R&S®FPS-K10 GSM Measurements User Manual

1. H T JET ale e EI RR EE 186 NN ent ele e LE TEE 186 INSTr ment CREate NEW oet nre ter ern en rtt ere re er rr nne ee npe i Y kp 186 INS Tr meht DEL6l6 nter eei EEN Cn c cet E e Edda Cede E Eck rud eens INSTrument LIST Gen INS Tr rment RE El ceci cert eb fert pere tenete pg tu vet E eco bc aa eet ead INSTrument SELCGE re M CeeEN ES geit ele ec 249 LAYout GATalogE WINDOW ccc er tt inar eie tede tt pr eee ce vtta ce ea ttp dre vere 251 Re dei rell Se pvp hy Bro RE 251 geen E ET EE 252 EAYout REPLEace WINDOW tnter rtr rA rc trn eren deniers 252 del M C 252 ES de UAM TIR IBIO ESTAS ADD M 254 LAYoutWINDowsrmn IDEN fy9 anco cct entro eerte ie epe etate ati aa ia 254 LAYoutWINDow n REMove LAY out WINDow lt n gt REPLace EAYout WINDowsn TYBPe con trn tette tenente tre a ee cnin e ne d evii 255 MMEM LOAD JO STA Farana e tor er Po icy EE p ek Dr etes DEENEN dee ab eaae EE E ER 316 MMENOGry STOR6esnhD IQ COMMABNL iiir prne ETSE RETE HR RR ERR NER AES RL EEEE ENEE 316 MMEM ty STORESSA gt IQ STATO rete rne ett tee a Lr ctp a 316 OUTPut IRIGger port DIReCHOR orn tnt erento het hc ere tr ie oap orar 217 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel OUTPut TRIGQEr porteiOTY
2. Set center frequency to 935 MHz SENSe FREQuency CENTer 935 MHZ Set Ref Level to 10 dBm DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel RF 10 DBM Slot 0 configuration Activate slot 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO STATe ON Normal Burst CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO TYPE NB GMSK modulation CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO MTYPe GMSK TSC 0 Set 1 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO TSC 0 1 eese Slot 1 configuration Activate slot 1 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 STATe ON Access Burst CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 TYPE AB Set TSO CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 TSC TSO Query TS CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 TSC TSO Access burst has a timing advance offset from slot start of 1 symbol CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 TADV 1 Slot 2 7 configuration CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT3 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT4 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT5 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT6 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT7 STATe OFF Programming Examples Eeer Demodulation and Slot Scope Configure slot 1 slot to measure for single slot measurements e g phase error modulation spectrum CONF CHAN MSL MEAS 1 Configure slot 0 1 for multi slot measurements e g PvT transient spectrum Set First slot to measure 0 Set No of slots to measure 2
3. Throughout the measurement channel configuration an overview of the most important currently defined settings is provided in the Overview The Overview is displayed when you select the Overview icon which is available at the bottom of all softkey menus d Rs EI Ee Overview Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Configuration for the default UO measurement Modulation Accuracy etc is described o Note that the configuration Overview depends on the selected measurement type in chapter 6 3 2 Configuration Overview on page 90 TEE E Rete Count Mod Carr 1 L set Offset Noi d E t Signal Description Input Frontend Trigger Data Acquisition E 28 Reference Meas Noise Meas Result Config Display Config Hz wrow lt 1 8MH2 ide Fig 6 4 Configuration Overview for MCWN measurement In addition to the main measurement settings the Overview provides quick access to the main settings dialog boxes The individual configuration steps are displayed in the order of the data flow Thus you can easily configure an entire measurement channel from input over processing to output and analysis by stepping through the dialog boxes as indicated in the Overview In particular the Overview provides quick access to the following configuration dialog boxes listed in the recommended order of processing 1 Signal Description See chapter 6 4 3 Signal Description on page
4. I Manual operation See Trigger to Sync Graph on page 31 See Trace Mode on page 159 Table 11 4 Available traces and trace modes for the result diplays Measurement Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Magnitude Capture WRITe Z z EVM AVERage MAXHold MINHold WRITe Phase Error Magnitude Error PvT Full Burst Modulation Spec AVERage WRITe E trum Graph Transient Spectrum Graph Trigger to Sync WRITe PDFavg 11 7 2 2 Marker Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values in the diagram Thus you can extract numeric values from a graphical display Up to 4 markers can be configured e Individual Marker Getttngs eene 257 e General Marker Setlli5 ceder edet iad tet ibat e du dede 259 e Marker Positioning Settings eii i erred eei qa reo REEL ease oa aaas 260 Individual Marker Settings In GSM evaluations up to 4 markers can be activated in each diagram at any time the following commandas are required to configure the markers Analyzing GSM Measurements CAL Culatesni gt DEL Tamafker sM AQF EE 258 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmztSTATel ennt en tnt 258 CAL Culate nz DELTamarkercmz TR ACe seien n nen esas estin sisse nnns daas 258 E e E EE RR KE 258 CAL Gulate lt n MARKer lt m gt EE 259 CALCulatesn gt MARKer lt m gt TRACE esten tsseh seien ii saine sisi sa sss snis 259 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt AO
5. cene 154 Reference measurement cccsescceeeeseesteeeeees 71 153 Reference measurement remote Reference measurement settings 152 Reference power level 154 Reference ele EE 74 Signal description remote 240 Spectrum graphice mein tere 35 Triggering remote 242 Wideband noise 156 Wideband noise measurement sssssssirisseessreeee e 72 MEAS KEY 1 25 dete dese hend terc at tet Ne 85 Measure only on Syne einen inn ts 122 Measurement channel Creating remote 186 Deleting remote 187 Duplicating remote Querying remote Renaming remote Replacing remote 186 Measurement filter 58 Magnitude response sonrasi 58 Measurement time Remote TE PR T RN 220 Measurements Selecting Hc T Midamble see also E 50 MINIMUM an iain 163 Marker positlonihg encre trn rint rnt 163 MKR gt Key 162 MODE EE 10 MOGUIALION DRE 96 Carriers T 137 Default m 131 pres M a 59 Inverted UO remote 220 Inverted I Q 116 ele EE 48 Modes remote 197 Number of TSC bits eeh eese 97 RBW at 1800 kHz irsini 23 25 127 Modulation Accuracy Evaluation method ENER 2 sec ec 20 Parameters Results remote Modulation Spectrum
6. esse 55 5 8 Dependency of Slot Parameters eese enne nnne 59 5 9 Definition of the Symbol Period cessere nennen nnn 59 5 10 Synchronization cecinere eicere cn eru scu ru sicca kan sc dam Ru ano spera EEEESEER 63 5 11 Timeslot Alignmeaent irren ioci iic rencontre iic snas sec caua aad 65 5 12 Delta to Sync Values eec eerie renean ret saecu nane Lene kan a sca na suas secca Rua a e 67 5 13 Limit Choecks eeieeee iren ee inre ncc sic cu nhau ie nre scusa nuni sicca rua a ue 68 5 14 Impact of the Statistic Count lleeueieeueuusesssesssessesseeee ennt nennen tnmen nennen nns 70 5 15 Multicarrier and Wideband NoOiSEC c cccceeseeneeeeeeeeseeeeeeeenseeeeseeeseeeeseensaeeeseeaneeeeseees 71 5 16 Automatic Carrier Detection ceccccssseeeeessseneeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseseeeeeeeseseeeeenenseeeees 81 5 17 GSM in MSRA Operating Mode esee nennen nennen nennen nn 82 6 C nfigurati N esmesi penea Ee ermee EE AE EEEa 85 User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 3 R amp S FPS K10 Contents 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 7 1 7 2 8 1 8 2 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 10 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 11 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 11 8 11 9 11 10 11 11 Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function 85 Display Configuratlon 12 einer aiunt ocu
7. H 270 TRACE EE 270 Et EE 271 RE ele Ee 272 FORMat DATA lt Format gt This command selects the data format that is used for transmission of trace data from the R amp S FPS to the controlling computer Note that the command has no effect for data that you send to the R amp S FPS The R amp S FPS automatically recognizes the data it receives regardless of the format Parameters lt Format gt ASCii ASCii format separated by commas This format is almost always suitable regardless of the actual data format However the data is not as compact as other for mats may be REAL 32 32 bit IEEE 754 floating point numbers in the definite length block format In the Spectrum application the format setting REAL is used for the binary transmission of trace data For UO data 8 bytes per sample are returned for this format set ting RST ASCII Example FORM REAL 32 Usage SCPI confirmed Retrieving Results FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command selects the decimal separator for data exported in ASCII format Parameters lt Separator gt COMMa Uses a comma as decimal separator e g 4 05 POINt Uses a point as decimal separator e g 4 05 RST RST has no effect on the decimal separator Default is POINt Example FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator SENSe IQ FFT LENGth Queries the number of frequency points determined by each FFT c
8. eese eee 284 READ BURSI MACCuracy MERRor PEAK AVERage 284 READ BURG MACCuracvlMERbRor PDEAK CUbRb ent nennen rennen 284 READ BURSI MACCuracy MERRor PEAK MAXimum essere nennen nnns 284 READ BURG MACCuracvlMERbRor PDEAK GDEViaton eene 284 READ BURGT MACCuracvlMERbRor RMG AVERagoe eene 285 READ BURSI MACOCuracy MERRor RMS CURRent essent nene 285 READ BURG MACCuracvlMERRor RMS MANilmum nennen nnne 285 READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS SDEViation 8 READ BURSI MACCuracy OSUPpress AV ERage ot rrr nnn etn rr ne rn nun 285 READ BURG MACCuracvlOGllbporese CUlRhent AE 285 READ BURSI MACCuracy OSUPpress MAXimum essent nre nme nnneen nennen 285 READ BURSI MACCuracy OSUPpress SDEViation essen 285 READ B RSIEMACGuracy PERGCentile BVM 53 2 rrt entraron te icr pa rne d Wu 286 READ BURSI MACOCuracy PERCentile MERROr essen enne nre nnne 286 READ BURSt MACCuracy PERCentile PERRor 286 READ BURG MACCuracvlPERb or PDEAK AVERage enne 287 READ BURGT MACCuracvlPtERbor PEAkK CURbent nene 287 READ BURG MACCuracvlPERbor PDEAkK MAximum ai a 287 READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK SDEViation READ BURGT MAC CuracvlPERbor RMG AVERage nennen nennen 287 READ BURG MACCuracvlPERbor RMG CUbRbent AAA 287 READ BURG MACCuracvlPERb or RMG MANImum etn 287 READ BURG MAC CuracvlPERbor RMG GDEViaton nens 287 RE
9. 111 149 Select Marker eoe eei etre 162 DEQUENCEN C 86 Single Segllencer EE 86 Single Sweep 118 152 Span Manual g dd SEENEN 140 SLAM 140 SOP M M 140 Trace 1 2 9 4 EE 159 Trigger CONTO oreet entendi 108 146 Trigger Offset nehme 112 149 Specifics for Config latioti EE 91 Spectrum Ip E 125 Spectrum Graph Result display ree retenta 35 Start frequency ec P 140 Statistic count 117 178 Statistics Parameters gedeelt Programming example Status registers Contents Description GSM e EI EEN STATus QUEStionable LIMit ssessessss STATus QUEStionable SYNC Status reporting system sese Stop frequency ET 140 Subchannels 3 2 2 pe den cleat 49 Suffixes lu Le EE Remote commands rre Ee NDS Sweep Tur e EE Settings Time remote SYMBOL GECISION 2 c rrr sens rete n Symbol period BPSK ee attin 16QAM 32QAM Definition GMSK Ee EE Symbol rates Rebeet m 49 Normal we 49 e 2 OF User defined a OT Eege E Le ME 121 Default 88 131 Billi 125 Measure only Ort SYNC s ccassectieevsedeeiseasseeteeesienieneseeets 122 Multicarrier filter Proces
10. 284 FETGIEB RSIEMAGG racy TQOFfSetCURRGnft rettet re berti ite cn E e EF 284 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy IQOFfset MAXimum essen eene nnne 284 FETCh BURStEMACCuracy eer 284 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK CURRent eese nennen 284 FETOCH BURG MAC Curacvl MERb or PDEAkK MANimum emen 284 FETCh BURSIt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK SDEViation eese enne 284 FETOCH BURG MAC CuracvlMERRor RMG AVERage eene 285 FETOCh BURG MAC CuracvlMERb orRMG CUlbb ent AAA 285 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor RMS MAXimum essent rennen 285 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor RMS SDEViation 285 FETOH BURG MAC CuracvlOGllbpress AVEhage nennen rennen enne tenens 285 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy OSUPpress CURREME cssssssscsssssstesecrssetecssrsestesseesesensseesessasonsesseessonens 285 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy OSUPpress MAXimum esses eene nene een 285 FETOCH BURG MAC CuracvlOGllbpress GDEViatton A 285 FETChBURSIEMAGGuracy PERCGentile B VMT cacciatore re re Fee rper EXE CER CIN sas 286 FETCRh BURSI MAGCCuracy PERCentile MERROTr erento rtr rere nnn tenens 286 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERCentile PERRO iniit rne tnr tne hirta iain 286 FETOCH BURG MAC CuracvlPERor PEARK AVERagoed ener nene eneen ETDE EA 287 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK CURREM neret nennen nentes 287 FETCh
11. Parameters lt State gt ON OFF ON The carrier with the maximum power level is selected as a refer ence OFF The carrier to be used as a reference must be specified using CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence CARRier NUMBer on page 243 RST ON Example CONF SPEC MOD REF MEAS ON CONF SPEC MOD REF CARR AUTO OFF CONF SPEC MOD REF CARR AUTO NUMB 2 Manual operation See Carrier Selection Carrier on page 154 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence CARRier NUMBer lt CarrNo gt This command specifies the carrier at which the reference powers for the MCWN mea surement are measured if reference power measurement is enabled see CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence MEASure on page 244 Parameters lt CarrNo gt Number of the active carrier after which the gap starts Range 1 16 RST 1 Example CONF SPEC MOD REF MEAS ON CONF SPEC MOD REF CARR AUTO OFF CONF SPEC MOD REF CARR AUTO NUMB 2 Manual operation See Carrier Selection Carrier on page 154 Configuring and Performing MCWN Measurements CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence MEASure lt State gt This command specifies whether a reference power measurement is performed Parameters lt State gt ON OFF ON The reference powers of all active carriers are measured for MCWN measurements OFF the reference powers must be defined manually see CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence PLEVel on page 244
12. i rettet re egeta irte ER ive Euros 281 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy ADRoop MAXimum esses iE TEENE ANEA 281 FETCRh BURSI MAGCGCuracy ADROoOp SDEViatior acie tr ranean 281 RK NEE ee ee 280 FETCR BURSIE MACGuracy BPOWer AVERGage xin rnt geen tpe teret tha p eee tene nS tnt ep eer GEES 281 FETCH BURSI IMAGCGuracy BPOWer CURRGeht deccm ttp ete ctp i d ds 281 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer MAXimum FETOCH BURG MAC Curacvl BbOWer GDEVlaton eese 281 FETCRh BURSI MACCuracy FERRor AVERage notte ien ter tnn tr eara gen 329 FETGCIEB RSIEMAGGU racy FERROE CURRGHE rrr in ri E re bc d Re rni d ER pda 329 FETCWBURSIIMACCU UTacy e Ee ul 329 FETCR BURSI MAGCGCuracy FERRoOr SDEViIalior crt tpe net ec c tpe eet eun 329 FETCI BURSIEMAGGC racy EREQuency AVERAQO niii icti en tipi RR aae ndvra a 283 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency CURRent FETCh BURSI MACCuracy FREQuency MAXimum esee eene enne erinan idana 283 FETCI B RSIEMAGG racy FREQ Uency SDEViation etit tere acc 283 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy IQlMbalance AVERage sess enemies 283 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy IQlMbalance CURRent sss nre eene 283 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy IQlMbalance MAXimum esses nennen rennen 283 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy lQIMbalance SDEViation 00 nenne 283 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy QOFfset AVERage
13. 39 42 Phase GE 25 Power vs Slot 26 PVT Full Burst ET 27 see also Evaluation methods 16 Transient Spectrum Graph 429 Transient Spectrum Table A 30 Trigger to Sync Graphi oiii ets 31 TRIGGER TO Sync Table mee 33 Result summary Trace ANE EE 273 Results Data format remote eee 269 EVM remote Magnitude Capt te enne 273 Magnitude Capture remote 275 276 Magnitude Error remote AAA 274 Modulaiton Accuracy remote ssssss 277 Modulation Spectrum Graph remote 275 Modulation Spectrum Table remote 288 EJ M 125 Phase Error remote AA 274 Power vs Slot remote A 290 PvT Full Burst remote R fereriCe DOWOF eerie rere retient 119 Reference slot rccte eiecti ae rre da 119 Res ult summiary i cotton rhe tht 273 Trace data query remote sssssuuss 273 Transient Spectrum remote sussss 275 Transient Spectrum Table remote 298 Trigger to Sync remote A 275 Updating the display eren 118 Updating the display remote ssssse 265 RF attenuation furo Manual RF input iom RF Power TI Gger Lic oct rre trot retient Trigger level remote etr 215 RU
14. Ref Power RBW 300 kHz Defining Reference Powers Manually Manually defined reference power level measured with an RBW of 300 kHz for MCWN measurements If reference measurement is enabled see Enabling a reference power measurement Measure on page 153 this value is displayed for information only Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence RPOWer on page 244 Ref Power RBW 100 kHz Defining Reference Powers Manually Manually defined reference power level measured with an RBW of 100 kHz for MCWN measurements If reference measurement is enabled see Enabling a reference power measurement Measure on page 153 this value is displayed for information only Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence RPOWer on page 244 6 4 8 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Ref Power RBW 30 kHz Defining Reference Powers Manually Manually defined reference power level measured with an RBW of 30 kHz for MCWN measurements If reference measurement is enabled see Enabling a reference power measurement Measure on page 153 this value is displayed for information only Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence RPOWer on page 244 Noise Measurement Settings The noise measurement can provide various results Noise measurement settings can be configured in the Noise Meas tab of the Mea surement Settings dialog box which is displayed w
15. External Trigger 1 Trigger signal from the TRG IN connector External Trigger 2 Trigger signal from the TRG AUX connector Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 on page 107 Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT2 See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 216 IF Power Trigger Source Trigger Settings The R amp S FPS starts capturing data as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the third intermediate frequency For frequency sweeps the third IF represents the start frequency The trigger band width at the third IF depends on the RBW and sweep type For measurements on a fixed frequency e g zero span or UO measurements the third IF represents the center frequency This trigger source is only available for RF input Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuation and preamplification A refer ence level offset if defined is also considered For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet Remote command TRIG SOUR IFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 216 RF Power Trigger Source Trigger Settings Defines triggering of the measurement via signals which are outside the displayed measurement range For this purpose the instrument uses a level detector at the first intermediate fre quency The input signal must be in th
16. RST ON Example CONF SPEC MOD REF MEAS OFF Manual operation See Enabling a reference power measurement Measure on page 153 See Defining Reference Powers Manually on page 154 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence PLEVel Level This command defines the reference power level for MCWN measurements if no ref erence measurement is performed see CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence MEASure on page 244 Parameters Level power level in dBm RST 0 00 Example CONF SPEC MOD REF MEAS OFF CONF SPEC MOD REF PLEV 35 Manual operation See Power Level on page 154 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence RPOWer lt RBW gt lt Level gt This command defines the reference power level using different RBWs for MCWN measurements if no reference measurement is performed see CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence MEASure on page 244 The query returns the measured values and is only available if a reference measure ment is performed Parameters Level reference power level in dBm without a unit 11 6 5 Configuring and Performing MCWN Measurements Parameters for setting and query lt RBW gt RBW in Hz 30e3 Reference power for RBW 30 kHz 100e3 Reference power for RBW 100 kHz 300e3 Reference power for RBW 300 kHz Example CONF SPEC MOD REF MEAS OFF CONF SPEC MOD REF PLEV 35 CONF SPEC MOD REF RPOW 300e3 34 7 CONF SPEC MOD REF RPO
17. e Inthe Overview select the Reference Meas button Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Reference Meas Noise Meas Reference Power Measurements Measure Average Count Carrier Selection Carrier Reference Powers Power Level Ref Power RBW 300 KHz Ref Power RBW 100 KHz Ref Power RBW 30 KHz Enabling a reference power measurement Measure le 153 Reference Average Count EE 153 Carrier Selection CatTiBr c c naa EE eee EROR RR Peru RR ME eae FRATER Ex 154 Defining Reference Powers Manually 2 2 ite cti SST NEE deeg 154 2 15 m 154 L Ref Power RBW 300 kHz 154 L Ref Power RBW E 154 L Ref Power RBW 30 WAZ icscccsssncssdsdvaseisssassnunadassssanssiacdsaserssarsseunddascsdiartnaess 155 Enabling a reference power measurement Measure If enabled the reference powers of all active carriers are measured for MCWN mea surements If disabled the reference powers must be defined manually see Defining Reference Powers Manually on page 154 For details see Reference measurement on page 71 Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence MEASure on page 244 Reference Average Count Defines the number of reference measurements to be performed in order to determine the average reference values Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence AVERage COUNt on page 242 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measu
18. 0 Slot Scope i Count 200 200 1 Magnitude Capture 1 Cira ALES 20 0 ms 2 PvT Full Burst 2 E 385 ps odulation Accuracy 4 Power vs Slot Current Average Std Dev Slot Current Frame fk Grest Ri Frames Phase Error 1 Channel bar for firmware and measurement settings 2 3 Window title bar with diagram specific trace information 4 Diagram area 5 Diagram footer with diagram specific information depending on measurement 6 Instrument status bar with error messages progress bar and date time display MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode additional tabs and elements are available An orange back ground behind the measurement channel tabs indicates that you are in MSRA operat ing mode For details on the MSRA operating mode see chapter 5 17 GSM in MSRA Operating Mode on page 82 and the R amp S FPS MSRA User Manual Channel bar information In the GSM application the R amp S FPS shows the following settings for the default I Q measurement User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 12 Understanding the Display Information MultiView 2 GSM Ref Level 50 00 dBm Offset 40 18 Device Band BTS Norrr E G 00 SGI Att 20 dB Freq ARFCN 335 0 Mt 0 Slot Scope Ek I Count 200 200 Table 2 1 Information displayed in the channel bar in the GSM application for the default I Q mea surement Ref Level Reference level m el Att Mechanical and electronic RF attenuation Offset Re
19. 3 o g u du Phase of a GMSK signal due to a sequence of symbols 5 1 where 5 9 2 Definition of the Symbol Period e g t the frequency pulse e T the normal symbol period The modulating index is chosen such that the maximum phase change of 11 2 radians per data interval is achieved Note that the standard 3GPP TS 45 004 specifies in chapter 2 5 Output phase for Normal Burst GMSK The time reference t 0 is the start of the active part of the burst as shown in figure 1 This is also the start of the bit period of bit number 0 the first tail bit as defined in 3GPP TS 45 002 The phase change due to the first tail symbol is illustrated at the bottom of figure 5 12 where you can see that the decision instant corresponding to the center of the fre quency pulse occurs at the beginning of the first symbol period i e at t 0 GMSK Frequency Pulse DA Frequency o o ho to e ech Q 25 2 45 1 0 5 0 0 5 1 1 5 2 2 5 Time Symbol Periods First Transmitted Symbol Phase Decision Instant Phase rad g g 25 2 45 1 0 5 0 0 5 1 1 5 2 2 5 Time Symbol Periods Fig 5 12 GMSK Frequency Pulse top and phase of the first tail symbol bottom 8PSK 16QAM 32QAM AQPSK Modulation Normal Symbol Rate The EDGE transmit pulse is defined in the standard document 3GPP TS 45 004 as a linearised GMSK pulse as illustrated at the top of figure 5 13 Note that according to the definition in the standa
20. For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 332 or chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 336 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet lt FirstSlotl oMeas gt This command specifies the start for the measurement interval for multi slot measure ments i e the Power vs Time and Transient Spectrum measurements relative to the GSM frame boundary Parameters for setting and query FirstSlotToMeas 0 based index for the first slot to measure relative to the GSM frame start RST 0 Slots Example CONF CHAN MSL OFFS 5 Manual operation See First Slot to measure on page 120 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 332 or chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 336 Demodulation The demodulation settings provide additional information to optimize frame slot and symbol detection EE Le DEEN de e e 228 CONFigure MSS YNOSONIL E 229 CONFigurerMSESVNO TOO IWreshold accum waded a rt et Rer ene tree 230 GONFig re MSEDEMod DECISIO 2 2 ccrta citet preter Rae vk ka e a aaa DRM ai 230 EE Lee Dee RG Kn RT E EEN CONFigure MS SYNC MODE lt Mode gt This command sets the synchronization mode of the R amp S FPS K10 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query lt Mode gt ALL TSC BURSt NONE ALL
21. Normal Symbol Period Burst Reduced Symbol Period Burst Fig 5 17 Timing alignment between normal symbol period and reduced symbol period bursts As described in chapter 5 9 Definition of the Symbol Period on page 59 the middle of TSC can be defined with respect to symbol periods and symbol decision instants This is illustrated in figure 5 18 You can see that for normal symbol period bursts Nor mal bursts the middle of TSC for GMSK occurs exactly at the decision instant of sym bol 74 However for EDGE it occurs between the decision instants of symbols 73 and 74 while for reduced symbol period bursts Higher Symbol Rate bursts it occurs exactly at the decision instant of symbol 88 Timeslot Alignment EDGE Symbol 73 Decision GMSK Symbol 74 Decision EDGE Symbol 74 Decision CT EPP E EEL Middle of Midamble Symbol 88 Decision Normal Symbol Periods Reduced Symbol Periods Fig 5 18 Middle of TSC for normal and reduced symbol period bursts Timeslot alignment within the frame The standard document 3GPP TS 45 010 provides details on the alignment of slots within the GSM frame Optionally the BTS may use a timeslot length of 157 normal symbol periods on time slots with TN 0 and 4 and 156 normal symbol periods on timeslots with TN 1 2 3 5 6 7 rather than 156 25 normal symbol periods on all timeslots The alignment of slots therefore falls under the Not Equal Timeslot Length Equal T
22. RST GMSK Example CONF CHAN SLOTO MTYP GMSK Manual operation See Modulation on page 96 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 332 or chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 336 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt SCPir lt Value gt This command specifies the Subchannel Power Imbalance Ratio SCPIR of the speci fied slot Notes Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements This command is only available for AQPSK modulation Suffix lt s gt lt 0 7 gt Number of slot to configure Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt numeric value Subchannel Power Imbalance Ratio SCPIR in dB Range 15 to 15 RST 0 Default unit NONE Example JI Subchannel Power Imbalance Ratio SCPIR 4 dB CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SCPir 4 Manual operation See SCPIR on page 96 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 336 or chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 336 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt SUBChannel lt ch gt TSC USER lt Value gt This command sets the bits of the user definable TSC The number of bits must be 26 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT s SUBChannel ch TSC USER must be set first This command is only available for AQPSK modulation Suffix lt s gt lt
23. Remote command CONFigure MS SYNC IQCThreshold on page 230 Symbol Decision The symbol decision determines how the symbols are detected in the demodulator Setting this parameter does not affect the demodulation of normal bursts with GMSK modulator For normal bursts with 8PSK 16QAM 32QAM or AQPSK modulation or higher symbol rate bursts with QPSK 16QAM or 32QAM modulation use this parame ter to get a trade off between performance symbol error rate of the R amp S FPS GSM application and measurement speed Auto Automatically selects the symbol decision method 6 3 8 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Linear Linear symbol decision Uses inverse filtering a kind of zero forcing filter and a symbol wise decision method This method is recommen ded for high symbol to noise ratios but not for higher symbol rate bursts with a narrow pulse The inverse filter colors the noise inside the signal bandwidth and therefore is not recommended for narrow band signals or signals with a low signal to noise ratio Peaks in the EVM vs Time measurement see EVM on page 17 may occur if the Linear symbol decision algorithm fails In that case use the Sequence method Linear is the fastest option Sequence Symbol decision via sequence estimation This method uses an algo rithm that minimizes the symbol errors of the entire burst It requires that the tail bits in the analyzed signal are correct It has a better per for
24. STATe essen enne 202 CONEFigure MS MGARrier FALLOCatlOn usa cuento ttr n tnr te t nennen reto 204 CONFigure MS MCARrier FALLocation NCONtiguous GSACartier essen 205 fece ni senes e e Rene m Y 326 GONFigure MSIE MAR ter MGB TS e tenter rtp Ce ener tdeo nn sbi sedinavecestaaevcrenesneencs 327 GONFigureEMSEMCARtriet STATE krer isinara ert ene re tnra taies ene tino 327 CONFigure MS MTYPe GONFigureE MSI MULTIBURSEGCONSSIell 2 terni tne cent tete tern tnnt 324 GONFigureEMS MULTIEBU RSEDENModulation 2 2 tir ihrer tn rne rnt tr kt rere 324 CONFigureE MSEMULTEB RSEP TEMDplale ect coeno rrr arr rre ere t reet oorr ecu n rer conce 324 CONFigureEMS MULTI SPECtrum MOBDWUlation inn nein tn e tr tnnt tret rn tnt rrr 324 GONFigureEMS MULTI SPECtrum SWI Tching oc coe pnt eroe tret ket 325 EE EE ER EIER RE 325 GONFigure MS NETWork FREQuUency BAND conr reir rne n tr tere n i i 192 CONFig reEMSINETWOrk TYPE sii iino e t icin be rtr mr EE eure erii cr ERR CERE E 192 CONFigure iMS POWeGAUTO ONGE cresce reise tex Scr tet Y Hb CHE i TAES Peer ERES AAE ETE EEE 328 GONFigureMSI POWer AUTO SWEep T IME rnit ttr ttr rne ete rre trn 239 CONFigure MS POWer CLASs GONFigure MST POWerPOARrIeE AU TO EE 195 GONFigureEMS POWer PORARTFIGt rnnt err rr een n rr pee en ire rnnt en 194 VE e e UE RER Le ET 328 CONF
25. lt Abs Rel gt Indicates whether relative dB or absolute dBm limit and level values are returned For more information see CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching LIMIT lt Status gt Result of the limit check in character data form PASSED no limit exceeded FAILED limit exceeded Example READ SPEC SWIT 0 998200000 998200000 84 61 56 85 REL PASSED 0 998400000 998400000 85 20 56 85 REL PASSED Usage Query only Manual operation See Transient Spectrum Table on page 30 FETCh SPECtrum SWITching REFerence READ SPECtrum SWITching REFerence IMMediate This command starts the measurement and returns the measured reference power of the Transient Spectrum This command is only available for Transient Spectrum Table evaluations see Tran sient Spectrum Table on page 30 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command The result is a list of partial result strings separated by commas Return values lt Level1 gt measured reference power in dBm lt Level2 gt measured reference power in dBm lt RBW gt resolution bandwidth used to measure the reference power in Hz Example READ SPECtrum SWITching REFerence IMMediate Manual operation See Transient Spectrum Table on page 30 READ SPECtrum SWITching REFerence GATing This command reads out the gating settings for gated measurem
26. 15 This bit is always 0 11 10 2 STATus QUEStionable LIMit Register The STATus QUEStionable LIMit register contains application specific informa tion about limit line checks Various bits are set based on the measurement result con figured for a window If any errors occur in this register the status bit 9 in the STATus QUEStionable register is set to 1 Status Reporting System Each active channel uses a separate STATus QUEStionable LIMit register Thus if the status bit 9 in the STATus QUEStionable register indicates an error the error may have occurred in any of the channel specific STATus QUEStionable LIMit registers In this case you must check the register of each channel to determine which channel caused the error By default querying the status of a register always returns the result for the currently selected channel However you can specify any other chan nel name as a query parameter 11 10 3 11 10 3 1 Table 11 8 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable LIMit register Bit No Meaning 0 For PvT Modulation and Transient measurement results indicates the upper limit check result pass failure For MCWN Spectrum measurement result wideband noise limit line check including excep tions if activated 1 For PvT measurement result indicates the lower limit check result pass failure For MCWN Spectrum measurement result IM 100 kHz limit line
27. According to the standard see Timeslot length in 3GPP TS 45 010 there are either eight slots of equal length 156 25 NSP or slot 0 and slot 4 have a length of 157 NSP Limit Checks while all other slots have a length of 156 NSP For details see chapter 5 11 Timeslot Alignment on page 65 The timeslot length is defined as the distance between the centers of the TSCs in suc cessive slots By setting the Limit Time Alignment parameter to Per Slot the Delta to Sync values can be measured and used in order to verify the timeslot lenghts Setting the Limit Line Time Alignment to Slot to measure displays the expected val ues according to the standard and depending on the value of Equal Timeslot Length These values are summarized in Expected Delta to Sync values in normal symbol periods Slot to measure 0 No of slots 8 and First slot to measure 0 Table 5 7 Expected Delta to Sync values in normal symbol periods Slot 0 Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Number to mea sure Equal 0 156 25 312 50 468 75 625 00 781 25 937 50 1093 75 Timeslot Length On Equal 0 157 313 469 625 782 938 1094 Timeslot Length Off 5 13 Limit Checks e Limit Check for Modulation Spectrum ces itte eo rero ta rere rer ete des 68 e Limit Check for Transient Gpechum eene 69 e Limit Check for Power vs Time Results ter ett e ntt eene hte 69 5 13 1 Limit Check for Modulation Spectrum The dete
28. CONF CHAN MSL NOFS 2 CONF CHAN MSL OFFS 0 gg 2s PvT Measurement settings Check PvT filter CONF BURS PTEM FILT G1000 Align the limit line to mid of TSC TS for each slot CONF BURS PTEM TAL PSL Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished INITiate IMMediate WAI In PvT limits are checked against the max in min traces Query the max power vs time trace TRAC2 DATA TRACe2 Query the result of the power vs time limit check for max trace CALCulate2 LIMit1 FAIL gt 0 Query the min power vs time trace TRAC2 DATA TRACe3 Query the result of the power vs time limit check for min trace CALCulate2 LIMit2 FAIL gt 0 Query the result of the power vs time limit FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOTO LIM FAIL gt 0 Query the result of the power vs time limit FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 LIM FAIL f gt 0 Q heck for slot 0 a heck for slot 1 a Query the maximum phase error value for slot 1 slot to measure in current GSM frame FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK CURR 11 13 4 11 13 5 Programming Examples gt 0 21559642255306244 Query the maximum phase error value for slot 1 slot to measure in all 200 GSM frames FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK MAX gt 0 35961171984672546 Query the averaged phase error RMS value for slot 1 slot to measure in all 2
29. First Slot to Measure 2 J III Frame Configuration Select Slot to Configure Norm Norm Norm A Fig 5 6 Frame configuration in Slot Scope settings This graphic can be interpreted as follows Each slot is represented by its number 0 to 7 e Slot numbers within the defined slot scope are highlighted green The number of the defined Slot to Measure is highlighted blue Active slots are indicated by polygonal symbols above the number which contain the following information The burst type e g Norm for a normal burst The modulation e g GMSK The training sequence TSC and Set or Sync for access bursts 5 7 Overview of filters in the R amp S FPS GSM application The R amp S FPS GSM application requires a number of filters for different stages of sig nal processing These include the Multicarrier filter for multicarrier base station mea surements only the Power vs Time filter and the Measurement filter A signal flow diagram is shown in figure 5 7 to illustrate where the different filters are used SSS eee User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 55 5 7 1 Overview of filters in the R amp S FPS GSM application Synchronization VQ Capture Buffer PVT Measurements Transient Spectrum Measurements Reference Signal Generation Measurement Filter Modulation Spectrum Measurements Fig 5 7 Signal flow diagram highlighting filtering operations Power
30. The terms TSC and Midamble are used synonymously in the standard In this docu mentation we use the term TSC to refer to the known symbol sequence in the middle of the slot The R amp S FPS GSM application supports measurement of the following signals e GMSK bursts using the TSCs from Set 1 or Set 2 e AQPSK bursts with combinations of TSCs from Set 1 and 2 on the subchannels e AQPSK bursts with a user specified SCPIR The following measurements of the above signals are supported Power vs Time e Demod Modulation Accuracy EVM vs Time Phase Error vs Time Magnitude Error vs Time Constellation e Spectrum modulation transient including limit check e Automatic trigger offset detection o Restriction for auto frame configuration Auto Frame configuration only detects AQPSK normal bursts where the subchannels have a TSC according to table 5 3 The SCPIR value is detected with a resolution of 1 dB To obtain reliable measurement results on AQPSK normal bursts compare the auto detected slot settings with the settings of your device under test AQPSK Modulation Table 5 3 Required subchannel TSC assignment for AQPSK auto frame configuration AQPSK Subchannel 2 TSC j Set 1 TSC j Set 2 0 1 Sub TSC cha i nnel Set 1 1 5 4 AQPSK Modulation The AQPSK modulation scheme as proposed for use in GSM systems is illustrated in
31. and Q are unitless real Real number unitless polar Complex number in polar format i e magnitude unitless and phase rad values interleaved Requires DataType float32 or f1oat64 DataType Specifies the binary format used for samples in the UO data binary file see DataFilename element and chapter A 2 2 I Q Data Binary File on page 350 The following data types are allowed int8 8 bit signed integer data int16 16 bit signed integer data int32 32 bit signed integer data float32 32 bit floating point data IEEE 754 float64 64 bit floating point data IEEE 754 ScalingFactor Optional describes how the binary data can be transformed into values in the unit Volt The binary UO data itself has no unit To get an I Q sample in the unit Volt the saved samples have to be multiplied by the value of the ScalingFactor For polar data only the magnitude value has to be multiplied For multi channel signals the ScalingFactor must be applied to all channels The attribute unit must be set to v The ScalingFactor must be gt 0 If the ScalingFactor element is not defined a value of 1 V is assumed NumberOfChan nels Optional specifies the number of channels e g of a MIMO signal contained in the UO data binary file For multi channels the UO samples of the channels are expected to be interleaved within the UO data file see chapter A 2 2 I Q Data Binary File on page 350 If the NumberOfChannels el
32. lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the CONDition section of the status register 11 10 3 4 11 10 3 5 Status Reporting System The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only Controlling the ENABle Part STATus OPERation ENABle lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit ENABle lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt ENABle lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the ENABle part of a register The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to be reported in the summary bit If a bitis 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Controlling the Negative Transition Part STATus OPERation NTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable NTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit NTR
33. on page 125 Remote command TRACe IQ SRATe on page 221 Analysis Bandwidth The analysis bandwidth is indicated for reference only It defines the flat usable band width of the final I Q data This value is dependent on the Frequency list and the defined signal source The following rule applies analysis bandwidth 0 8 sample rate Note MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode the MSRA Master is restric ted to an input sample rate of 200 MHz Remote command TRACe IQ BWIDth on page 221 Capture Time Specifies the duration and therefore the amount of data to be captured in the capture buffer The capture time can be defined automatically or manually If Auto mode is enabled the optimal capture time is determined according to the Sam ple rate and Analysis Bandwidth In Manual mode be sure to define a sufficiently long capture time If the capture time is too short demodulation will fail Note The duration of one GSM slot equals 15 26 ms 0 576923 ms The duration of one GSM frame 8 slots equals 60 13 ms 4 615384 ms Tip In order to improve the measurement speed further by using short capture times consider the following Use an external trigger which indicates the frame start In this case the minimum allowed capture time is reduced from 10 ms to 866 us see chapter 5 5 Trigger settings on page 52 Measure only slots at the beginning of the frame directly after the trigger see cha
34. 3GPP TS 45 005 Annex G normative Calculation of Error Vector Magnitude NSP Normal Symbol Period symbol duration for normal symbol rate normal bursts RSP Reduced Symbol Period symbol duration for higher symbol rate HSR bursts 11 8 2 2 11 8 2 3 11 8 2 4 11 8 2 5 Retrieving Results PvT Full Burst Trace Results The Power vs Time results depend on the number of slots that are measured and thus the duration of the measurement 30 additional symbols NSP are added at the begin ning and at the end of the trace The number of trace result values is calculated as 30 lt NofSlots gt 157 30 ov where lt NofSlots gt Number of Slots Slot Scope ov oversampling factor 24 157 length of a long slot a slot can have a length of 156 156 25 or 157 symbols NSP Modulation Spectrum and Transient Spectrum Graph Results Modulation Spectrum and Transient Spectrum Graphs consist of 1135 trace values two less than in previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers Magnitude Capture Results The Magnitude Capture trace consists of 32001 trace values regardless of the defined capture time and thus of the length of the capture buffer To retrieve the complete captured UO data use the MMEM STOR IQ STAT com mand see MMEMory STORe lt n gt 10 STATe on page 316 Trigger to Sync Results The Trigger to Sync Graph results consist of two traces Thus the results of the TRAC
35. 425 0 10 0 48 1 MHz GSM 450 450 4 457 6 460 4 467 6 454 0 464 0 10 259 293 MHz GSM 480 478 8 486 0 488 8 496 0 482 4 492 4 10 306 340 MHz GSM 710 698 0 716 0 728 0 746 0 707 0 737 0 30 0 901 MHz GSM 750 747 0 762 0 777 0 792 0 754 5 784 5 30 438 511 MHz T GSM 810 806 0 821 0 851 0 866 0 813 5 858 5 45 D pi MHz GSM 850 824 0 849 0 869 0 894 0 836 5 881 5 45 128 251 MHz P GSM 900 890 0 915 0 935 0 960 0 902 5 947 5 45 1 124 MHz R amp S FPS K10 Basics on GSM Measurements Band Class UL Fre DL Fre Fre Band UL ARFCN MHz quen MHz quen quen DL cy cy cy Shift Mid dle Low Up Low Up UL DL Range 1 Range 2 E GSM 900 880 0 915 0 925 0 960 0 897 5 942 5 45 0 124 975 1023 MHz R GSM 900 876 0 915 0 921 0 960 0 895 5 940 5 45 0 124 955 1023 MHz T GSM 900 870 4 876 0 915 4 921 0 873 2 918 2 45 0 28 MHz DCS 1800 1710 1785 1805 1880 1747 1842 95 512 885 0 0 0 0 5 5 MHz PCS 1900 1850 1910 1930 1990 1880 1960 80 512 810 0 0 0 0 0 0 MHz 1 For these frequency bands there is no fixed ARFCN to frequency assignment instead it is calculated with a formula taking an OFFSET parameter which is signaled by a higher layer of the network The given ARFCNs assum
36. CONF MS MCAR CARR3 el REQ 935 MHZ REQ 935 6 MHZ REQ 936 2 MHZ m om CONF MS MCAR CARRA CONF MS MCAR CARR5 CONF MS MCAR CARR6 el REQ 941 2 MHZ REQ 941 8 MHZ REQ 942 4 MHZ kel nj CONF MS MCAR FALL NCON GSAC 3 Normal burst 8PSK modulation CONF MS MCAR CARR1 MTYP N8PS CONF MS MCAR CARR2 MTYP N8PS CONF MS MCAR CARR3 MTYP N8PS CONF MS MCAR CARR4 MTYP N8PS CONF MS MCAR CARR5 MTYP N8PS CONF MS MCAR CARR6 MTYP N8PS A Ai NM A A eege Span and Level Set Ref Level to 30 dBm DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel RF 0 DBM Set Ref Level Offset to 38 dB DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet 38 DB Set frequency span to the Tx band 10 MHz automatically SENS FREQ SPAN MODE TXB SENS FREQ SPAN SENS FREQ STAR SENS FREQ STOP Result span 45 0 MHz 925 MHZ to 970 MHz j5sessssses Configuring the reference measurement Configure the reference levels manually according to table 5 8 power level is 35 dBm CONF SPEC MOD REF MEAS OFF CONF SPEC MOD REF PLEV 35 CONF SPEC MOD REF RPOW 30e3 27 3 CONF SPEC MOD REF RPOW 100e3 31 2 CONF SPEC MOD REF RPOW 300e3 33 3 Programming Examples pesten Configuring the noise measurement Define an average count of 200 SENS SWE COUN 200 Determine wideband noise narrowband noise and intermodulation products of orders 3 and 5 CONF SPEC NWID ON CONF SPEC NNAR O
37. Demodulation button to determine how bursts are detected and demodulated 9 Select the Measurement button and define the special measurement settings for the Spectrum measurements e Formulticarrier base stations define which carriers are measured the left most carrier only Enable Left Limit ON the right most carrier only Enable Right Limit ON all carriers Enable Left Limit ON Enable Right Limit ON e Select the type of resolution filter to be used For measurements strictly according to standard use the Normal 3dB filter e Select the frequency list to be used to determine the modulation spectrum For a quick overview select a sparse list for a conformance test use the list specified by the standard As a rule use the narrow list to test mobile devices use the wide list for base station tests e Select the reference power to be used to determine the relative limit values for the transient spectrum For measurements strictly according to standard use the RMS setting 10 Select the Display Config button and select one or more of the following displays for spectrum results up to a total of 16 windows e Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 22 Modulation Spectrum Table on page 23 Transient Spectrum Graph on page 29 Transient Spectrum Table on page 30 Tips e Also display the Magnitude Capture for a general overview of the measured data e Use the graph displays for a general ov
38. For multicarrier measurements the GSM standard defines limits for some parameters concerning noise and intermodulation products Thus a new separate measurement is provided by the R amp S FPS GSM application the Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measure ment MCWN This measurement comprises e Q based measurements on the carriers to determine their power levels and refer ence powers e Frequency sweeps with RBWs of 100 kHz to measure wideband noise and 300 kHz to measure intermodulation products e Gated zero span measurements with an RBW of 30 kHz to measure narrowband noise e MCWN Measurement Process nennen nnne nennen nnns 71 e Contiguous vs Non Contiguous Multicarrier Allocation 73 e Manual Reference Power Definition for MCWN Meaeurements 74 e Limit Check for MOWLBUR6SUlIS cet ette iaia io tes 75 e Intermodulation Calculaton nnne ennemi 77 e Wideband Noise Measurement nennen eene nnne nnn nnn nin 80 MCWN Measurement Process The MCWN measurement consists of several sub measurements and may include averaging processes Reference measurement Optionally a reference measurement is carried out to obtain suitable reference power values for the actual noise measurement The reference measurement can determine the reference powers of the active carrier with the maximum power level or optionally measure just one selected carrier Several reference measurements can be performed subsequently to calculate an average thus e
39. Graph results remote AAA 275 Graph evaluation method 22 Limit check uoo nter t retreat 68 Nartow AMIdG iure roe tree ME ce Pts 25 Settings ene 125 Table results remote 288 Table evaluation Method sciiti 23 Table frequency list QT MS Mobile Station 2 2 cnet 345 MSRA Analysis interval 116 219 jeje 34 Operating mode ueteri ote 82 MSRA applications Capture Onset cuti ae ec Deed 116 Capture offset remote A 266 MSRA Master Data COVerag e EE 82 Multi standard radio MSR signals 73 Multicarrier BTS Ip E 98 135 Multicarrier Wideband Noise measurements SEG MCWIN gett 33 Multiple Measurement channels ccccccccesseeeeeeeseseeee 11 85 Multiple carriers EE EE 73 EVM 2222 2 178 Limit check 2 140 Multiple ZOOM x itin err ene ntes 165 N Narrow pulse 2 2 mn tiet tpi ede eeu 45 62 122 ilg 96 Narrowband measurement Results C ege 41 Narrowband noise MEWN ce 71 72 Measurement sssini too kei da ccn saei 156 Noise Narrowband 2 2 etri aian 71 72 eleme 107 145 Wideband EE 72 Noise measurement Average count MOWN eseese 152 155 Limit lines MCWN MEWN remote meo epit treni Narrowband MCWN A 156 Settings MCWN ahs Wideband MCWN issiiisriisiiinrnrcnnsnnirneiiii senansa 156 Non
40. However you can easily analyze the edges in more detail using the zoom functions see chapter 7 2 Zoom Functions on page 164 The following default settings are used for a Power vs Time evaluation Table 4 8 Default settings for a Power vs Time evaluation Setting Default Measurement Scope The slot scope defined by First Slot to measure and Number of Slots to mea sure Averaging Configuration Number of bursts as selected in Statistic Count Limit Check According to standard e The maximum Max trace is checked agains the upper limit e The minimum Min trace is checked against the lower limit See chapter 5 13 3 Limit Check for Power vs Time Results on page 69 Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH PTF see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 249 Results TRACe n DATA on page 270 TRACe lt n gt DATA X on page 271 CALCulate n LIMit k FAIL on page 302 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer DATA on page 303 CALCulate n LIMit k CONTrol DATA on page 302 User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 28 R amp S FPS K10 Measurements and Result Displays Transient Spectrum Graph The transient spectrum is very similar to the modulation spectrum evaluation it evalu ates the power vs frequency trace by measuring the power over several frames How ever as opposed to the modulation spectrum evaluation the entire slot scope defined by the Number of Slots to measure and the First S
41. IF or baseband domains can be ana lyzed in the UO baseband Importing and exporting UO signals is useful for various applications e Generating and saving UO signals in an RF or baseband signal generator or in external software tools to analyze them with the R amp S FPS later e Capturing and saving UO signals with an RF or baseband signal analyzer to ana lyze them with the R amp S FPS or an external software tool later As opposed to storing trace data which may be averaged or restricted to peak values UO data is stored as it was captured without further processing The data is stored as complex values in 32 bit floating point format Multi channel data is not supported The UO data is stored in a format with the file extension iq tar For a detailed description see the R amp S FPS UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual UO data import and export is only available for Modulation Accuracy measurements MCWN measurements include a combination of I Q based and sweep based mea surements Export only in MSRA mode In MSRA mode UO data can only be exported to other applications I Q data cannot be imported to the MSRA Master or any MSRA applications e mporUEXDBON PUMGUONS crore derriere td epic rua deii bari des rta 166 e Howto Export and Import VQ Data renti the nennt 167 Import Export Functions The following import and export functions are available via softkeys in the Save Recall menu which is displayed wh
42. IM Ee E le 77 K Keys LINES not used ct ettet 87 130 dic ie 162 MKR FUNCT not used 87 130 Peak Search rc pesce bene etin 163 RUN CONT vier 1177152 RUN SINGLE tinere gt retenta sete 118 152 L Limit check Active e Calculating Modulation Spectrum Multiple carriers Se Power vs MIMO enee ierens ence sa soe D Eug Restricting Spectr viuen Transient Spectrum T Troubleshooting 5 5 entrent m entere ee Limit lines Exceptions MOWN cdit nete 156 SS PO CHUN RE 126 Time aligPbEfebtu isccotcn irri Eh nente nea nee ec t 125 Limit Time Alignment scil Linearized GMSK pulse is ilc eee 96 M Magnitude Capture Evaluation Method 2 2 enne rebns 18 Results remote 275 276 Trace dataset eser egt itd eta ede 273 Magnitude Error Evaluation Method 2 cs hie dsc ASA 19 Results remote eee ands 274 Marker table Configuring Evaluation method Market tO IESEL dre direc e Ts Markers Absolute peak nera 163 Assigned trace 161 Configuration remote 22 259 Configuring 160 Configuring Softkey eet eerte 159 Deactivating 161 Delta markers vee 161 Minimum aa 163 Peak sieves ccc M 163 Positioning 162 Positioning remote edy 2
43. LIMit FAIL READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt LIMit FAIL This command starts a Power vs Time measurement and queries the result of the limit check for the selected slot Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command Note in manual operation the result of the limit check for an individual slot is included in the Power vs Slot results see Power vs Slot on page 26 Suffix lt Slot gt lt 0 7 gt Slot number to perform the limit check on The selected slot must be within the slot scope i e First slot to measure S slot lt First slot to measure Num ber of Slots to measure 1 Return values lt Result gt 1 0 ON OFF 1 ON Pass 0 OFF Fail Example READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 LIMit FAIL Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 26 11 8 7 Retrieving Results For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 332 Transient Spectrum Results The following commands are required to query the results of the Modulation Spectrum Table evaluation For details on the individual results see Modulation Spectrum Table on page 23 READ vs FETCh commands Note that two commands are provided which are almost identical The READ command starts the measurement and reads out the result When the mea surement is started the R amp S FPS GSM applicatio
44. MACCuracy EVM RMS AVERage sss 282 READ BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS CURRent i eeeiiiieteee aient che ad esos tak dd dab Ne 282 READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS MAXIMUM nennen 282 READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS SDEViation sse 282 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy FREQuency AVERage cesis esee aaa 283 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy FREQuency CURRent eese ene n ene ne nnns nan 283 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy FREQuency MAXimum isses 283 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy FREQuency SDEViation sse 283 READ BURG MAC CuracvlEREOuencv AVERage neret 283 READ BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency CURRent sse nennen 283 READ BURG MAC CuracvlFREOuencv MA Ximum eene 283 READ BURG MAC CuracvlEREOuencv GDEViaton eene 283 FETOCh BURG MAC Curacvl lOlMbalance AVERage enne 283 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy IQlMbalance CURRent sss 283 FETOCH BURG MAC Curacvl lOlMbalance MA Nimum nennen 283 FETOCH BURG MAC Curacvl lOlMbalance GDtEViaton aiid apaiiiiaa 283 READ BURG MAC CuracvltlOlMbalance AVERage nennen 283 READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQlMbalance CLRbent enne 283 READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQlMbalance MAXimum esses 283 READ BURSt MACCuracy lQIMbalance SDEViation 0 2 cececcecececeeeececaeeeeeeeeeeeeneneteneneees 283 FETChBURGOC MAC CuracvllOOFiset AVERage enne eene 284 FETChBURGOC MAC CuracvllOOkFisetCLUlRbent reete 284 FETCh B
45. Manual operation See Magnitude Capture on page 18 Modulation Accuracy Results The following commands are required to query the results of the Modulation Accu racy evaluation For details on the individual results see table 4 1 READ vs FETCh commands Note that for each result type two commands are provided which are almost identical The READ command starts the measurement and reads out the result When the mea surement is started the R amp S FPS GSM application is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt commands Statistical results For most results both the current result and the statistical evaluation of all results over a number of frames specified by Statistic Count are provided For details on how the statistical evaluation is performed see table 4 2 FETGCh BURSIEMAOCGwacy AUL as centre reet aa aa ERA ETARA 280 READ BURSIEMACC racy EE 280 FETCh BURSIEMAGCCuracy ADROOp AVER ag6e7 adu aana cnet pude adia 281 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy ADRoop CURRent aces ciiiise sese eene naeh sa nan 281 FETChBURGOC MAC Curacvl ADboop MANimum eene nnne nnne 281 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy ADRoop SDEViation cesses 281 READ BURSIt MACCuracy ADRoop AVERage eise nennen nnne 281 Retrieving Results READ BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop CURReM1 c seeees
46. Overview The Overview is displayed when you select the Overview icon which is available at the bottom of all softkey menus step 0 Bim Device Band E dte idR Erea ARECN i Slot Senne Count za sica Cop e Le Level Offset Offset Re Input Frontend d Sta unt Es Trigger Data Acquisition inn an Demodulation Measurement Result Config Display Config f I I CEI Y Axis Slot Scope Syr n E Leesch a 1 Magnitude Capture H Fig 6 1 Configuration Overview for Modulation Accuracy measurement In addition to the main measurement settings the Overview provides quick access to the main settings dialog boxes The individual configuration steps are displayed in the order of the data flow Thus you can easily configure an entire measurement channel from input over processing to output and analysis by stepping through the dialog boxes as indicated in the Overview In particular the Overview provides quick access to the following configuration dialog boxes listed in the recommended order of processing 1 Signal Description See chapter 6 3 3 Signal Description on page 91 2 Input and Frontend Settings See chapter 6 3 4 Input and Frontend Settings on page 100 3 Triggering See chapter 6 3 5 Trigger Settings on page 108 4 Data Acquisition See chapter 6 3 6 Data Acquisition on page 114 5 Demodulation Settings See chapter 6 3 7 Demodulation on page 118 6 Measurement Settings
47. Parameter value Window type TSTable Transient Spectrum Table Multicarrier wideband noise measurement IIMProducts Inner IM Table INAR Inner Narrowband Table IWID Inner Wideband Table OIMProducts Outer IM Table ONAR Outer Narrowband Table OWID Outer Wideband Table WSFDomain Spectrum Graph WSRPower Carrier Power Table LAYout CATalog WINDow This command queries the name and index of all active windows in the active mea surement channel from top left to bottom right The result is a comma separated list of values for each window with the syntax lt WindowName_1 gt lt Windowlndex_1 gt lt WindowName_n gt lt Windowlndex_n gt Return values lt WindowName gt string Name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Windowlndex numeric value Index of the window Example LAY CAT Result L TER 7 Two windows are displayed named 2 at the top or left and 1 at the bottom or right Usage Query only LAYout IDENtify WINDow lt WindowName gt This command queries the index of a particular display window in the active measure ment channel Note to query the name of a particular window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify query Query parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window Analyzing GSM Measurements Return values lt WindowIndex gt Index number of the window Usage Query only LAYout REMove WINDow lt Win
48. Resolution Spectrum results Signal Now GSM iiiter e t ete te mtl noe Transient Specltlulm ecco terere teet emet Alle EE Format Data remote Frames Configuration ind Configuration Auto Set AA 129 Configuration automatic remote 238 Multi uR Searchin MT 52 le 46 Free Run daer da a cotes e eene d s e NES 110 148 Frequency BANA Siseseinte Bands GSM standard Bands default 2 etre 88 131 eI RE Steer ara aa naa 99 137 Configuration MOHN nseries roninas 138 Configuration remote 208 Configuration Softkey 101 TOPPING intr meme e ree teens 46 List Modulation Spectrum Table zu 127 List Spa S8 Geste ctt i ER eene ts 127 List Sample rale 2 5 1 eee meas 177 List Spectrum limit lines E MEWN remote 1 ehe tereti etie 240 II GE 103 141 SPAN WEE 140 Start 140 Stop 140 Frequency sweep measurements V elle UL g Info RE 130 Selecting eter e reete redes 130 Frontend Configuration sesiis t ren Configuration remote Lid MGCWN remote irren eerte ect G Gap eI C m 99 137 GMSK E Measurement filter A 58 Modulation eei cont ei cena 59 96 PUISE 59 Pulse EE 96 GPRS scs 49 345 GSM E 45 345 Measurements ute cix tentent ia a 16 EE Teen Le E 67 H Hardware s
49. Slot to measure was found are displayed and taken into account in the averaging of the results The behavior of this function depends on the value of the Synchronization parameter see CONFigure MS SYNC MODE on page 228 Parameters for setting and query State ON OFF RST ON Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Example CONF SYNC MODE TSC Search the capture buffer for the TSC of the Slot to measure as given in the frame configuration CONF SYNC ONLY ON Only if the TSC is found the results are displayed Manual operation See Measure only on Sync on page 122 CONFigure MS SYNC IQCThreshold Value This command sets the IQ correlation threshold The IQ correlation threshold decides whether a burst is accepted if Measure only on Sync is activated If the correlation value between the ideal IQ signal of the given TSC and the measured TSC is below the IQ correlation threshold then the application reports Sync not found in the status bar Additionally such bursts are ignored if Measure only on Sync is activated Parameters for setting and query Value Range 0 to 100 RST 85 Default unit NONE Example CONF SYNC IQCT 0 Manual operation See Q Correlation Threshold on page 122 CONFigure MS DEMod DECision Value This command determines how the symbols are detected in the demodulator The set ting of this parameter does not effect the demodulation of Normal Bursts wi
50. Suffix n irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 Continuous measurement OFF 0 Single measurement RST 0 Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the measurement mode to single measurement INIT CONT ON Switches the measurement mode to continuous measurement Manual operation See Continuous Sweep RUN CONT on page 117 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements INITiate DISPlay lt State gt This command turns the display update during single sweep measurements on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON INITiate lt n gt IMMediate This command starts a single new measurement You can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FPS User Manual Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Usage Event Manual operation See Single Sweep RUN SINGLE on page 118 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt This command stops the currently active sequence of measurements The Sequencer itself is not deactivated so you can start a new sequence immediately using INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate on page 224 To deactivate the Sequencer use SYSTem SEQuencer on page 189 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Usage Event Manual operation See Sequencer State on page 86 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate This command starts a new sequence of measurements by the Sequencer Its effect is
51. Symbols BGPP 345 TS AG E 50 TS 45 004 45 48 51 59 TS 45 005 45 58 68 127 DE ao m 45 65 MSD Mo 45 TS OVOZI EE 45 127 TE 48 345 Measurement filter A 58 Modulation icit street coto tnr 96 Symbol PSHOG E 60 62 16QAM enses 45 48 345 Measurement ter 58 Modulation errechnet rni sends 96 Symbol PSHOG E 60 62 32QAM Measurement filter ssesessseeeeeee 58 Modulation cerei coats cca hc 96 Symbol peOd EE 60 62 A Aborting i ol 117 118 152 ACIDE COUPIING iiti caen ttc eere 100 138 Access bursts Limit line time alignment enne 125 Activating GSM remote Adaptive Data Size Alignment Be EE 125 Amplitude Configuration remote c cecceeeeeeeeeseeeeeetteeeeeeee 210 Configuration Softkey A 104 141 SOlliligs iue tete TET 104 141 Analysis Bandwidth siento rever cem ee eere de 115 Button Analysis interval Configuration MSRA remote ssss 264 MSRA 2 116 219 Analysis WAG n rrr roc rrr necem nre o 83 Configuration MSRA remote sssssss 264 AQPSK qu 49 51 345 Constellation diagram ico oria cecinere 52 Oe TEE 96 ARFON 46 103 208 345 GSM Standard RE 47 Attenuation fU 105 143 Configuration remote
52. This command defines the magnitude the UO data must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV Top 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 112 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level the RF input must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered The input signal must be between 500 MHz and 8 GHz Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV RFP 30dBm Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 112 TRIGger SEQuence RFPower HOLDoff lt Time gt This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event Note that this command is available for any trigger source not just RF Power Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 214 command for new remote control programs Parameters Time Default unit S TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe Type Parameters Type POSitive NEGative POSiti
53. Trigger settings on page 52 The R amp S FPS GSM application expects the trigger event to be the start of the active part in slot O offset 0 Start of the measurement is delayed offset 0 Measurement starts earlier pre trigger Remote command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 214 Slope Trigger Settings For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe on page 216 Hysteresis Trigger Settings Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Settting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level This setting is only available for IF Power trigger sources The range of the value is between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis on page 214 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Trigger Holdoff Trigger Settings Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 214 Trigger 2 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER AUX connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is
54. figure 5 3 First the bits from two users subchannels 1 and 2 are interleaved The combined bit sequence is then mapped to an AQPSK constellation which depends on the SCPIR value The AQPSK symbols are then modulated using the linearized GMSK pulse see 3GPP TS 45 004 Sub chanel 1 bits a a S laid ar AU E de n Fig 5 3 AQPSK modulation scheme for GSM systems The proposed AQPSK mapping as assumed in the R amp S FPS GSM application is given in table 5 4 and illustrated in figure 5 4 where the first leftmost bit corresponds to subchannel 1 and the second rightmost bit corresponds to subchannel 2 SCIPR AQPSK Mapping Table 5 4 AQPSK symbol mappings reproduced from 3GPP TS 45 004 Modulating bits for AQPSK symbol in polar notation aj bi Si 0 0 et 0 1 ej 1 0 ei 1 1 elt Trigger settings The AQPSK modulation constellation diagram is shown in figure 5 4 where the value a is an angle related to the SCPIR as follows SCPIRgg 20 log o tan a dB Q A H X Lux Sy 1 1 0 1 Fig 5 4 AQPSK constellation reproduced from 3GPP TS 45 004 5 5 Trigger settings The GSM measurements can be performed in Free Run untriggered mode how ever an external trigger or a power trigger can speed up measurements To perform measurements the R amp S FPS GSM application needs the frame start as a time refer ence The R amp S FPS GSM application sea
55. grams CONFigure MS SSEarch State This command is retained for compatibility with R amp S FPS K5 only In new K10 remote scripts use CONFigure MS SYNC MODE TSC or CONFigure MS SYNC MODE ALL instead see CONFigure MS SYNC MODE on page 228 Parameters for setting and query lt State gt 1 O0 ON OFF ON TSC search on OFF TSC search off RST 1 Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility Example CONF SSE ON CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIMIT lt Mode gt This command selects whether the list results power and limit values of the Wide Modulation Spectrum measurement are returned in a relative dB or absolute dBm unit This command is only available when the Wide Modulation Spectrum measure ment is selected see CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation IMMediate on page 324 Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation LIMIT command for new remote control pro grams Parameters for setting and query Mode ABSolute RELative RST RELative Example Select Wide Modulation Spectrum measurement II gated zero span measurement CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation IMMediate JI Absolute power and limit results in dBm CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIMit ABSolute Run one measurement and query absolute list results READ WSPectrum MODulation ALL I gt 0 929200000 929200000 104 41 65 00 ABS PASSED FETCh
56. m MAXimum PEAK cessisse 261 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK cesses ener 261 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum APEak sets the marker to the largest absolute peak value maximum or minimum of the selected trace Usage Event Manual operation See Max Peak on page 163 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 163 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 163 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum APEak This command positions the active marker or deltamarker on the largest absolute peak value maximum or minimum of the selected trace Usage Event Analyzing GSM Measurements CALCulate n DELTamarkerem MAXimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 163 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activ
57. the trigger instant corresponds to the frame start Tip Manually adjust the trigger offset to move the burst to be ana lyzed under the mask in the Power vs Time measurement Note For None no demodulation measurements e g Modulation Accuracy are supported Only Power vs Time Modulation Spec trum Transient Spectrum measurements are supported Remote command CONFigure MS SYNC MODE on page 228 Measure only on Sync If activated default only results from frames slots where the Slot to Measure was found are displayed and taken into account in the averaging of the results The behav ior of this option depends on the value of the Synchronization parameter Remote command CONFigure MS SYNC ONLY on page 229 UO Correlation Threshold This threshold determines whether a burst is accepted if Measure only on Sync is acti vated If the correlation value between the ideal UO signal of the given TSC and the measured TSC is below the UO correlation threshold then the application reports Sync not found in the status bar Additionally such bursts are ignored if Measure only on Sync is activated Note If the R amp S FPS GSM application is configured to measure GMSK normal bursts a threshold below 97 will also accept 8PSK normal bursts with the same TSC for analysis In this case activate Measure only on Sync and set the I Q Correlation Threshold to 97 This will exclude the 8PSK normal bursts from the analysis
58. windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master lt n gt is irrelevant Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe VALue Position This command defines the position of the analysis line for all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master lt n gt is irrelevant Analyzing GSM Measurements Parameters lt Position gt Position of the analysis line in seconds The position must lie within the measurement time of the MSRA measurement Default unit s CALCulate lt n gt MSRA WINDows lt n gt IVAL This command queries the analysis interval for the window specified by the WINDow suffix lt n gt the CALC suffix is irrelevant This command is only available in application measurement channels not the MSRA View or MSRA Master Return values lt IntStart gt Start value of the analysis interval in seconds Default unit s lt IntStop gt Stop value of the analysis interval in seconds Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MSRA WINDow lt n gt MlVal This command queries the individual analysis intervals in the window specified by the WINDow suffix lt n gt the CALC suffix is irrelevant This command is only available for GSM measurement channels
59. 0 7 gt Number of slot to configure lt ch gt lt 1 2 gt Subchannel number Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt string String containing the 26 user defined bits Example Subchannel 1 User TSC CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT0 SUBChannell1 TSC USER CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT0O SUBChannell TSC gt USER Manual operation See User TSC User Sync on page 97 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 336 or chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 336 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt SUBChannel lt ch gt TSC lt Value gt This command selects the training sequence of the specified slot and subchannel used by the mobile or base station This command is only available for AQPSK modulation Suffix lt s gt lt 0 7 gt Number of slot to configure lt ch gt lt 1 2 gt Subchannel number Query parameters lt ResultType gt TSC SET Queries the currently used TSC number or the set Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt 0 1 02 1 1 1 2 2 11 22 3 1 3 22 4 1 4 2 5 1 5 2 6 1 6 2 7 1 7 2 USER TSC number and Set or User TSC Set 2 is only available for subchannel 2 RST 0 1 Example Subchannel 1 TSC 0 Set 1 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT0 SUBChannell TSC 0 1 Subchannel 1 Query TSC number and Set number CONFigure MS CHAN
60. 133 2 Input and Frontend Settings See chapter 6 4 4 Input and Frontend Settings on page 137 3 Triggering See chapter 6 4 5 Trigger Settings on page 146 4 Data Acquisition See chapter 6 4 6 Sweep Settings on page 151 5 Reference Measurement Settings See chapter 6 4 7 Reference Measurement Settings on page 152 6 Noise Measurement Settings See chapter 6 4 8 Noise Measurement Settings on page 155 7 Result Configuration See chapter 7 1 Result Configuration on page 158 6 4 3 6 4 3 1 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements 8 Display Configuration See chapter 6 2 Display Configuration on page 87 To configure settings gt Select any button to open the corresponding dialog box The corresponding dialog box is opened with the focus on the selected setting For step by step instructions on configuring GSM measurements see chapter 9 How to Perform Measurements in the GSM Application on page 170 Preset Channel Select the Preset Channel button in the lower lefthand corner of the Overview to restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values Note that the PRESET key restores the entire instrument to its default values and thus closes all measurement channels on the R amp S FPS except for the default Spectrum application channel For details see chapter 6 3 1 Default Settings for GSM Modulation Accuracy Mea surements on page 88 Remote
61. 153 and automatic carrier selection is active see Carrier Selection Carrier on page 154 e ref selected carrier for reference power If the reference power is determined by a reference measurement see Enabling a reference power measurement Measure on page 153 but the carrier is selected manually see Carrier Selection Carrier on page 154 e man manually defined reference powers see Defining Reference Powers Manually on page 154 Carrier frequency Frequency of the carrier at which power was measured Power level Measured power level in dBm Reference power with RBW Reference power for measurement with 300 kHz RBW or manually defined 300 kHz reference value Reference power with RBW Reference power for measurement with 100 kHz RBW or manually defined 100 kHz reference value Reference power with RBW Reference power for measurement with 30 kHz RBW or manually defined 30 kHz reference value Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH WSRP see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 249 Results FETCh WSPectrum REFerence POWer ALL on page 310 Inner IM Table Similar to the Outer IM Table but the measured intermodulation products up to the order specified in Intermodulation for the frequencies in the gap between the GSM carrier blocks for non contiguous carrier allocation are displayed The frequency offsets are defined as offsets from the closest carrier i e the uppermost carrier
62. 162 Marker Positioning Funchons ennemis 162 Individual Marker Settings In GSM evaluations up to 4 markers can be activated in each diagram at any time Analysis Markers Marker Settings Search Range Selected State Stimulus Settings All Marker Off Sjel ejie miem 1 Code Domain Power Marker Selected Marke 160 d EE 161 OC M 161 MT rior D 161 Assigning the Marker to a EE 161 PMN CUS COME ceri iieri tren Gesta eere reves mien ed reet e vp E evo ea 161 Selected Marker Marker name The marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange Remote command Marker selected via suffix m in remote commands Result Configuration Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 258 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 258 X value Defines the position of the marker on the x axis channel slot symbol depending on evaluation Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 314 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 315 Marker Type Toggles the marker type The type for marker 1 is always Normal the type for delta marker 1 is always Delta These types cannot be changed Note If normal marker 1 is the active marker switching the Mkr Type activates an additional delta marker 1 For any other marker swit
63. 214 TiRIGSer SEQ ence LEVellF BOW diu Leer ie ene c natu eo tud oa 215 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQ POWSLF 2 ccrta oc innu ma occus en aae ceca estos ee Ra ae ex ERR 2A R22 215 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPOWET renean enne nennen nnns 215 TRIGSer SEQuencel REPowertHOBDolf aUe o rea Ere eat ed etae 216 TRIGger SEQuenece SI e EE 216 TRIGge Ee BEE 216 TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe lt DropoutTime gt Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before a trigger is detected again Parameters lt DropoutTime gt Dropout time of the trigger Range Osto 10 0s RST 0s Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Manual operation See Drop Out Time on page 112 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME lt Offset gt Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the measurement Parameters lt Offset gt RST Os Example TRIG HOLD 500us Manual operation See Trigger Offset on page 112 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event Note that this command can be used for any trigger source not just IF Power despite the legacy keyword Parameters Period Range Os to 10s RST 0s Example TRIG SOUR EXT Sets an external trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 113 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis lt Hyster
64. 71 and Outer Narrowband Table on page 39 Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum NNARrow on page 246 Wideband Noise 21 8 MHz If enabled wideband noise is measured as part of the MCWN measurement Wide band noise is measured with an RBW of 100 kHz over the defined span typically the RF bandwidth For details see Wideband noise and intermodulation sweeps on page 72 Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum NWIDe on page 246 Intermodulation The MCWN noise measurement performs special measurements at the locations of the intermodulation IM products of the defined order To disable intermodulation mea surement select off For details see chapter 5 15 5 Intermodulation Calculation on page 77 Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum IMPorder on page 245 Adapting the limit lines for wideband noise Apply Exceptions If enabled exceptions from the limit line check as defined in the 3GPP standard are applied to the limit checks of the MCWN measurements Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum LIMit EXCeption STATe on page 246 Adjusting Settings Automatically Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FPS automatically according to the current measurement settings To activate the automatic adjustment of a setting select the corresponding function in the AUTO SET menu or in the configuration dialog box for the setting where available Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Fre 157 Setting th
65. BTS to be measured Its value affects the calculation of the limits according to the 3GPP standard for the modulation spectrum measurement see 3GPP2 TS 45 005 chapter 4 2 1 Spectrum due to modulation and wide band noise The limit is changed by 10 log N Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility Parameters for setting and query lt NofActCarriers gt RST 1 Default unit NONE Example New program CONFigure MS DEVice TYPE MCBWide CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRierl1 STATe ON CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier2 STATe ON CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier NofActCarriers STATe ON CONFigure MS MCARrier BTSClass lt BTSClass gt This command defines the base station class The specified BTS Class effects the cal culation of the limits according to the 3GPP standard for the modulation spectrum mea surement see 3GPP2 TS 45 005 chapter 4 2 1 Spectrum due to modulation and wide band noise and chapter 4 3 2 Base Transceiver Station search for Multicarrier BTS Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Parameters for setting and query lt BTSClass gt Range 1 to 2 RST 1 Default unit NONE Example CONF MCAR BTSClass CONFigure MS MCARrier FILTer lt Type gt This command controls the filter used to reduce the measurement bandwidth for multi carrier Power vs Time measurements Parameters for setting and query Type MC400 MC300 MC400 Recommended for measurements w
66. BURSI MACCuracy PERRor PEAK MAXimum eessseseeesseeeeeneeennen nennen nennen rennes 287 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK SDEViation ene 287 FETOCH BURG MAC CuracvlPERor RMG AVEhage cee iiaia iiini en t iiaia 287 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERRor RMS CURRent essent nennen nnne 287 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS SDEViation nennen 287 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM PEAK AVERage essen ener eren 282 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM PEAK CURRent essen rennen auae 282 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK MAXiIMUM 0 nennen rennen 282 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM PEAK SDEViation esses 282 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS AVERage essere nennen nneenree trennen 282 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS CURRent eese enne nennen nnne tenens 282 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS MAXimum essent nennen nnne nennt rennes 282 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS SDEViation eese 282 FETCh MGAPtur SLOTS MEASUre cnr e rr a P dr nnn 276 FETCh SPEGCtrum MODuUlation LIMIEEAIES usate cnet twee tege ETO erepta er EXE ea e ner theo na 305 FETCh SPECtr m MODulation REE6erFeriCe uoce eite pp ei vr cepere eee ce 289 FETCh SPEGtrum MODUlation ALLE ria trt eren crt tenir hr tete 288 e ku Re le Be 299 FETCh SPECtrum SWITching ALL casisto rrt rer rn rere er
67. CONF POW AUTO SWE TIME 0 01 MS SENSe ADJust FREQuency This function adjusts the center frequency and ARFCN I Q mode only automatically 11 6 11 6 1 11 6 2 11 6 2 1 Configuring and Performing MCWN Measurements For multicarrier measurements all carrier settings are automatically adjusted see chapter 6 3 3 3 Carrier Settings on page 98 Example ADJ FREQ Usage Event Manual operation See Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Freq on page 157 Configuring and Performing MCWN Measurements A new separate measurement is provided by the R amp S FPS GSM application to deter mine the wideband noise in multicarrier measurement setups see chapter 4 2 Multi carrier Wideband Noise Measurements on page 33 Signal DSSCh e OG 240 e InputvOutoutand Frontend Settings eoe eene deed Nees d 240 e Ttiggerig Measurements oce hore prete tiene itu nemen bei toe E erede E 242 e Configuring the Reference Measurement eene 242 e Configuring the Noise Measurement leise ete n enn antt nn nannnns 245 e Adjusting Settings Automatically cessisse eene tenent tenaaa 247 e Parfortualid BEE 247 Signal Description The commands required for signal description are described in chapter 11 5 1 1 Device under Test Settings on page 191 chapter 11 5 1 4 Carrier on page 202 Input Output and Frontend Settings The commands required for inp
68. Configuring Data Acquisition Define a statistic count of 10 i e 10 GSM frames are evaluated statistically SENSe SWEep COUNt 10 Define a capture time for 10 statistic count 2 headroom GSM frames Capture Time 10 2 frames 4 615 ms frame 0 0554 s Thus all 10 statistic count frames can be analyzed with a single capture SENSe SWEep TIME 0 0554 s Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished INITiate IMMediate WAI Query the maximum EVM value for slot 0 slot to measure in current GSM frame FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK CURR 0 62063819169998169 Query the maximum EVM value for slot 0 slot to measure in all 10 statistic count GSM frames FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK MAX 0 76938760280609131 Query the averaged EVM RMS value for slot 1 slot to measure in all 10 statistic count GSM frames FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS AVERage 0 19639170169830322 Programming Example Measuring the Power for Access Bursts This example demonstrates how to configure a GSM power measurement of a GMSK modulated signal with access bursts in a remote environment Programming Examples Preparing the application Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt ee Frequency and Level
69. EQU OFF Manual operation See Equal Timeslot Length on page 93 11 5 1 3 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 332 Slot The R amp S FPS GSM application is slot based Thus information on the expected slots of the input signal are required The following commands are required to provide this information CONFioureM lcCH AkNnel SL OTcNumberz El Ter 196 CONFioureM lcH AkNnel GL OTcNumberztSTaTel eene 196 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt MTYP6 ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeananaaaeaenenenenes 197 E Le DE Ge Ee KEE 197 CONFioureM lcH AkNnel GL OTcez GUlBChannelcchzTGCUSER rererere 198 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt SUBChannel lt ch gt TSC ccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneneteeeees 199 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT Number TADVance sess 199 GONFigure MS CHANbel SLOTS TS iioii eire irt aa ot ERAN o teer oa eH YER dades 200 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt S gt TSC USER cienie niara aE I aA 201 CONFioureM lcCH AkNnel SL OTcNumberz TE 202 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT Number FILTer lt Type gt This command specifies the pulse shape of the ideal modulator Suffix lt Number gt lt 0 7 gt the slot to configure Parameters for setting and query lt Type gt GMSK LINearised NARRow WIDE GMSK GMSK Pulse LiNearised Lineari
70. Evaluation method i dE EES 25 Results remote cecinere erageet trees 274 Power ClaSS ccce etie cocci eoe 93 104 135 142 193 Class CT 88 131 Reference PVT iaces diia 53 Reference Transient Spectrum T vs slot evaluation method cccceesseeeeeeeeeseteeeees 26 vs slot results remote sssesssess 290 vs time see PVT ciii acetic oni SEENEN ces 27 Power vs Time Lirmit Check eric cesa pecia cusa ko sra eoe reca 69 Presetting Channels nere aano tnt seda gege ae 91 133 Default values sssssssseeeeeeenn 88 131 Traces Pretrigger Programming examples Stalislics cette 331 332 336 338 341 Filter Filter EMM 4e tps redegit Doa tes 178 Filters frequency response sees 57 Filters step response 2 Full Burst evaluation method ssusss 27 Full burst results remote ssesss Llimit line time alignment E Reference e Refererce ltline s oot praetor i en todo dad QPSK eessen Gia iss me dicat Measurement filter ele IER R RBW at 1 G00 EE 23 25 127 Reference level 105 142 Auto level 129 157 Automatic 239 331 ou P 105 143 RI ap 105 142 PEU 105 142 Reference measurement Average count MCWN 4151 153 Carrier selection MCWN sseseeeeseseeeesereerereesn 154 E
71. Fre quency Automatically Auto Freq on page 157 Caser RO UG EE 136 Gap start after carrier Non contiguous carriers only 137 Atiye CO TIGES deed a tva 16 EEN EE Eu 137 giugno ea el 137 DADO EE 137 Carrier Allocation Defines whether a multicarrier measurement setup contains one subblock of regularly spaced carriers only contiguous or two subblocks of carriers with a gap inbetween non contiguous For details see chapter 5 15 2 Contiguous vs Non Contiguous Multicarrier Allocation on page 73 Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier FALLocation on page 204 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Gap start after carrier Non contiguous carriers only For non contiguous setups see Carrier Allocation the position of the gap must be defined as the number of the active carrier after which the gap starts Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier FALLocation NCONtiguous GSACarrier on page 205 Active carriers Defines which of the defined carriers are active for the current measurement Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier c STATe on page 202 Frequency Defines the absolute frequency of each active carrier Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier c FREQuency on page 203 Modulation Defines the burst type modulation and pulse shape filter of each active carrier For possible combinations see chapter 5 8 Dependency of Slot Parameters on
72. GMSK Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration The carriers can also be configured automatically see Adjusting the Center Fre quency Automatically Auto Freq on page 157 Camer AID COUSIN DEE 99 Gap start after carrier Non contiguous carriers oh 99 ACINO Da IO EE 99 cols sigs 99 let E e M 99 Carrier Allocation Defines whether a multicarrier measurement setup contains one subblock of regularly spaced carriers only contiguous or two subblocks of carriers with a gap inbetween non contiguous For details see chapter 5 15 2 Contiguous vs Non Contiguous Multicarrier Allocation on page 73 Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier FALLocation on page 204 Gap start after carrier Non contiguous carriers only For non contiguous setups see Carrier Allocation the position of the gap must be defined as the number of the active carrier after which the gap starts Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier FALLocation NCONtiguous GSACarrier on page 205 Active carriers Defines which of the defined carriers are active for the current measurement Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier c STATe on page 202 Frequency Defines the absolute frequency of each active carrier Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier c FREQuency on page 203 Modulation Defines the burst type modulati
73. GSM in MSRA Operating Mode on page 82 For more information on MCWN measurements see also chapter 5 15 Multicarrier and Wideband Noise on page 71 e Multicarrier Evaluation Methode 34 4 2 4 Multicarrier Evaluation Methods The GSM multicarrier wideband noise measurement can be evaluated using different methods All evaluation methods available for the measurement are displayed in the selection bar in SmartGrid mode O For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FPS Getting Started manual By default the MWCN measurement results are displayed in the following windows Spectrum Graph Carrier Power Table The following evaluation methods are available for GSM MCWN measurements Vlog umero E 35 Carrier Power Fable aci ea cea ori tree a esed Da ce na vaca aed da o e i ce 36 Inner IM Table rnia E E E 37 Outer IM TADE uci a a hates etit aac 6 EES AR gel 38 Inner Narrow Band Tablp s uer e nen Gees ate Oe ee i ce f e s 39 Quter Matrowband NK 39 Inner Wideband Table 41 Outer Wideband E e 42 Markor TaBe EE 44 R amp S FPS K10 Measurements and Result Displays Spectrum Graph Displays the level results for the frequencies in the defined frequency span typically the Tx band The trace is calculated from a frequency sweep with a 100 kHz RBW and one sweep with a 300 kHz RBW The displayed trace is averaged over the Noise Average Count number of noise measurements 1 Spectrum Graph Start 935 8 M
74. Graph both the RBW and VBW are set to 30 kHz For the Modulation Spectrum Table they are set according to table 4 6 depending on the measured Device Type and the number of active carriers as defined in the Signal Description settings Table 4 6 RBW settings for Modulation Spectrum Table measurements according to standard Offset Single carrier BTS Multicarrier BTS Multicarrier BTS N 1 N gt 1 lt 1 8 MHz 30 kHz 30 kHz 3 30 kHz 30 kHz 1 8 MHz 30 kHz 100 kHz 100 kHz 3 100 kHz 9 1 8 MHz 100 kHz 100 kHz 100 kHz 3 100 kHz 9 1 See 3GPP TS 51 021 8 6 5 1 2 c d 2 See 3GPP TS 51 021 8 6 12 2 3 See 3GPP TS 51 021 8 6 5 1 2 f Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH MST see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 249 Results READ SPECtrum MODulation ALIL on page 288 READ SPECtrum MODulation REFerence IMMediate on page 289 Phase Error Displays the phase error over time R amp S FPS K10 Measurements and Result Displays EH 5 Phase Error 1 Avg 2 Max e3 Min ed Clrw The following default settings are used for a Phase Error vs Time measurement Setting Default Measurement Scope The slot selected as Slot to Measure Averaging Configuration Number of frames as selected in Statistic Count Limit Check None Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH PERR See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 249 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA
75. It must contain the attribute ileFormatVersion Format that contains the number of the file format definition Currently fileFormatVersion 2 is used Name Optional describes the device or application that created the file Comment Optional contains text that further describes the contents of the file DateTime Contains the date and time of the creation of the file Its type is xs dateTime see RsIqTar xsd UO Data File Format iq tar Element Samples Description Contains the number of samples of the UO data For multi channel signals all chan nels have the same number of samples One sample can be e A complex number represented as a pair of and Q values e A complex number represented as a pair of magnitude and phase values Areal number represented as a single real value See also Format element Clock Contains the clock frequency in Hz i e the sample rate of the I Q data A signal gen erator typically outputs the UO data at a rate that equals the clock frequency If the UO data was captured with a signal analyzer the signal analyzer used the clock fre quency as the sample rate The attribute unit must be set to Hz Format Specifies how the binary data is saved in the UO data binary file see DataFilename element Every sample must be in the same format The format can be one of the following complex Complex number in cartesian format i e and Q values interleaved
76. M intermodulation order Use all those combinations of coefficients c to calculate all possible intermodulation frequencies of the given order M Example Calculating intermodulation For 3 carriers and IM order 3 these are all the theoretical combinations of c Table 5 9 Intermodulation coefficients depending on number of carriers involved 1 carrier 2 carriers 3 carriers 003 012 021 102 201 111 030 120 210 10 2 201 11 1 300 01 2 02 1 102 20 1 1 11 00 3 1 20 2 107 10 2 20 1 111 0 30 0 12 0 21 1 1 1 300 120 210 1 11 0 1 2 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 20 2 1 0 critical intermodulation Critical intermodulations For critical intermodulations the sum of all c equals 1 For example 2 f 1 f indica ted in table 5 9 They are critical because they are close to active carriers Note that for some combinations the following may apply Results are much too far away from the active carriers to be of relevance Results are negative Results have an identical IM frequency Therefore the R amp S FPS GSM application always checks the list of theoretical IM fre quencies for the following aspects e intermodulation frequencies are ignored if they are outside the set frequency span or the range defined by the standard typically the Tx band 2 MHz or 10 MHz e For some measurements the GSM standard distinguishes how many carriers were involved in generating the intermodulation This means
77. Measurements CONFigure MS AUTO LEVel ONCE This command is used to perform a single measurement to detect the required level automatically This command is not available in MSRA mode Note that this command cannot be aborted via the ABORt command Example CONF AUTO LEV ONCE Manual operation See Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 129 CONFigure MS AUTO TRIGger ONCE This command is used to perform a single measurement that determines the trigger offset automatically This command is not available in MSRA mode Note that in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode if the Sequencer is active this com mand cannot be aborted via the ABORt command This can lead to a hang up situation when no trigger signal is available or the trigger level is not set correctly Use a device clear to abort the operation correctly Example CONF AUTO TRIG ONCE Usage Setting only Manual operation See Automatic Trigger Offset on page 130 CONFigure MS POWer AUTO SWEep TIME Value This command is used to specify the auto track time i e the capture time for auto detection This setting can currently only be defined in remote control not in manual operation Tip increase this value if less than every second GSM frame contains a signal Parameters for setting and query Value numeric value Auto level measurement sweep time Range 0 01 to 1 RST 0 1s Default unit S Example
78. OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth on page 219 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe IMMediate on page 219 6 4 6 Sweep Settings The Sweep settings define how often data is captured from the input signal by the R amp S FPS GSM application Reference Average Count eere eee ce dte eri cadet te ege hu n Rn 151 Noise Average e EE 152 Continuous Sweep RUN CONT AA entrent senten intense nnne enne 152 Single Sweep RUN GINGLE A 152 Continue Tel E 152 Reference Average Count Defines the number of reference measurements to be performed in order to determine the average reference values Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence AVERage COUNt on page 242 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Noise Average Count Defines the number of noise measurements to be performed in order to determine the average result values Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 226 Continuous Sweep RUN CONT After triggering starts the measurement and repeats it contin
79. Offsets are lower than 1 8 MHz 400 KHz 600 KHz 1200 KHz For details see Duter Narrowband Table on page 39 The rows are sorted in ascending order of the absolute measurement frequency For contiguous carrier allocation or if narrowband noise measurement is disabled this table is empty For each measured offset frequency the following values are returned Return values lt FreqAbs gt numeric value Absolute frequency of distortion Default unit Hz lt FreqRel gt numeric value Frequency offsets from the closest carrier at which distortion power is measured Default unit Hz Retrieving Results lt RBW gt numeric value Resolution bandwidth used for measurement Default unit Hz lt Power gt numeric value Absolute or relative power level to reference power measured at distortion frequency Default unit dBm dB lt Limit gt numeric value Absolute or relative power level limit to reference power Default unit dBm dB lt AbsRelMode gt ABS REL Indicates whether absolute or relative power values are returned depending on CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation LIMIT on page 235 lt LimCheck gt Result of the limit check at this offset frequency PASSED power within limits FAILED power exceeds limit Example FETC WSP NARR INN Usage Query only Manual operation See Inner Narrow Band Table on page 39 FETCh WSPectrum NARRow OUTer ALL This command queries the results of the measu
80. Out Source Free Run Drop Out Time Offset Slope OA Falling Hysteresis Holdoff The GSM measurements can be performed in Free Run untriggered mode how ever an external trigger or a power trigger can speed up measurements For more information see on page 52 QD External triggers from one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S FPS are configured in a separate tab of the dialog box Trigger Source Trigger In Out Output Type User Defined Level Tow Pulse Length 100 0 us Send Trigger JL Trigger 3 inpar Note that gating is not available for GSM measurements For step by step instructions on configuring triggered measurements see the R amp S FPS User Manual User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 109 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration TOJA SOMN EE 110 Ligger SOCET E eene 110 L EE 110 RM 01 MI c Li P MENT 110 1 0l e 111 eh a o UNE E UU T 111 gd A CC 111 Exo 4 112 toe du NT NR E 112 ER 171 NNNM 112 Eoo v Er 112 Ee 112 bereede eenegen 113 Hnc V 113 E Typa asd ccd eateries csa cipe n FUCO tpa be Deb UU eR A 113 B eee 113 E TUS ASU E 113 GN EE 114 Trigger Settings The trigger settings define the beginning of a measurement Trigger Source Trigger Settings Defines the trigger source If a trigger source o
81. R amp S FPS K10 in MSRA mode and only for result dis plays that display traces with a history i e maxhold minhold or average traces The result is a comma separated list of lt IntStart gt lt IntStop gt values for each interval Return values lt IntStart gt Start value of the analysis interval in seconds global time scale Default unit s lt IntStop gt Stop value of the analysis interval in seconds global time scale Example CALC MSRA WIND2 MIV Result 3 707922995E 003 4 509000108E 003 8 323308080E 003 9 124384262E 003 1 293869223E 002 1 373976935E 002 Usage Query only INITiate lt n gt REFResh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SySTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only for applications in MSRA mode not the MSRA Master The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Analyzing GSM Measurements Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the sweep INST SEL IQ ANALYZER Selects the IQ Analyzer channel INIT REFR Refreshes the display for the UO Analyzer channel Usage Event Manual operation See Refresh on page 118 SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet Offset This setting is only ava
82. RMS SDEViation essere 285 FETChBURGOC MAC CuracvlOSllbporess AVERage enne 285 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy OSUPpress CURR N eren 285 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy OSUPpress MAXimum esses 285 FETChBURGOC MAC CuracvlO llbprese GDEViaton nenen en enere rererorerersrerernnnnne nnn 285 READ BURG MAC CuracvlOGllbpnress AVEhRage nenne 285 READ BURG MAC CuracvlOGllbporess CURbent nennen 285 READ BURG MAC CuracvlOGllbpnress MAXlmum 285 READ BURSI MACCuracy OSUPpress SDEViation cesses 285 FETCh BURSI MAGCuracy PERCentile EVM iiic icimaae cn dice oco eie ede ae 286 READ BURSI MACCuracy PERCentile EVM esses nennen 286 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERCentile MERROr cesses 286 READ BURSIt MACCuracy PERCentile MERROr essere 286 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERCentile PERROTF eese seen nennen nnne hann tnnt 286 READ BURSI MAC CuracvlbtRCG ene PERtor eene eene 286 FETChBURGOC MAC CuracvlbPERbRor DEAK AVERage eene 287 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK CURREM ccccececeeeeeeeneceseseneeeaeaeneasaeaeees 287 FETCHBURGOCMACCuracvlPERbRor PEAkK MAximum nenne 287 FETChBURGOC MAC CuracvlPERbRor PEAkK GDEMiatton 287 READ BURG MAC CuracvlPtERb or DEAkK AVEhRage rer ererrrerererererererennnnn 287 READ BURG MAC CuracvlPtEbRb orPDEAkK CURent rnnt 287 READ BURG MAC CuracvlPERb orPDEAkK MANlmum enne 287
83. Release Notes Typographical Conventions The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified func tions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corre sponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The most recent release notes are also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FPS product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com product FPS html gt Downloads gt Firmware Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele ments All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as dialog boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands program code File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota tion marks Starting the GSM Application 2 Welcome to the GSM Application The R amp S FPS K10 is a firmware application that adds functionality to perform GSM measurements to the R amp S FPS The R amp S FPS K10 f
84. Retrieving Results Manual operation See Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 22 See PvT Full Burst on page 27 See Transient Spectrum Graph on page 29 See Spectrum Graph on page 35 Table 11 6 Meaning of return values depending on result display Result display SCPI Return values Power vs Time CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 FAIL 1 the limit check of the upper limit line against the Graph max hold trace failed 0 passed CALCulate lt n gt LIMit2 FAIL 1 the limit check of the lower limit line against the min hold trace failed 0 passed Mod Spectrum CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 FAIL 1 the limit check of the upper limit line against the Graph average trace failed 0 passed Tra Spectrum CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 FAIL 1 the limit check of the upper limit line against the Graph max hold trace failed 0 passed CALCulate n LIMit k LOWer DATA This command queries the y values of the lower limit line This command is only available for PvT Full Burst results Suffix lt k gt 2 lower limit line PvT Full Burst only Return values lt LimitLinePoints gt Absolute level values in dBm Usage Query only SCPI confirmed CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer DATA This command queries the y values of the specified limit line Suffix lt k gt 1 2 3 4 The limit line to query 1 upper limit line 2 lower limit line PvT Full Burst only Return values lt LimitLinePoints
85. See chapter 6 3 8 Measurement Settings on page 123 7 Result Configuration Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration See chapter 7 1 Result Configuration on page 158 8 Display Configuration See chapter 6 2 Display Configuration on page 87 To configure settings gt Select any button to open the corresponding dialog box The corresponding dialog box is opened with the focus on the selected setting Preset Channel Select the Preset Channel button in the lower lefthand corner of the Overview to restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values Note that the PRESET key restores the entire instrument to its default values and thus closes all measurement channels on the R amp S FPS except for the default Spectrum application channel For details see chapter 6 3 1 Default Settings for GSM Modulation Accuracy Mea surements on page 88 Remote command SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page 189 Select Measurement Selects a measurement to be performed See Selecting the measurement type on page 85 Specifics for The measurement channel may contain several windows for different results Thus the settings indicated in the Overview and configured in the dialog boxes vary depending on the selected window Select an active window from the Specifics for selection list that is displayed in the Overview and in all window specific configuration dial
86. Starting the GSM Application o Manual operation via an external monitor and mouse Although the R amp S FPS does not have a built in display it is possible to operate it inter actively in manual mode using a graphical user interface with an external monitor and a mouse connected It is recommended that you use the manual mode initially to get familiar with the instru ment and its functions before using it in pure remote mode Thus this document describes in detail how to operate the instrument manually using an external monitor and mouse The remote commands are described in the second part of the document For details on manual operation see the R amp S FPS Getting Started manual To activate the GSM application 1 Select the MODE key A dialog box opens that contains all operating modes and applications currently available on your R amp S FPS 2 Select the GSM item _ CET FD GSM The R amp S FPS opens a new measurement channel for the GSM application The measurement is started immediately with the default settings It can be configured in the GSM Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Overview softkey from any menu see chapter 6 3 2 Configuration Overview on page 90 Remote command INSTrument SELect on page 189 Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function When you activate an application a new measurement channel is created which deter mines the measurement settings
87. TIME AUTO SENSE BURSECOUN G EE ABOR UE EE CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimumy PEAK eese nennen nnns 261 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK cessent nnne enne 261 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe GALCulate lt n gt DEL Tamarkersin gt Xe erte io tosta LR wall nena cl A eee aes 314 CALCulatesn DEET markerem X REL atlVo oar tae rr tiet ene ee ae E 314 GAL Culatesn DEETamarkerstm Y 2 eer a c cratere reto e cx ee ara ceo ret LR e EON E de EL URS 314 GALCulate n DELTamarkers m S TATe 1 trt terree rre ne ete tar ere pan 258 CALCulatesn bIMitsk CON LEET iocos tr tube EE AER 302 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt EXCeption COUNt CUBE 304 CALOCulate n LIMit k EXCeption COUNt MAX CAL Culateshn bIMitskes EE 302 GALCulate n LIMit k EOWer DATA arro neret nne ntt thirteen 303 GALCulatesn LIMitsk UPPer DATA icio tritt tn tole nne then neg nt three tire nonne 303 CALECulatesn z MARKersm AOFF s EE 259 CAL Culate nz MAbkercmz MAXIMUM Abt ak A 260 CALCulatesn MARKer lt m gt MAXimu m PEAK AA 260 CALCulatesns MARKersm MlINimum PEAK oic ut aha e ren entr trece e eheu ceca 260 CAL Culatesn MARKer m TRAGO i cre een rcr cope tar ee crece Cetera ca enue eens 259 GAL GCulatesn MARKer stmo X ttes dett Eelere eet 315 CALCulatesnz MARKer m MT aui iiie eis c ct
88. TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue MlINimum eere 263 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe DISPlayEWINBOwstP ZOOM AREA ntc erret epe ec Haves tb e Eve oca aae Ec v coL o pd DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA essen nennen enne trennen 267 DISPlayWINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom STATe sess 268 RIETSER Ee Eeer 267 FETCWBURSEPTEMplate TRGS AVERagoe A 200 FETCh BURStPTEMplate TRGS CURR ORI siete eer pert de 300 FETCh BURSUPTEMplate TRGS MAXIIUER 5 itte corr eere nv cr ier Ere nere nei Ee uL UP 300 FETCh BURStPTEMplate TRGS MlINimum esses enne ennt nennen ENE nnne e tnter 300 FETCh BURStPTEMplate TRGS SDEVIAtIOn teer tete c ne e he e qn 300 FETCIELB RSESPOWer SEOTSsSS AEE AVERGBQ inni nr e i AE REC REEF HERE EE 291 FETOCh BURG GbOMWer SL OT zez ALL CRESU an 291 FETCh BURSCESPOWer SEOT S ALL MAXImtutn acuit eite ctetu telae dE 292 FETCh BURStSPOWer SLOT s CURRent AVERage adarra nnne nnn nennen 293 FETCh BURStSPOWer SLOT s CURRent CRESt FETCh BURStSPOWer SLOT s CURRent MAXimum esses enne nnne 295 FETCh BURSESPOWerSLOT lt s gt DEL TatOSyric ice op otc Ep ed eR ERE ER 296 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt LIMit FAIL a 297 FETCRh BURSI MAGCCuracy ADRoop AVERGa9gB citet terrent tener nn HR nes 281 FETGIEB RSIEMAGGu racy ADROOp CURReFE
89. This command starts the measurement to read out the average power for the selected slot in the current frame This command is only available when the Power vs Time measurement is selected see PvT Full Burst on page 27 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command Suffix lt Slot gt lt 0 7 gt Slot number to measure power on The selected slot s must be within the slot scope i e First slot to measure s First slot to measure Number of Slots to measure 1 Retrieving Results Return values lt Result gt numeric value Average Default unit dBm Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Set the slot scope Use all 8 slots for the PvT measurement Number of slots to measure 8 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots 8 First Slot to measure 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet 0 Activate PvT Power vs Time measurement LAY ADD 1 LEFT PTF Note READ starts a new single sweep annd then reads the results Use FETCh to query several results READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 CURRent AVERage Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 26 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt CURRent CRESt READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt CURRent CRESt This command st
90. a larger Statistic Count value Tip You can query the current value of the counter for both Trigger to Sync and other measurements in remote control as well See chapter 11 5 5 2 Configuring and Per forming Sweeps on page 221 Obviously the Statistic Count has an impact on all results and values that are re cal culated after each measurement The higher the count the more values are taken into consideration and the more likely the result of the calculation will converge to a stable value On the other hand the fewer measurements are considered the higher the var iance of the individual results and the less reliable the calculation result will be For instance if the Statistic Count is set to values smaller than 5 the measured refer ence power for Modulation Spectrum Table see Modulation Spectrum Table on page 23 and Transient Spectrum Table see Transient Spectrum Table on page 30 measurements increases This leads to a higher variance of the measured relative powers at the offset frequencies and thus to a reduced measurement dynamic For the Power vs Time see PvT Full Burst on page 27 and Power vs Slot see Power vs Slot on page 26 measurements a small Statistic Count increases the variance of the measured slot powers The slot power is required to calculate the PVT limit lines User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 70 5 15 5 15 1 Multicarrier and Wideband Noise Multicarrier and Wideband Noise
91. a sequential measurement is started immediately OFF 0 The Sequencer is deactivated Any running sequential measure ments are stopped Further Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are not available RST 0 Selecting the Measurement Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single Sequencer mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements SYST SEQ OFF Manual operation See Sequencer State on page 86 11 4 Selecting the Measurement In addition to the default GSM UO measurement a new separate measurement is now available for multicarrier wideband noise see chapter 4 2 Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurements on page 33 CONFigure MEASUFSRIGUIT E 190 CONFigure MEASurement lt MeasType gt This command selects the measurement to be performed in the GSM application Parameters lt MeasType gt IO Default UO measurement to determine the modulation accuracy modulation transient spectrum trigger parameters etc MCWNoise Sweep measurement to determine noise and intermodulation in multicarrier setups RST IQ Example CONF MEAS MCWN 11 5 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements The following commands are required to configure a default GSM UO Modulation Accuracy measurement on an R amp S FPS in a remote environment E EIN le DEE 191 InpubOutpit SEHINGS EE 205 e Erontend Tute Le EE 208
92. always a boundary in case a wideband noise measure ment segment exists there The gaps between 2 wideband noise limit line segments in the R amp S FPS GSM application are 1 Hz wide These exact values can be output via remote com mands However in the result display some start and stop frequencies may appear to be equal due to rounding effects In the wideband noise tables the results are then displayed for each segment see Outer Wideband Table on page 42 Limit checks in wideband noise tables For the wideband noise table results which indicate the distance of the measured value to the limit limit exceptions do not cause the wideband noise segment to be split Automatic Carrier Detection into two or more segments The wideband noise table segments are constant and do not vary from sweep to sweep depending on whether exceptions are set or not as opposed to the overall limits see chapter 5 15 4 Limit Check for MCWN Results on page 75 Level Exception Delta to limit d L_exception L_normal Start1 Worst1 Stop1 Worst3 a Start2 Worst2 Stop2 Start3 Stop3 Fig 5 22 Wideband noise table exceptions and delta to limit values Example Determining the delta to limit values for wideband noise tables In Wideband noise table exceptions and delta to limit values you see how the delta to limit values are calculated The measured wideband noise trace is blue The limit line taking exceptions into account is oran
93. box and define a Statistics Count Select the Demodulation button to determine how bursts are detected and demodulated R amp S FPS K10 How to Perform Measurements in the GSM Application 9 Select the Measurement button and define the special measurement settings for the Spectrum Trigger to Sync and Power vs Time measurements In particular define the frequency list to be used to determine the modulation spec trum and filters to be used for multicarrier measurements 10 Select the Display Config button and select up to 16 displays that are of interest to you Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 11 Exit the SmartGrid mode and select the Overview softkey to display the Over view again 12 Select the Result Config button to configure settings for specific result displays These settings can be configured individually for each window so select the win dow first and then configure the settings e Define the Traces to be displayed in the window Optionally configure the trace to display the average over a series of measure ments If necessary increase the Statistics Count in the Sweep Config dia log box e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the results e g when comparing errors or peaks e Adapt the diagram scaling to the displayed data 13 Start a new sweep with the defined settings e To perform a single measurement press the RUN SINGL
94. cette tern ke Een rua ip ee er E Ere cae Sr ke E AEAEE 320 STATus QUEStionable SYNC ENABIE eterne enne tnnt tne nete nnr sente tnn enn enn nnns ins 321 STATus QUEStionable SYNC NTRansitlOn oontra cnet i ert etg tae ugs 321 STATus QUEStionable SYNC PTRansition STATusOUEGionable SNCTEVENU enne enne nnne nennen tenter tnn enne tenen 320 STAT SQUESIona ble E CU EN 320 STAT S QUEUe NEXT 2 t et reto EES Ee hebt e a e e A UR docu Ee TR ERE 320 SYSTem PRESet CHANnel ENECutel eene nennen iia aan nanira sase 189 EK CNR RS ee 189 TRACE IO VV UU EE 221 TRACe IQ DATA MEMory dE gp EE 221 TRACA RRE 271 TRAGeshns DATA iiia reete shy anne P nec C docte d e e venu 270 TRIGger SEQuence D TIMe nr ttr reir ert rer rene ta e e er ec erae tr eor erae tn TRIGger SEQuericeF HOLDOfI TIME a ceci ana EE E epe tt eoe EEE ETAN TRIGger SEQuerice IFPower HOLBDofF iuret rentrer rtr enr nennen eer ton TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower cessent nennt nennen nennen nnne etre TRIGger SEQuerice LE EVel IOPOWer ttt treten reet mereri ee ene enn TRIGger SEQuence LEVE REPOWer ttr terr rnnt ih t Rt Er ENE ERTA EE nona TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port eese nenne nnne 214 TRIGger SEQuence RFPower HOL Ol 2 otto ttn ette tre rene rrr 216 Ree E ene Ra TRIGger SEQuence SOURce Index
95. cic eue utar re parer nhe rese etae E Obs ra ere nd 280 READ BURSI MACCuracy BPOWer AVERage sse etnies 281 READ BURG MACCuracvl BbOVWer CURbent AAA 281 3 281 READ BURSI MACCuracy BPOWer SDEViation essen eene nennen 281 READ BURSIEMAGCGuracy FERROr AVERAtQe iseis ette nete htt eee a tp ees 329 READ B RSIEMACGuracy FERROrGURROLE iiiter eterna ete setas Ea ELE EAE REM EEE 329 READ BURSI MACOCuracy FERRor MAXimum essent 329 READ BURSIMACGCuracy FERRoOr SDEVi tion ege 329 READ BURG MACCurscvl ER Ouency AVERage ener enne TEATE rene enne 283 READ BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency CURREM 0 AA 283 READ BURSI MACCuracy FREQuency MAXimum eese iiid 283 READ BURG MACCuracvlEREOuency GDEVlaton AAA 283 READ BURSI MACCuracy IQIMbalance AVERage esses nne 283 READ BURSI MACCuracy IQIMbalance CURRent esses nennen rennen nentes 283 READ BURSt MACCuracy IQIMbalance MAXiIMUM nennen ene nerenrennenin 283 READ BURSt MACCuracy QIMbalance SDEViation 0 0 eee eee eee rene cceeeeeneeeeesseeesseeseaeeneeeseeesseeenaes 283 READ BURSI MACCuracy IQOFfset AVERAGgG6 pite teen a te ed dps 284 READ BURSt MACCuracy IQOFiset CURRerit 2 1 rrr reete imer tiep iere Hari Eros 284 READ BURSt MACCuracy IQOFfset MAXimum eesssessesseeeeeeneere nennen nnne 284 READ BURSI MACOCuracy IQOFfset SDEViation
96. command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH MERR see on page 249 Results on page 270 User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 19 R amp S FPS K10 Measurements and Result Displays WEEN Marker Table Displays a table with the current marker values for the active markers This table may be displayed automatically if configured accordingly see Marker Table Display on page 162 4 Marker Table X value 13 25 GHz 600 0 kHz 600 0 kHz 2 0 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MTAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 249 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 315 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 315 Modulation Accuracy Displays the numeric values of the fundamental modulation characteristics of the signal to be analyzed in the vector UO domain error vector magnitude EVM magnitude and phase error IQ imbalance etc 3 Modulation Accuracy Current Average EVM Mag Error RMS Q Phase Error RMS The following modulation parameters are determined IESSE User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 20 GSM UO Modulation Accuracy etc Measurement Results Table 4 1 Modulation accuracy parameters Param Description SCPI query for result value eter EVM Error vector magnitude for the Slot to Measure READ BURSt MACCuracy H H Si RMS and peak error values for the current frame in per EVMI S PRAR nesta EE Eee cent READ BURSt MACC
97. command SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page 189 Select Measurement Selects a measurement to be performed See Selecting the measurement type on page 85 Signal Description The signal description provides information on the expected input signal which optimi zes frame detection and measurement The Signal Description settings are available from the configuration Overview Device Under Test Sethgs n tti nene iet i red t enar 133 leg ue 135 Device Under Test Settings The type of device to be tested provides additional information on the signal to be expected The device settings are available when you do one of the following e Inthe Overview select the Signal Description button then switch to the Device tab Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Device Carriers e Under Test Device Type Multicarrier BTS Wide Area Frequency Band Power Class None Maximum Output P er Carrier Mode Value 50 0 dBm RS TE 134 Frequency BANG EEN 134 Eeer e 135 Device Type Defines the type of device under test DUT The following types are available e BTS Normal e BTS Micro e BTS Pico e MS Normal e MS Small Multicarrier BTS Wide Area e Multicarrier BTS Medium Range e Multicarrier BTS Local Area The default device type is BTS Normal Remote command CONFigure MS DEVice TYPE on page 191 Frequency Band The frequency band defines the frequency range used to
98. contains one subblock of regularly spaced carriers only NCONtiguous Setup contains two subblocks of carriers with a gap inbetween The position of the gap between the subblocks must be defined using CONFigure MS MCARrier FALLocation NCONtiguous GSACarrier on page 205 RST CONT 11 5 2 11 5 2 1 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Example CONF MCAR FALL NCON Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 341 Manual operation See Carrier Allocation on page 99 CONFigure MS MCARrier FALLocation NCONtiguous GSACarrier lt CarrNo gt This command defines the position of the gap for non contiguous setups see CONFigure MS MCARrier FALLocation on page 204 Parameters lt CarrNo gt Number of the active carrier after which the gap starts Range 1 16 RST 1 Example CONF MCAR FALL NCON GSAC 7 Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 341 Manual operation See Gap start after carrier Non contiguous carriers only on page 99 Input Output Settings The R amp S FPS can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals The following commands are required to configure data input and output LE idee EE 205 e Configuring the lte EE 207 RF Input E era ET e LEE 205 le DEI E EE 206 INPu
99. depends on the RF attenuation and preampli fication For details on available trigger levels see the instrument s data sheet Note If the input signal contains frequencies outside of this range e g for fullspan measurements the measurement may be aborted and a message indicating the allowed input frequencies is displayed in the status bar A Trigger Offset Trigger Polarity and Trigger Holdoff to improve the trigger stabil ity can be defined for the RF trigger but no Hysteresis Remote command TRIG SOUR RFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 216 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Trigger Level Trigger Settings Defines the trigger level for the specified trigger source For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower on page 215 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower on page 215 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port on page 214 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower on page 215 Drop Out Time Trigger Settings Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again Remote command TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe on page 213 Trigger Offset Trigger Settings Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the measurement Note When using an external trigger the trigger offset is particularly important in order to detect the frame start correctly See chapter 5 5
100. described in detail in the R amp S FPS User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FPS No further trigger parameters are available for the con nector Output The R amp S FPS sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 218 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection on page 217 Output Type Trigger 2 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FPS triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FPS is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port OTYPe on page 218 Level Output Type Trigger 2 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 218 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth on page 219 6 3 6 6 3 6 1 Modulation Accuracy M
101. e the lowermost carrier of the lower sub block and the uppermost carrier of the upper sub block For Narrow Band Noise measurements the frequency offsets are lower than 1 8 MHz 400 kHz 600 kHz 1200 kHz Outer Narrow Band Noise results are shown for contiguous AND for non contiguous carrier allocation SSS ee ee User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 40 Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurements Outer Narrow band results Active carriers Inner Narrow band results lt 400 KHz gt lt 400 KHz f lt 600 KHz 600 KHz 1200 KHz 1200 KHz gt Fig 4 5 Narrowband noise results The following parameters are shown Table 4 13 Narrowband noise results Result Description Offset MHz Frequency offsets from the closest carrier at which distortion power is measured Freq MHz Absolute frequency of distortion product RBW kHz Resolution bandwidth used for measurement dB Relative power level to reference power measured at the distortion frequency dBm Absolute power level measured at distortion frequency A to Limit Power difference to limit defined in standard negative values indicate limit check failed If narrowband measurement is disabled this table is empty Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH ONAR See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 249 Results FETCh WSPectrum NARRow OUTer ALIL on page 309
102. for that application The same application can be acti vated with different measurement settings by creating several channels for the same application The number of channels that can be configured at the same time depends on the avail able memory on the instrument Only one measurement channel can be active at any time However in order to per form the configured measurements consecutively a Sequencer function is provided When the Sequencer is activated the measurements configured in the currently active channels are performed one after the other in the order of the tabs The currently active measurement is indicated by a amp symbol in the tab label The result displays of the individual channels are updated in the tabs as the measurements are performed Sequential operation itself is independent of the currently displayed tab R amp S FPS K10 Welcome to the GSM Application See also the note on using the Sequencer function in MSRA operating mode in chap ter 5 17 GSM in MSRA Operating Mode on page 82 For details on the Sequencer function see the R amp S FPS User Manual 2 2 Understanding the Display Information The following figure shows a measurement diagram during analyzer operation All dif ferent information areas are labeled They are explained in more detail in the following sections MultiView 22 GSM Ref Level 50 00 d8m Offset 40 00 dB Device Band BTS Normal E GSM 900 SGL Att 20dB Freq ARFCN 335 0 MHz
103. frame start correctly See chapter 5 5 Trigger settings on page 52 The R amp S FPS GSM application expects the trigger event to be the start of the active part in slot O Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements offset gt 0 Start of the measurement is delayed offset lt 0 Measurement starts earlier pre trigger Remote command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 214 Slope Trigger Settings For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe on page 216 Hysteresis Trigger Settings Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Settting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level This setting is only available for IF Power trigger sources The range of the value is between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis on page 214 Trigger Holdoff Trigger Settings Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 214 Trigger 2 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER AUX connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is I
104. g Spectrum gt Spectrum 2 The channel to be duplicated must be selected first using the INST SEL command This command is not available if the MSRA Master channel is selected Example INST SEL Spectrum INST CRE DUPL Duplicates the channel named Spectrum and creates a new measurement channel named Spectrum 2 Usage Event INSTrument CREate NEW lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt This command adds an additional measurement channel The number of measurement channels you can configure at the same time depends on available memory Parameters lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 187 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 187 Example INST CRE SAN Spectrum 2 Adds an additional spectrum display named Spectrum 2 INSTrument CREate REPLace lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command replaces a measurement channel with another one Setting parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the measurement channel you want to replace Activating GSM Measurements lt ChannelType gt Channel
105. gt Range 0 01s to 1s RST 0 1 0 02 in MSRA mode Example SWE TIME 1s Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Capture Time on page 115 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO State If enabled the capture time is determined according to the set statistic count with the objective of getting a fast measurement If disabled the capture time must be defined manually using SENSe SWEep TIME on page 220 Tip In order to improve the measurement speed further by using short capture times consider the following Use an external trigger which indicates the frame start In this case the minimum allowed capture time is reduced from 10 ms to 866 us see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 216 Measure only slots at the beginning of the frame directly after the trigger see chapter 11 5 6 1 Slot Scope on page 227 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements e Use a small statistic count see SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 226 Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example SWE TIME AUTO OFF SWE TIME 1s Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Capture Time on page 115 l TRACe IQ SRATe This command queries the final user sample rate for the acquired UO data Parameters lt SampleRate gt The sample rate is a fixed value depending on the frequency range to be measured see also Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List on page 127 Range 100 Hz to 10 GHz conti
106. ile Phase Error gt The results are output as a list of comma separated strings For each result except for iles the Current Average Maximum and Standard Deviation values are returned Example READ BURS ALL 17 283994674682617 17 283994674682617 17 283994674682617 0 24 647823333740234 24 647823333740234 24 647823333740234 0 1 0720701217651367 1 0720701217651367 1 0720701217651367 0 1 0720850229263306 1 0720850229263306 1 0720850229263306 0 9 8495550155639648 9 8495550155639648 9 8495550155639648 0 14 069089889526367 14 069089889526367 14 069089889526367 0 0 091422632336616516 0 091422632336616516 0 091422632336616516 0 101 05810546875 101 05810546875 101 05810546875 0 0 036366362124681473 0 036366362124681473 0 036366362124681473 0 76 698326110839844 76 698326110839844 76 698326110839844 0 112 8399658203125 112 8399658203125 112 8399658203125 0 0 083038687705993652 0 083038687705993652 0 083038687705993652 0 24 07130241394043 1 0950000286102295 14 060454368591309 Manual operation See Modulation Accuracy on page 20 R amp S FPS K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements IEN FETCh BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy
107. in the Frame Configu ration see figure 5 6 The Slot to Measure is indicated by a filled blue box Frame configuration and slot scope in the channel bar In the channel bar of the R amp S FPS GSM application as well as in the configuration Overview the current frame configuration and slot scope are visualized in a miniature graphic Furthermore the burst type and modulation of the Slot to Measure are indica ted Device Band BTS Normal E GSIV Slot Scope LEES NBG Fig 5 5 Frame configuration in GSM application channel bar The graphic can be interpreted as follows Shape Color Meaning i Each slot is represented by a small box e Active slots are indicated by polygonal symbols Slots within the defined slot scope are highlighted green The defined Slot to Measure is highlighted blue the burst type and modulation defined m for this slot are indicated to the right of the graphic Frame configuration in the Frame and Slot Scope dialog boxes The same graphic is displayed in the Frame Configuration of the Frame dialog box see Frame Configuration Select Slot to Configure on page 93 and in the Slot Scope tab of the Demodulation dialog box see chapter 6 3 7 1 Slot Scope on page 118 R amp S9FPS K10 Basics on GSM Measurements Demodulation Settings Slot Scope Frame Slot Demodulation Single Slot Measurements Slot to Measure Multi Slot Measurements
108. including exceptions if activa ted 2 For MCWN Spectrum measurement result IM 300 kHz limit line 3 For MCWN Spectrum measurement result Narrowband Noise limit line 4 For MCWN Spectrum measurement result Exception Range A only FAIL result no limit line 5 For MCWN Spectrum measurement result Exception Range B only FAIL result no limit line 6to 14 These bits are not used 15 This bit is always 0 Querying the Status Registers The following commands are required to query the status of the R amp S FPS and the GSM application For more information on the contents of the status registers see e chapter 11 10 1 STATus QUEStionable SYNC Register on page 318 e General Status Register Commands tt rtt oret n esa etre dade S ihid 319 e heading Out the EVENE Part codecs eder ei es 320 e Reading Out the CONDition Part 320 e Controlling the ENABle Pat tert Fett te tr eee eet erepta de 321 e Controlling the Negative Transition Part ccce 321 e Controlling the Positive Transition Part 322 General Status Register Commands STA TUS PRE SE horna Ea A a a E 320 STATUS QUEUS a E 320 11 10 3 2 11 10 3 3 Status Reporting System STATus PRESet This command resets the edge detectors and ENAB1e parts of all registers to a defined value All PTRansition parts are set to FFFFh i e all transitions from O to 1 are detected All NTRansition parts are set to 0 i e a transition fr
109. is always used It is the default setting By default and when Using Electronic Attenuation is not available mechanical attenua tion is applied In Manual mode you can set the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps down to 0 dB Other entries are rounded to the next integer value The range is specified in the data sheet If the defined reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenuation the refer ence level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed NOTICE Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels When decreasing the attenuation manually ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level allowed at the RF input as an overload may lead to hardware damage Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 211 INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 212 Using Electronic Attenuation If the optional Electronic Attenuation hardware is installed on the R amp S FPS you can also activate an electronic attenuator In Auto mode the settings are defined automatically in Manual mode you can define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately Note Electronic attenuation is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 7 GHz In Auto mode RF attenuation is provided by the electronic attenuator as much as possible to reduce the amount of mechanical switching required Mechanical attenua tion may provide a better signal to noise ratio however User Manual 1
110. lt Slot gt ALL AVERage on page 291 Power Peak dBm Maximum power in slot in current or all frames READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt CURRent MAXimum on page 295 READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt ALL MAXimum on page 292 Crest dB Crest factor in slot in current or all frames i e Power Peak Power Avg READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt CURRent CRESt on page 294 READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt ALL CRESt on page 291 Remote LAY AD Results chapter command 11 8 6 Power vs Slot Results on page 290 PvT Full Burst The Power vs Time evaluation determines the power of all slots bursts in the selected slot scope and performs a limit check of the power vs time trace against the specified PvT mask The PvT Full Burst result display shows the power vs time trace where the time axis corresponds to the selected slot scope The PvT mask is indicated by red lines and the overall result of the limit check is shown at the top of the diagram D WIND 2 RIGH PST see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 249 Note The result of the Power vs Time limit check for individual slots is indicated in the Power vs Slot on page 26 evaluation R amp S FPS K10 Measurements and Result Displays 1 Avg 2 Max 3 Min e4 Clrw 127 385 us 1 254 ms Note Full burst refers to the fact that the entire burst is displayed including the rising and falling edges and the burst top
111. measurement of the channel of interest The output from the Multicarrier filter is used to perform synchronization and demodulation The fre quency response of the Multicarrier filter is shown in figure 5 10 Overview of filters in the R amp S FPS GSM application Magnitude Response of the Multi Carrier Filter Magnitude dB 600 400 200 0 200 400 600 Frequency kHz Fig 5 10 Frequency Response of the Multicarrier Filter 5 7 3 Measurement Filter The Measurement filter is used to limit the bandwidth of the demodulation measure ments and is described in the 3GPP standard document TS 45 005 for QPSK 8PSK 16QAM and 32QAM as follows e araised cosine filter with roll off 0 25 and single side band 6 dB bandwidth 90 kHz for normal symbol rate and for higher symbol rate using narrow bandwidth pulse shaping filter e araised cosine filter with roll off 0 25 and single side band 6 dB bandwidth 108 kHz for higher symbol rate using wide bandwidth pulse shaping filter In addition to these filters a Measurement filter for GMSK is used in the R amp S FPS GSM application to limit the effects of out of band interference due to the high sample rate of 6 5 MHz which is used The magnitude responses of all the Measurement fil ters are shown in figure 5 11 Measurement Filters for different transmit filters Magnitude dB GMSK Pulse Lin GMSK Pulse Narrow Pulse Wide Pulse 05 0 Frequency
112. n nnns ceceesttes cecesstedcccensttedcecesstedsie 87 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration eene 87 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements eee 130 DULL me c 158 Result Configuration eren eterne sn nnneairin sna iu Prisa nu inaasa 158 ZOOM EFupnchHong iM 164 VO Data Import and EXpOFL iii iie trn pa uso oUc ccu apu nae aS esoe 166 Import Export FUnctlIOns ern rnit ono ra th npx RR oREn p RARE REX EES AE deeg NR RARE AA EENE E NEEE 166 How to Export and Import UO Data een 167 How to Perform Measurements in the GSM Application 170 How to Perform a Basic Measurement on GSM Signals 170 How to Determine Modulation Accuracy Parameters for GSM Signals 171 How to Analyze the Power in GSM Signals eene 173 How to Analyze the Spectrum of GSM Signals eene 174 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement 177 Improving Performanx co irren netter nee eint ne siad SENSAN EANES 177 Improving EVM ACCuUraCgy tornei eene ette neut enne basa inne stud SANAAA 177 Optimizing Limit Checks iere etenim neea 178 E E Y 179 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 180 Intro
113. num READ BURSt MACCuracy ber of frames lt Parameter gt MAXimum Exception The peak of the Origin Offset Suppression is the minimum value as this represents the worst case which needs to be detected Std Dev Standard deviation of Current results for specified READ BURSt MACCuracy number of frames lt Parameter gt SDEViation Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH MACC see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 249 Results READ BURSt MACCuracy ALL on page 280 chapter 11 8 4 Modulation Accuracy Results on page 277 Modulation Spectrum Graph The modulation spectrum evaluates the power vs frequency trace of a certain part of the burst 50 to 90 96 of the useful part excluding the training sequence TSC by mea suring the average power in this part over several frames at certain fixed frequency off sets The Modulation Spectrum Graph displays the measured power levels as a trace against the frequencies The measured values can be checked against defined limits the limit lines are indica ted as red lines in the diagram The result of the limit check PASS FAIL are shown at the top of the diagram Note The GSM standards define both absolute and relative limits for the spectrum The limit check is considered to fail if both limits are exceeded R amp S FPS K10 Measurements and Result Displays 1 Modulation Spectrum Graph 1 Avg 2 Clrw Note The graphical results only provide a
114. on page 211 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level The scal ing of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FPS so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Note however that the internal reference level used to adjust the hardware settings to the expected signal optimally ignores any Reference Level Offset Thus it is impor tant to keep in mind the actual power level the R amp S FPS must handle and not to rely on the displayed reference level internal reference level displayed reference level offset Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 211 Mechanical Attenuation Defines the mechanical attenuation for RF input Attenuation Mode Value Mechanical Attenuation The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level Auto mode This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting By default and when Using Electronic Attenuation is not available mechanical attenua tion is applied In Manual mode you can set the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps down to 0 dB Other entries are rounded to the next int
115. optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel 11 11 Troubleshooting If problems occur the instrument generates error messages which in most cases will be sufficient for you to detect the cause of an error and find a remedy In addition our customer support centers are there to assist you in solving any prob lems that you may encounter with your R amp S FPS We will find solutions more quickly and efficiently if you provide us with information on the system configuration An xml file with information on the system configuration device footprint can be cre ated automatically DIAGnostic SERVice SINFo lt FileName gt This command creates a zip file with important support information The zip file con tains the system configuration information device footprint the current eeprom data and a screenshot of the screen display if available This data is stored to the C R_S Instr user directory on the instrument As a result of this command the created file name including the drive and path is returned You can use the resulting file name information as a parameter for the MMEM COPY command to store the file on the controller PC If you contact the Rohde amp Schwarz support to get help for a certain problem send this file to the support in order to identify and solve the problem faster 11 12 Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility Return values lt FileName gt
116. out the gating settings for gated Modulation Spectrum mea surements see Modulation Spectrum Table on page 23 The returned values can be used to set the gating interval for list measurements i e a series of measurements in zero span mode at several offset frequencies This is done in the Spectrum mode using the SENSe LIST subsystem see SENSe LIST POWer SET Prior to this command make sure you set the correct Trigger Mode IF power or External and Trigger Offset see chapter 11 5 4 Triggering Measurements on page 213 Return values lt TriggerOffset gt Calculated trigger offset based on the user defined Trigger Off set and Frame Configuration such that 50 90 of the active part of the Slot to measure excluding TSC is measured lt GateLength gt Calculated gate length based on the user defined Trigger Off set and Frame Configuration such that 50 90 of the active part of the Slot to measure excluding TSC is measured Example READ WSP MOD GAT Result 0 00032303078 0 00016890001 Usage Query only Trigger to Sync CONFigure TRGS NOFBins lt Value gt This command specifies the number of bins for the histogram of the Trigger to Sync measurement Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt numeric value Number of bins Range 10 to 1000 RST 10 Default unit NONE Manual operation See No of Bins on
117. signal The limits depend on the following parameters Frequency band not for MS Burst Type Modulation Filter not for MS The measured reference slot power 5 13 3 Limit Check for Power vs Time Results The determined Power vs Time values can be checked against limits defined by the standard the limit lines and the result of the limit check are indicated in the Power vs Time diagram see PvT Full Burst on page 27 and in the Power vs Slot table see Power vs Slot on page 26 The limits depend on the following parameters The maximum Max trace is checked agains the upper limit e The minimum Min trace is checked against the lower limit The limit masks are generated adaptively from the measured signal according to the following parameters Frequency band special masks for PCS1900 and DCS1800 BTS with GMSK Burst type Modulation Filter The reference burst power is measured and the 0 dB line of the limit mask is assigned to it For MS the 6 dB line of the limit mask depends on the PCL The PCL is derived from the measured burst power R amp S FPS K10 Basics on GSM Measurements 5 14 Impact of the Statistic Count Generally the Statistic Count defines how many measurements or analysis steps are performed equivalent to the Sweep Count in applications that perform sweeps In particular the Statistic Count defines the number of frames to be in
118. ssssssssese 211 ElOCIONIC ET ava dere 106 143 Manga i 9er eter rer ee rete N 105 143 MECHANICAL sirieni 105 143 elle 106 143 Auto frame configuration ROMO EE 238 Auto frequency Ee E 157 CT NEE 239 331 Reference level iiss ecciesie eaten 129 157 e 129 157 AULO LOVE EE 328 Auto track time Remote control Auto te GE Automatic Config rationi E Configuration remote sssseeeses 238 Band class REMO EE 192 Bandwidth AnalySlS zs eren rr cones Coverage MSRA mode Bins Elite ERE BIA a Multicarrier filter Multiple carriers Single carrier filter Burst ACDOSS UAB S E Configuratii asiani enner EEE Higher symbol rate Normal symbol rate Position wullt oon ri ester ox rto ee geen ele Le EE Timing Advance jor RR Type dependency m Icio H C Capture buffer Result display cuocere oir rrr petri om oerte tx rt EE se 18 Capture offset MSRA applications Remote Softkey igo Ein I e M ces see also Measurement time Carrier allocation cccceccccececeessneeeeeeesessteeeeeeseeessseaeeee Carrier power EH 37 Carrier Power Table FRESUIE GIS DAY ico ror Eege ciet sss 36 Carriers te 99 137 Active limit check ccccccccecseceeeeesesstseeeeeeeseseaeee 178 AIO CARIONT WEE 99 136 Contiguous 99
119. tbe ca de arat tano dette ra aer d dea nare e i P ET a E co LA RO 255 zm LAYout ADD WINDow lt WindowName gt lt Direction gt lt WindowT ype gt This command adds a window to the display in the active measurement channel This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result To replace an existing window use the LAYout REPLace WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window the new win dow is inserted next to By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt Direction gt LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow Direction the new window is added relative to the existing win dow lt WindowType gt text value Type of result display evaluation method you want to add See the table below for available parameter values Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY ADD WIND 1 RIGH MACC Adds a Modulation Accuracy display to the right of window 1 Usage Query only Manual operation Analyzing GSM Measurements See Constellation on page 17 See EVM on page 17 See Magnitude Capture on page 18 See Magnitude Error on page 19 See Marker Table on page 20 See Modulation Accuracy on pa
120. the Signal Description button and configure the expected signal by defin ing the used device and slot characteristics as well as the modulation e Define the expected burst type and modulation for each active slot e Define the training sequences or syncs with which each slot will be compared to synchronize the measured data with the expected data e For AQPSK modulated signals define a TSC for each subchannel and each active slot e Foraccess bursts also define a Timing Advance i e the position of the burst within the slot e For signals from base stations capable of using multiple carriers define addi tional settings on the Multicarrier tab How to Analyze the Spectrum of GSM Signals 4 Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s frequency band and center frequency 5 Select the Amplitude tab in the Input Frontend dialog box to define the correct power class for the base station or mobile device 6 Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an external trigger to start capturing data only when a useful signal is transmitted For external triggers do not forget to set the correct Trigger Offset to the beginning of the GSM frame 7 Optionally to perform statistical evaluation over several measurements switch to the Sweep tab in the Data Acquisition dialog box and define a Statistics Count 8 Select the
121. the R amp S FPS GSM application Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on the R amp S FPS on or off if available External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R amp S FPS itself for example when measuring the noise level of a DUT Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce on page 207 Trigger 2 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER AUX connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FPS User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FPS No further trigger parameters are available for the con nector 6 3 5 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Output The R amp S FPS sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 218 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection on page 217 Output Type Trigger 2 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FPS triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FPS is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 User Defined Sends a tri
122. the delta marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 223 The unit depends on the application of the command Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker or the fixed reference Retrieving Results Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marker 2 CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X Position This command moves a marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the marker If the marker has been used as a delta marker the command turns it into a normal marker Parameters lt Position gt Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See Marker Table on page 20 See X value on page 161 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the position of a marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the marker first To get a valid result you have
123. the result display Example DISP TRAC Y PDIV 10 Sets the grid spacing to 10 units e g dB per division Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Manual operation See Per Division on page 164 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Level on page 105 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines a reference level offset for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Offset gt Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST OdB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Shifting the Display Offset on page 105 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe Range This command defines the display range of the y axis for all traces t is irrelevant Example DISP TRAC Y 110dB Usage SCPI confirmed 11 5 3 3 Configuring the Attenuation Ee WR ET 211 INPUutATTeniustien ht e GE 212 INPUT EAT EE 212 INPN EATTAUTO EE 212 INPUCEATESTAT E ran a a a a a a a a aa a arsed 213 INPut ATTenuation lt Attenuation gt This command defines the total attenuation for RF input If you set the attenuation manually it is no longer coupled to the reference level but the reference level is coupled to the attenuation Thu
124. the selected trace Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum APEak on page 260 Y Scaling The scaling for the vertical axis is highly configurable using either absolute or relative values These settings are described here tesult Configuration Automatic grid scaling Traces Pare Marker Scaling Pultematic Grid Seali EE 164 Absolute Scaling Min Max Values sse 164 Relative Scaling Reference per Division 164 Zoom Functions LPer DWS EN 164 L Ref Positon ANNE NENNEN annnka annaran AEN AEN 164 Let VANE MERERI 164 Automatic Grid Scaling The y axis is scaled automatically according to the current measurement settings and results Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe AUTO on page 261 Absolute Scaling Min Max Values Define the scaling using absolute minimum and maximum values Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MAXimum on page 261 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum on page 262 Relative Scaling Reference per Division Define the scaling relative to a reference value with a specified value range per divi sion Per Division Relative Scaling Reference per Division Defines the value range to be displayed per division of the diagram 1 10 of total range Note The value defined per division refers to the default display of 10 divisions on the y axis If fewer divisions are displayed e g b
125. to Sync table This trace helps you judge the reliability of the averaged values in the table The narrower this trace the less the individual values deviate from the averaged result if this trace is too wide increase the Statistic Count Note The x axis of the histogram indicates the individual Trigger to Sync values Thus the scaling must be very small in the range of ns However since the value range in particular the start value of the possible results is not known the x axis must be adap ted to the actual values after a number of measurements have taken place This is done using the adaptive data size setting see Adaptive Data Size on page 129 This setting defines how many measurements are performed before the x axis is adap ted to the measured values and then fixed to that range Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH TGSG see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 249 DISPlay WINDow TRACel MODE WRITe for Histogram see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 256 DISPlay WINDow TRACe2 MODE PDFavg for PDF of average see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 256 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 270 TRACe lt n gt DATA X on page 271 User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 32 R amp S FPS K10 Measurements and Result Displays 4 2 Trigger to Sync Table The Trigger to Sync measurement determines the time between an external trigger event and the start of the first symb
126. to measure and the First Slot to measure in the Demodulation Settings see chapter 6 3 7 1 Slot Scope on page 118 Averaging Configuration Number of frames as selected in Statistic Count Limit Check Limit check of maximum Max trace See chapter 5 13 2 Limit Check for Transient Spectrum on page 69 Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH TSFD see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 249 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 270 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL on page 302 Transient Spectrum Table The transient spectrum evaluates the power vs frequency trace of the slot scope by measuring the power in these slots over several frames For details see Transient Spectrum Graph on page 29 The Transient Spectrum Table displays the measured power levels and their offset to the limits defined by the standard as numeric results Note The GSM standards define both absolute and relative limits for the spectrum The limit check is considered to fail if both limits are exceeded Values that exceed both limits are indicated by red characters and an asterisk next to the value and a negative A to Limit value 2 Transient Spectrum Table Offset Power Negative Offsets Power Positive Offsets dB dBm A to Limit dB dBm A to Limit Note The graphical results of the transient spectrum evaluation are displayed in the Transient Spectrum Graph on page 29 The following values are displayed rs User
127. to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 223 Return values lt Result gt Result at the marker position Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 Usage Query only 11 9 Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results Manual operation See Marker Table on page 20 Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results The I Q data to be evaluated in the GSM application can not only be measured by the GSM application itself it can also be imported to the application provided it has the correct format Furthermore the evaluated UO data from the GSM application can be exported for further analysis in external applications For details on importing and exporting UO data see chapter 8 UO Data Import and Export on page 166 MMEMoiy LOADAG STAT VE 316 MMEMory STORe lt n gt IQ COMME MI E 316 MMEMOM STORE MAQ STA EE 316 MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command restores UO data from a file The file extension is iqw Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the source file Example MMEM LOAD IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data iqw Loads IQ data fro
128. transmit the signal For details see Frequency bands and channels on page 46 The following frequency bands are supported T GSM 380 T GSM 410 GSM 450 GSM 480 GSM 710 GSM 750 T GSM 810 GSM 850 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements P GSM 900 E GSM 900 R GSM 900 T GSM 900 DCS 1800 PCS 1900 The default frequency band is E GSM 900 Remote command CONFigure MS NETWork TYPE on page 192 CONFigure MS NETWork FREQuency BAND on page 192 Power Class The following power classes are supported 1 8 BTS 1 5 MS GMSK E1 E2 E3 MS all except GMSK M1 M2 M3 Micro BTS P1 Pico BTS The default power class is 2 Remote command CONFigure MS POWer CLASs on page 193 6 4 3 2 Carrier Settings The Carrier settings define whether the expected signal contains a single or multiple carriers Up to 16 carriers can be configured for a single MCWN measurement Carrier settings are available from the Signal Description dialog box which is dis played when you select the corresponding button in the configuration Overview Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Signal De Device Carriers Carrier Allocation Non Contiguous gap start after ud Carrier Active Frequency Modulation 1 935 0 MHz NB GMSK 2 935 6 MHz NB GMSK 3 936 2 MHz NB GMSK 4 936 8 MHz NB GMSK The carriers can also be configured automatically see Adjusting the Center
129. wait for sync This performs one sweep or a single UO capture INIT WAI Determine output format binary float32 FORMat REAL 32 Read UO data of the entire capture buffer 653751 samples are returned as l Q I Q I 653751 4 Bytes float32 2 I Q 5230008 bytes TRAC IQ DATA MEM Read 2048 UO samples starting at the beginning of data acqui sition TRAC IQ DATA MEM 0 2048 Read 1024 UO samples starting at sample 2048 TRAC IQ DATA MEM 2048 1024 See chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 332 Query only Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt The evaluation method selected by the LAY ADD WIND command also affects the results of the trace data query see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt Details on the returned trace data depending on the evaluation method are provided here 11 8 2 1 Retrieving Results For details on the graphical results of these evaluation methods see chapter 4 1 GSM UO Modulation Accuracy etc Measurement Results on page 16 e EVM Phase Error Magnitude Error Trace bResauhte 274 e PvT Full Burst Trace bResuhts emen 275 e Modulation Spectrum and Transient Spectrum Graph Results 275 e Magnitude Capture Results aes tte trier ok ar ea 275 e Trigger to Syne KEEN 275 EVM Phase Error Magnitude Error Trace Results The error vec
130. 0 L Trigger beet 150 Beleeg 150 EE 150 et E 151 L Pulse Lengt 151 L Send Moge DONNER 151 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Trigger Settings The trigger settings define the beginning of a measurement Trigger Source Trigger Settings Defines the trigger source If a trigger source other than Free Run is set TRG is displayed in the channel bar and the trigger source is indicated Note Trigger source for MSRA Master Any trigger source other than Free Run defined for the MSRA Master is ignored when determining the frame start in the R amp S FPS GSM application see chapter 5 5 Trigger settings on page 52 For this purpose the trigger is considered to be in Free Run mode Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 216 Free Run Trigger Source Trigger Settings No trigger source is considered Data acquisition is started manually or automatically and continues until stopped explicitely Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 216 External Trigger 1 2 Trigger Source Trigger Settings Data acquisition starts when the TTL signal fed into the specified input connector meets or exceeds the specified trigger level See Trigger Level on page 112 Note The External Trigger 1 softkey automatically selects the trigger signal from the TRG IN connector For details see the Instrument Tour chapter in the R amp S FPS Getting Started manual
131. 0 1 EE SH 9m Off Power EE 104 Reference Level snar rtr rn rete adu nr ede nackt era a ens Pese arra ddr LEA SE SUA da 105 L Shifting the Display Offset 105 Meclianical Attenuation ens core crei tl eter nr err a eee ea eere te va ERN 105 L Attenuation Mods Value esent tetti rtt er dette da dedii an 105 Using Electronic Attenuation ccccscctectesscccectenesceeeceteeeccscnseeeeceectenenseceeepensecneneeees 106 PWC SOUIAGS m diedateaes 106 Power Class The following power classes are supported e 1 8 BTS e 1 5 MS GMSK Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration e E1 E2 E3 MS all except GMSK e M1 M2 M3 Micro BTS e P1 Pico BTS The default power class is 2 Remote command CONFigure MS POWer CLASs on page 193 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the hardware of the R amp S FPS is adapted according to this value it is recommen ded that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel
132. 00 GSM frames FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS AVERage 0 082186274230480194 Programming Example Measuring Statistics This example demonstrates how to determine statistical values for a measurement in a remote environment RST Reset the instrument CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL OBW Activate occupied bandwidth measurement INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished CALC MARK FUNC POW RES OBW Returns the results for the OBW measurement Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers This example demonstrates how to configure a GSM wideband noise measurement of a GMSK modulated signal with multiple carriers in a remote environment a a seess Preparing the application Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Select the multicarrier wideband noise measurement CONF MEAS MCWN Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Programming Examples A rennen Signal Description Configure a multicarrier base station wide area DUT without power classes CONFigure MS DEV TYPE MCBW CONFigure MS NETWORK PGSM CONFigure MS NETWORK FREQ BAND 900 CONFigure MS POW CLAS NONE Configure 2 subblocks of carriers with 3 carriers each and a gap of 5 MHz CONF MS MCAR FALL NCON CONF MS MCAR CARRI1 CONF MS MCAR CARR2
133. 1 and 3GPP TS 45 010 chapter 6 7 Timeslot length for further details Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel FRAMe EQUal on page 195 Frame Configuration Select Slot to Configure This area shows a graphical representation of the configuration of each slot Select a slot to display its Slot dialog box see chapter 6 3 3 2 Slot Settings on page 94 6 3 3 2 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration For active slots the following information is shown e The burst type e g Normal NB for a normal burst e The modulation e g GMSK e The training sequence TSC and Set For details on how to interpret the graphic see Frame configuration and slot scope in the channel bar on page 54 Slot Settings The Slot settings are available when you do one of the following e Inthe Overview select the Signal Description or Demodulation button then Switch to the Slot tab e Press the MEAS CONFIG key then the Slot to Measure softkey The individual slots are configured on separate tabs The dialog box for the selected slot is displayed directly when you select a slot in the Frame Configuration graphic on the Frame tab see Frame Configuration Select Slot to Configure on page 93 To configure a different slot select the corresponding vertical tab in the Slot tab Slot structure display The basic slot structure according to the selected Frequency Band and Power Class is displayed graphical
134. 136 Frequency 99 137 GAD m 99 137 Modulation 99 137 ilo eee C 98 135 NOn COntiQuouS ceeseeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeees 74 99 136 Single PVT UE 124 Center frequency Automatic configuration iplc X Channel bandwidth MSRA nee 82 Channel numbers 46 103 GSMr standard s nito fees 47 rn i 46 SUD sie ion Eege 49 Closing Channels remote NEEN SEA 187 Windows remote seeeeeeeee 252 254 Constellation Evaluation method 2 eniin 17 Continue single sweep SOfKGy netiis edid de aed 118 152 Continuous Sequencer ici M 86 Continuous sweep MEWN pp 72 EL EE 117 152 Conventions SCPI commands 2 2 terne rents 181 Copying Measurement channel remote 186 Coupling Input remiote eie termo e e 205 D Data acquisition iecit asthe te arm ER ean 114 EE 116 219 Data format ale EE 269 Default values Preset sten deeg euer dise eege e a 88 131 Delta markers Bt Un EE 161 Delia Eos og 125 Delta to Sync DGSCHPUOMN sosisini annain a Maar Rande een 67 Di ge 26 Demodulation elle ULT 121 Settings Device type Default Diagram footer information 0 0 cece eects eeeeeeneees 13 Digital standards Frequencies Relevant for GSM Direct path Ee EE 206 Display Configuration HE
135. 16 and chapter 4 2 1 Multicarrier Evaluation Methods on page 34 For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FPS Getting Started manual Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration GSM measurements require a special application on the R amp S FPS which you activate using the MODE key When you switch a measurement channel to the GSM application the first time a set of parameters is passed on from the currently active application see chapter 6 3 1 Default Settings for GSM Modulation Accuracy Measurements on page 88 After initial setup the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re entering the channel Thus you can switch between applications quickly and easily When you activate a measurement channel in the GSM application a GSM modulation accuracy measurement for the input signal is started automatically with the default con figuration The GSM menu is displayed and provides access to the most important configuration functions The MARKER FUNCT and LINES menus are currently not used Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Importing and Exporting UO Data The I Q data to be evaluated in the GSM application Modulation Accuracy measure ment only can not only be captured by the GSM application itself it can also be impor ted to the application provided it has the correct format Furthermore the evaluated UO data from the GSM application can be export
136. 16QAM or 32QAM modulation and for Higher Symbol Rate bursts with a narrow pulse RST AUTO Example Use sequence estimator for the symbol decision CONFigure MS DEMod DECision SEQuence For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 332 or chap ter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Sig nal on page 336 Manual operation See Symbol Decision on page 122 CONFigure MS DEMod STDBits lt Value gt The demodulator of the R amp S FPS GSM application requires the bits of the burst Tail Data TSC Data Tail to provide an ideal version of the measured signal The Data bits can be random and are typically not known inside the demodulator of the GSM application 11 5 7 11 5 7 1 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt DETected STD DETected The detected tail and TSC bits are used to construct the ideal signal STD The standard tail and TSC bits as set using CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt TSC are used to construct the ideal signal Using the standard bits can be advantageous to verify whether the device under test sends the correct tail and TSC bits Incor rect bits would lead to peaks in the EVM vs Time trace see EVM on page 17 at the positions of the incorrect bits RST DETected Example Replace detected Tail amp TSC bits by the standard bits CONFigure
137. 176 8480 02 06 143 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements When you switch off electronic attenuation the RF attenuation is automatically set to the same mode auto manual as the electronic attenuation was set to Thus the RF attenuation may be set to automatic mode and the full attenuation is provided by the mechanical attenuator if possible Both the electronic and the mechanical attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed in the status bar Remote command INPut EATT STATe on page 213 INPut EATT AUTO on page 212 INPut EATT on page 212 Input Settings Some input settings affect the measured amplitude of the signal as well For details see chapter 6 3 4 1 Input Source Settings on page 100 6 4 4 4 Output Settings The R amp S FPS can provide output to special connectors for other devices For details on connectors refer to the R amp S FPS Getting Started manual Front Rear Panel View chapters How to provide trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FPS User Manual Output settings can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key or in the Outputs dia log box Output Digital IQ IF Video Output IF Out Frequency Trigger 2 Adel 145 I OUt e 145 erg
138. 5 15 4 Limit Check for MCWN Results on page 75 The details of evaluation are described for the individual evaluation methods in chap ter 4 2 1 Multicarrier Evaluation Methods on page 34 Continuous measurement mode If continuous sweep mode is selected the measurement process described above is repeated continuously i e after the average count number of noise measurements the results are evaluated and displayed a new reference sub measurement is performed the noise measurements are repeated and so on Multicarrier and Wideband Noise 5 15 2 Contiguous vs Non Contiguous Multicarrier Allocation In a standard GSM measurement scenario multiple carriers are positioned with a fixed spacing in one block This setup is referred to as contiguous carrier allocation Carrier frequencies are allocated in a grid with a spacing of 200 kHz The minimum carrier spacing is 600 kHz Multi standard radio MSR signals Modern base stations may process multiple signals for different communication stand ards for example two GSM subblocks with an LTE subblock inbetween In this case if you consider only the GSM carriers the carriers are spaced regularly within the GSM subblocks but there is a gap between the two subblocks Such a carrier setup is refer red to as non contiguous carrier allocation According to the 3GPP standard TS 51 021 a subblock is defined as one contiguous allocated block of spectrum for use by the same base s
139. 60 Querying position remote i 315 Settings remote vue 25f State vie 161 Table 5e s 162 Table evaluation method 20 44 Types eerie iida 161 Max Peak udine eerie entume eod vd Dese 163 Maximizing Windows remote niei terere 248 MCWN Average count sssini 151 152 153 155 Carrier Power results A 37 Carrier Power Table 96 Carrier selection reference wee 154 Configuration overview x4 191 Configuring wee 190 Configuring remote 240 Continuous measurements e Evaluating results us Evaluation Methods 2 rrt ten 34 Frequency remote Frontend remote 240 Inner IM Table i nninonenaaaaa 37 Inner Narrow Band Table 39 Inner Spectrum Table o nnt 41 Input output remote wi 240 Intermodulation 156 Intermodulation measurement ssssssiieeeseeeereenn 72 Intermodulation results a 97 38 limit cheeks EE 75 Limit lines s Su 156 Measurement 93 Measurement process Z1 MSRA 21 ae 94 Narrowband pose eer etes 156 Narrowband noise measurement Noise measurement remote Noise measurement settings ve 199 Non contiguous carriers Basics PA AS Outer IM Table 5 2 2 e eet dte 38 Outer Spectrum Table 39 42 Reference levels manual
140. A 214 UO Power remote 215 IF Power remote 215 RF Power remote tetris 215 deet GET ET 110 148 External Free Run UO Power IF Power MSRA RF Power Trigger to Sync Graph evaluation method cceeeeeeeseeeteeeeeeteees 31 Remote control m Results remote Jie riot etta 275 Table evaluation Method cccccccceeeessteeeeeeeeeeeee 33 Triggering MCOWN remote 4 2 gusten eate 242 Troubleshooting EMOTS M E Results Ele Bits EP Default i Defining remote control sesesse 200 D pendenGy ape 59 Displaying 5 ween OF Llimit line time alignment 1125 Middle Of 1 5 65 Reference signal 123 eet ET 65 Synchronization 3 reir terree reor 121 User defined centers 97 U UB s mH 345 Units Reference level orici EE 105 142 Updating Result display E 118 Result display remote 8 Ill 46 Useful part SlOt ceruice trente entente nex 299 User manuals etit ree ares tre celi rane reo Snc C PER 8 V M uecr 49 345 Ww lee E 45 62 Fitesu nna a a a oa aA 96 Wideband measurement DC ae M 43 Wideband noise MECWN C 72 Measurement 156 Ranges teen 80 Window title bar information sosisini 13 Windows Adding remote on trees 249 Closing remote 252 254 COMPMQUIING EE EN Layout remote 4 rere ren
141. AD BURSI MACCuracy EVM PEAK AVERage sees nennen nennen nnne nnns 282 READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK CURREM AAA 282 READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK MAXimum 1 282 READ BURSI MACCuracy EVM PEAK SDEViation essessesseeeeeeeeeeenne nennen 282 READ BURG MACCurScvlEVMIRMG AVCHage A 282 READ BURSIt MACCuracy EVM RMS CURRent terror nter entrer n 282 READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS MAXiIMUM sisisi nennen en rennen nnne 282 READ BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS SDEViation esee nennen 282 READ SPECtrum MObDulation GATiFIg ctn tren tr tren ree neri torre akna 289 READ SPECtrum MODulation REFerence IMMediate READ SPECtrum MODulation ALENA erenneren aA boa prr RE E TE OE Y EY FOR S SE Ra DE ODE OA 288 READ SPECtrum SWITching REFerence GATing scott then tek ten tex nes 299 READ SPECtrum SWITching REFerence IMMediate 1 ttt tton tht tn tnn 299 READ SPEGC trum SWITCHING IR B B fom 298 READ SPECtrum WMODulation GATirig r rn trn rr p beni Per dep Ha d nag 331 READ WSPectrum MObDu lation GATING roti e rcr the ERI E ERE LR ER E FER ERE REA 237 READ WSPectrum MODulation GATing ssssss READ WSPectrum MODulation REFerence IMMediate esee 330 READ WSPectrum MObDulation ALL 25 eroe tota tnc e er tn kr ri re sere rne neret ERES EE 330 SENSE FREQU
142. ADRoop SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the result of the Amplitude Droop When the measurement is started the R amp S FPS is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the mea surement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the Amplitude Droop see table 4 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value Amplitude droop Default unit dB Example READ BURS ADR SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the result of the Burst Power When the measurement is started the R amp S FPS is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the mea surement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the Burst Power see table 4 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value Burst Power Default unit dB Example READ BURS BPOW SDEV Usage Query only User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 281 R amp S FPS K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements WEE FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK AVER
143. AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event Manual operation See All Markers Off on page 161 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe lt Trace gt This command selects the trace the marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters lt Trace gt 1to4 Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC MARK3 TRAC 2 Assigns marker 3 to trace 2 Manual operation See Assigning the Marker to a Trace on page 161 General Marker Settings The following commands define general settings for all markers DISPIa MTABIe Sebaa eege eege Ree feceqcnacuese anv Sue ed 259 DISPlay MTABle lt DisplayMode gt This command turns the marker table on and off Parameters lt DisplayMode gt ON Turns the marker table on OFF Turns the marker table off RST AUTO Analyzing GSM Measurements Example DISP MTAB ON Activates the marker table Manual operation See Marker Table Display on page 162 Marker Positioning Settings The following commands are required to set a specific marker to the result of a peak search CAL Culate nzM Abkerzm M AXimum AbPtEak nennen eene nennen nnn 260 CAL Culate nzM Abkercm M AXimumf PDEAK nennen enne 260 CALCulate n MARKer m MlNimum PEAK eese nennt 260 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz M ANimum APE ak 260 CALCulate n DELTamarker
144. AR see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 249 Results FETCh WSPectrum NARRow INNer ALL on page 308 Outer Narrowband Table Displays the measured distortion products for the frequencies outside of the subblocks but not in the gap for non contiguous carrier allocation The measurement is gated according to the standard 50 to 90 of the useful part of the time slot excluding the mid amble in the outermost carriers If no bursts are found a warning is issued in the status bar and the measurement results are not valid The limits are calculated by cumulating the individual limit lines of each active carrier Frequencies falling onto theoretical intermodulation products receive an extra relaxa tion R amp S FPS K10 Measurements and Result Displays JEE Ref Level 0 00 dBm Device Band MC BTS Wide Area E GSM 900 Att 10dB Carriers 6 Ref Meas Auto 1 Spectrum Graph Start 943 0 MHz 10001 pts 1 4 MHz Stop 957 0 MHz 2 Outer Narrow Band Table Meas Freq Power a Offset MHz Freq MHz RBW kHz dB dBm amp to Limit 3 Inner Narrow Band Table Meas Freq Offset MHz Freq MHz RBW kHz For each of the following regions the parameters described in Narrowband noise results are shown e frequencies to the left of the lowermost carrier e frequencies to the right of the uppermost carrier The rows are sorted in ascending order of the absolute measurement frequency The frequency offsets are defined as offsets from the closest carrier i
145. ARANNA SANESA Nr 7 1 2 Documentation Overview eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeen nennen nnn nennen nnne nen tnn nnne n n nnns 7 1 3 Typographical Conventions eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenn nennen nnne nnn nnne nnn nannten 9 2 Welcome to the GSM Application eeuussss 10 2 4 Starting the GSM Application eeeseesessseeseeeeeeesseeeee nnne nnne nnns 10 2 2 Understanding the Display Information esee 12 3 About the Measurement eese 15 4 Measurements and Result Displays eeeeeee 16 4 31 GSM VQ Modulation Accuracy etc Measurement Results 16 4 2 Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurements eene enn 33 5 Basics on GSM Measurements ccccccccssccsscccessssssccceerseeesnsssceeeeeees 45 5 1 Relevant Digital Standards eese nennen nennen nnn 45 5 2 Short introduction to GSM GMSK EDGE and EDGE Evolution 45 5 3 Short Introduction to VAMOS eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeenennnnn nennen nnne nnn nennt nnn 49 5 4 AQPSK Modulatlon rte eee IEEE 51 5 5 Trigger settings E PERDE 52 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement eeeeeeeeeeeennn nnn 53 5 7 Overview of filters in the R amp S FPS GSM application
146. BURSt MACCuracy FERRor AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FERRor CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FERRor MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FERRor SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy FERRor AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy FERRor CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy FERRor MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy FERRor SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the result of the Frequency Error This command is retained for compatibility with R amp S FS K5 only Use the READ BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency or FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency commands in newer remote control pro grams Return values Result numeric value Frequency error Default unit Hz Example READ BURS FERR SDEV Usage Query only Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility FETCh WSPectrum MODulation ALL READ WSPectrum MODulation ALL This command starts the measurement and reads out the result of the measurement of the Modulation Spectrum of the mobile or base station These commands are retained for compatibility with previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers only For newer remote control programs use the READ SPECtrum MODulation ALL or FETCh SPECtrum MODulation ALL commands instead The result is a list of partial result strings separated by commas Return values lt Placeholder gt curently irrelevant Freq1 Absolute offset frequency in Hz lt Freq2 gt Absolu
147. C R_S Instr user lt R amp S Device ID gt _ lt CurrentDate gt _ lt Current Time gt String containing the drive path and file name of the created support file where the file name consists of the following ele ments lt R amp S Device ID The unique R amp S device ID indicated in the Versions Options information lt CurrentDate gt The date on which the file is created lt YYYYMMDD gt lt CurrentTime gt The time at which the file is created lt HHMMSS gt Example DIAG SERV SINF Result c R amp S instr user FPS 26 1312 8000K26 100005 xx 20130116 165858 zip MMEM COPY c R amp S instr user FPS 26_ 1312 8000K26 100005 xx 20130116 165858 zip S NXDebugNFPS 26 1312 8000K26 100005 xx 20130116 165858 zip Usage Query only Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibil ity Note that the following commands are maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the specified alternative commands for new remote control programs CONFigure BURStETIMe IMMediate essen 324 CONFloure BURGCMACCuracvt MMediatel ene 324 CONFigure BURSt MERRor IMMediate eese 324 CONFloure BURGCbtERrort MMedatel eene enne 324 CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate IMMediate eese 324 GONFig re BURSEPTEMbplate SEL ect 7 2 ertet pret ea EE EES EES 324 CONFloure SGbtChrum MODulsattont MMedatel enne 324 CONFiguire SPEC trun SELGI miiia iaia REAR SEN Ee ENER pueden ge 324 CONFlo
148. DATA query depend on the lt TraceNumber gt parameter TRACe1 returns the height of the histogram bins the number of values is defined by the number of bins see CONFigure TRGS NOFBins on page 237 TRACe2 returns the y values for the probability density function PDF of the aver aged values The number of values depends on the number of data captures Statistic Count see SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 226 X values The results of the TRAC DATA X query also depend on the lt TraceNumber gt parame ter TRACe1 returns the time in s at the center of each bin in the histogram TRACe2 returns the time in s for the PDF function of the averaged values Retrieving Results 11 8 3 Magnitude Capture Results The following commands are required to query the results of the Magnitude Capture evaluation FETCRMGAPtine SLOTS MEAS WEZ cse recede iaaa uno Cade n coda haa tane 276 tel le TE NEE 276 FETCh MCAPture SLOTs MEASure This command queries the positions of the slots to measure in the current capture buf fer indicated by blue bars in the result display Return values lt Result gt The result is a comma separated list of positions for each slot with the following syntax xPos 0 xLen 0 xPos 1 xLen 1 where xPos i is the x value in seconds of the i th slot to measure xLen i is the length of the i th slot to measure in seconds The number of values is 2 the number of GSM frames in the curre
149. E key e To start a new continuous measurement press the RUN CONT key 9 2 How to Determine Modulation Accuracy Parameters for GSM Signals 1 Press the MODE key and select the GSM application 2 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for a GSM measurement 3 Select the Signal Description button and configure the expected signal by defin ing the used device and slot characteristics as well as the modulation e Define the expected burst type and modulation for each active slot e Define the training sequences or syncs with which each slot will be compared to synchronize the measured data with the expected data e For AQPSK modulated signals define a TSC for each subchannel and each active slot e For access bursts also define a Timing Advance i e the position of the burst within the slot e For signals from base stations capable of using multiple carriers define addi tional settings on the Multicarrier tab User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 171 How to Determine Modulation Accuracy Parameters for GSM Signals 4 Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s frequency band and center frequency 5 Select the Amplitude tab in the Input Frontend dialog box to define the correct power class for the base station or mobile device 6 Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an external trigger to star
150. EN ege DL Downlink iss Downlink T MM Drop out time lee Duplicating Measurement channel remote 186 DUT Configuration sexed ci tior tee dioe 133 178 E EDGE va UR 345 EDGE Evolution EGPRS deem EGPRS2 Jia eee Electronic input attenuation 105 106 143 Enable Left Limit Right Limit eeeeeee 126 Equal Timeslot Length rrt tnn 93 Errors CAUSES 179 IF e Be ME 108 142 Magnitude result display esssessssss 19 Modulation result display siiis 20 DOMMONS CE Status bar StAtUs TEEN Evaluation methods MEWN ctetu nere rer eire ERREUR Remote Trace data EVM Evaluation method nter metes 17 Multiple Catriers eor ertet 178 Results remote ni eret been 274 SMOJE Caer E 178 Statistic COUnt EE 178 Troubleshooting ged 2 22 23 3e secet 177 VES 122 123 Exporting ek EC GE 88 166 167 346 350 I Q data remote cn etes 316 Softkey irsini External trigger Level remote Files Format MOda eornm E 346 UO data binary XML sse 350 UO parameter XM 347 Filters e ie EE Dependency Measurement Measurement magnitude response Modulation SpecttIillm sie tee ette lien Overview PUT usser ctneesetleaes lacy PvT frequency response PvT step response
151. ENCY SPAN MODE s roren ee geess eege aC nessun vey AANER ETE IX UETE OIN EV DEC ETE 241 GE MT eler Re el T TE 320 STAT s OPERation ENABIe 5 n trn nere e terreri rn toii Fe ek a EAR RE EXEC ERE EDI HERE RES Ren 321 STATus OPERAation NTEADSITOD s o coco egener gege EE eee OA ETE rH EDITO we EK SO OE DERE 321 STATus OPERation PTRansitlOn retten tr rrr peer e tirer bea ek rne EE HR ER deua 322 STAT s OPERation A LR 320 STATUS PRE SGE e eege ENEE 320 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit CONDitIOn eurn e rrr rene nene nas 320 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit ENABle STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit NTRansition STATus QUEStiOnable ACPLIMIEP TRarSIitioni oio ttc rete e ce ipa ete d 322 STA T s QUEStionable ACP Limit EVEN 320 STATus QUEStionable CONDitton eene nnne nnne nnn nnne nnne 320 STATUus QUEStonable DIQ GONDJI OR Seeerei SEENEN 320 STATUS QUEStionable DIQ EMENIt 2 2 ict ta ricette Ee cicer ede P eH ERER ERES 320 S TATUSs QUEStionable EIMiten ENABIG orci eroe rer ttt ec deuten coa E re ie c Re be uo S 321 SGTATusOUEG onableL Mit znzNTRansttion eene nennen nennen nnne n nnns nnn 321 STATus QUEStionable LIMit n P TRANSOM 22 o coercere teret p fepe cie E 322 STATUs QUEStionable EIMit amp n EVENIE 33 rrt e re tee rre terere rec ceder 320 STATUS QUESHOMaDIS NT RAMSINOM EE 321 STATus QUEStionable PTRansition S TATUs QUEStionable S YNG CONDIHETQOTD 21221
152. ERRor RMS AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the RMS value of the Magnitude Error When the measurement is started the R amp S FPS is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the mea surement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the Magnitude Error see table 4 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value Magnitude error Default unit NONE Example READ BURS MERR RMS SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy OSUPpress AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy OSUPpress CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy 0SUPpress MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy 0SUPpress SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy 0SUPpress AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy 0SUPpress CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy 0SUPpress MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy 0SUPpress SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the result of the UO Offset Sup pression When the measurement is started the R amp S FPS is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the mea surement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the I Q Offset Suppression see table 4 1 Return values Result numeric value IO offset suppression Default unit dB Exam
153. F SPEC MOD LIM Retrieving Results lt Status gt Result of the limit check in character data form PASSED no limit exceeded FAILED limit exceeded Example READ SPEC MOD 0 998200000 998200000 84 61 56 85 REL PASSED 0 998400000 998400000 85 20 56 85 REL PASSED Usage Query only Manual operation See Modulation Spectrum Table on page 23 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 332 FETCh SPECtrum MODulation REFerence READ SPECtrum MODulation REFerence IMMediate This command starts the measurement and returns the internal reference power of the Modulation Spectrum This command is only available for Modulation Spectrum Table evaluations see Modulation Spectrum Table on page 23 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command The result is a list of partial result strings separated by commas Return values lt Level1 gt measured reference power in dBm lt Level2 gt measured reference power in dBm lt RBW gt resolution bandwidth used to measure the reference power in Hz 30 kHz Example READ SPECtrum MODulation REFerence IMMediate Usage Query only Manual operation See Modulation Spectrum Table on page 23 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on p
154. F input of the R amp S FPS can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct cur rent DC AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted 6 3 4 2 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 205 Impedance The reference impedance for the measured levels of the R amp S FPS can be set to 50 O or 75 OQ 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a 75 Q adapter of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 206 YIG Preselector Activates or deactivates the YIG preselector if available on the R amp S FPS An internal YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FPS ensures that image frequen cies are rejected However this is only possible for a restricted bandwidth In order to use the maximum bandwidth for signal analysis you can deactivate the YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FPS which may lead to image frequency display Note that the YIG preselector is active only on frequencies gr
155. FF This command turns all delta markers off lt m gt is irrelevant Example CALC DELT AOFF Turns all delta markers off Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe lt State gt This command turns delta markers on and off If necessary the command activates the delta marker first No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 ON Turns on delta marker 2 Manual operation See Marker State on page 161 See Marker Type on page 161 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe lt Trace gt This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters lt Trace gt Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC DELT2 TRAC 2 Positions delta marker 2 on trace 2 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe lt State gt This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is cur rently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker Analyzing GSM Measurements Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 Manual operation See Marker State on page 161 See Marker Type on page 161 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF This command turns all markers off Example CALC MARK
156. Failed synchronization due to frame length error and resulting false search area A special Measure only on sync option ensures that only those sections of the cap tured signal are processed further for which synchronization was possible thus improv ing performance For frequency hopping signals it is recommended that you use a power trigger to ensure capture starts with an active frame Timeslot Alignment External trigger When using an external trigger source the application assumes that the trigger offset is set such that the GSM frame start is aligned with the start of a capture Therefore only narrow searches are performed from the beginning of the Synchronization proc ess 5 11 Timeslot Alignment Reference Time The definition of a reference time is necessary for the following description of timeslot alignment In the standard document 3GPP TS 45 010 in Section 5 7 it is stated that Irrespective of the symbol duration used the center of the training sequence shall occur at the same point in time This is illustrated in Figure 5 7 3 of the standard document 3GPP TS 45 010 which is reproduced below for convenience figure 5 17 Due to this requirement the middle of TSC or center of Active Part shall be used as the reference time when specifying timeslot alignment Additionally the middle of TSC is used for the alignment of the Power vs Time limit masks see also Limit Line Time Alignment on page 125
157. First search for the power profile burst search according to the frame configuration in the capture buffer Second inside the found bursts search for the TSC of the Slot to measure as given in the frame configuration ALL is usually faster than TSC for bursted signals TSC Search the capture buffer for the TSC of the Slot to measure as given in the frame configuration This mode corresponds to a correlation with the given TSC This mode can be used for conti nous but framed signals or bursted signals BURSt Search for the power profile burst search according to the frame configuration in the capture buffer Note For Burst no demodulation measurements e g Modula tion Accuracy are supported Only Power vs Time Modula tion Spectrum Transient Spectrum measurements are sup ported NONE Do not synchronize at all If an external or power trigger is chosen the trigger instant corresponds to the frame start Tip Manually adjust the trigger offset to move the burst to be analyzed under the mask in the Power vs Time measurement Note For None no demodulation measurements e g Modu lation Accuracy are supported Only Power vs Time Modu lation Spectrum Transient Spectrum measurements are sup ported RST ALL Example CONF SYNC MODE TSC Manual operation See Synchronization on page 121 CONFigure MS SYNC ONLY lt State gt If activated only results from frames slots where the
158. Hz 10001 pts 2 84 MHz Stop 964 2 MHz The narrowband noise results if available are indicated as vertical green bars at the distinct measurement frequencies see Outer Narrowband Table on page 39 The results of the limit check are also indicated in the diagram see also chap ter 5 15 4 Limit Check for MCWN Results on page 75 Table 4 10 Limit line checks Label Possible values Description Limit line suffix lt k gt Limit check PASS FAIL Overall limit check for all limit lines Wideband Noise PASS FAIL Limit check for wideband noise trace lt current gt exceptions Number of detected exceptions provided only if exceptions are enabled lt k gt 4 IM 100 kHz PASS FAIL Limit check for intermodulation at 100 kHz Number of detected exceptions provided only if exceptions are enabled eks 2 IM 300 kHz PASS FAIL Limit check for intermodulation at 300 kHz lt k gt 3 Narrowband Noise PASS FAIL Limit check for narrowband noise lt k gt zs A User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 35 R amp S FPS K10 Measurements and Result Displays Label Possible values Description Limit line suffix lt k gt Exceptions lt current gt PASS FAIL Number of bands with exceptions in range A currently maximum detected vs maximum allowed provided only if exceptions are enabled lt k gt 5 Exceptions lt current gt PASS FAIL Number of bands with exceptions in rang
159. Hz band valid for TGSM 450 450 MHz band valid for GSM 480 480 MHz band valid for GSM 710 710 MHz band valid for GSM 750 750 MHz band valid for GSM 810 810 MHz band valid for TGSM 850 850 MHz band valid for GSM 900 900 MHz band valid for PGSM EGSM RGSM and TGSM 1800 1800 MHz band valid for DCS 1900 1900 MHz band valid for PCS RST 900 Example CONF NETW FREQ 380 Manual operation See Frequency Band on page 92 CONFigure MS POWer CLASs Value This command the power class of the device under test Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt 1 2 314 51 6 7 8 E1 E2 E3 M1 M2 M3 P1 NONE 1 MS and BTS power class 1 2 MS and BTS power class 2 3 MS and BTS power class 3 4 MS and BTS power class 4 5 MS and BTS power class 5 6 BTS power class 6 7 BTS power class 7 8 BTS power class 8 E1 MS power class E1 E2 MS power class E2 E3 MS power class E3 M1 BTS power class M1 Micro M2 BTS power class M2 Micro M3 BTS power class M3 Micro P1 BTS power class P1 Pico NONE No power classes defined RST 2 Example CONF POW CLAS 1 Manual operation See Power Class on page 93 CONFigure MS POWer PCARrier Power Defines the maximum output power per carrier which determines the limit lines for the modulation spectrum UO measurements and MCWN measurement This value is ignored if CONF
160. Inner Wideband Table Similar to the Outer Wideband Table but the numeric results of the wideband noise measurement in the gap between the GSM carrier blocks for non contiguous carrier allocation are displayed The frequency offsets are defined as offsets from the closest carrier i e the uppermost carrier of the lower sub block and the lowermost carrier of the upper sub block Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurements As for the Outer Wideband Table the Inner Wideband Table normally has one entry for every limit line segment the GSM standard 3GPP TS 51 021 defines in section 6 5 1 But in this table the middle of the gap between the 2 sub blocks is used to split up the results in an upper and lower part see ranges C and D in figure 4 6 Outer wide band results Active carriers Limit line for wideband noise Inner wide band results Middle f of gap 1800 KHz 11800 KHz I Fig 4 6 Inner and outer wideband noise results The rows are sorted in ascending order of the absolute frequencies of the wideband noise measurement segments For contiguous carrier allocation or if noise measurement is disabled this table is empty Furthermore the table may be empty in the following cases e The gap is too small 3 6 MHz twice the minimum offset of 1 8 MHz e ntermodulation measurement overrides wideband noise measurement Around every calculated intermodul
161. IqTar xsd available at http www rohde schwarz com file RslqTar xsd In particular the order of the XML elements must be respected i e iq tar uses an ordered XML schema For your own implementation of the iq tar file format make sure to validate your XML file against the given schema The following example shows an UO parameter XML file The XML elements and attrib utes are explained in the following sections Sample UO parameter XML file xyz xml lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt xml stylesheet type text xsl href open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt RS IQ TAR FileFormat fileFormatVersion 1 xsi noNamespaceSchemaLocation RsIqTar xsd xmlns xsi http www w3 0rg 2001 XMLSchema instance lt Name gt FSV K10 lt Name gt lt Comment gt Here is a comment lt Comment gt lt DateTime gt 2011 01 24T14 02 49 lt DateTime gt lt Samples gt 68751 lt Samples gt lt Clock unit Hz gt 6 5e 006 lt Clock gt lt Format gt complex lt Format gt lt DataType gt float32 lt DataType gt lt ScalingFactor unit V gt 1 lt ScalingFactor gt lt NumberOfChannels gt 1 lt NumberOfChannels gt lt DataFilename gt xyz complex float32 lt DataFilename gt lt UserData gt lt UserDefinedElement gt Example lt UserDefinedElement gt lt UserData gt lt PreviewData gt lt PreviewData gt lt RS_IQ TAR FileFormat Element Description RS IQ TAR File The root element of the XML file
162. Lative Example Select Transient Spectrum measurement JI measurement on captured UO data CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching IMMediate Only list results are required CONFigure SPECtrum SELect LIST JI Absolute power and limit results in dBm CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching LIMit ABSolute Run one measurement and query absolute list results READ SPECtrum SWITching ALL I gt 0 933200000 933200000 101 55 36 00 ABS PASSED CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation LIMIT Mode This command selects whether the list results power and limit values of the Modula tion Spectrum measurement are returned in a relative dB or absolute dBm unit Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements This command is only available if the Modulation Spectrum result display is selected see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 249 Parameters for setting and query Mode ABSolute RELative RST RELative Example Absolute power and limit results in dBm CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation LIMit ABSolute Run one measurement and query absolute list results READ SPECtrum MODulation ALL I gt 0 933200000 933200000 108 66 65 00 ABS PASSED For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 332 CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIST SELect Mode For Modulation Spectrum Table measurements this command controls whether offset frequencies
163. Length case deriving the guard period length is some what more complicated and the possible values are summarized in Table 5 7 2 of SGPP TS 45 010 reproduced below as Guard period lengths between different time slots for convenience Table 5 6 Guard period lengths between different timeslots Guard Period Between Timeslots In terms of normal symbol periods Burst Transition Guard Period Between Timeslots In terms of reduced symbol periods TSO and TS1 or TS4 and TS5 TSO and TS1 or TS4 and TS5 Any other time slot pair Any other timeslot pair normal symbol 9 8 10 8 9 6 period to normal symbol period normal symbol 9 25 8 25 11 1 9 9 period to reduced symbol period reduced symbol 9 25 8 25 11 1 9 9 period to normal symbol period reduced symbol 9 5 8 5 11 4 period to 10 2 reduced symbol period Delta to Sync Values The Delta to Sync value is defined as the distance between the mid of the TSC and the TSC of the Slot to Measure The results are provided in the unit NSP which stands for Normal Symbol Period i e the duration of one symbol using a normal symbol rate approx 3 69us The mea sured Delta to Sync values have a resolution of 0 02 NSP These values are either assumed to be constant according to the 3GPP standard or measured depending on the setting of the Limit Line Time Alignment parameter Slot to measure or Per Slot
164. MHz Fig 5 11 Magnitude Responses of Measurement Filters for Demodulation Measurements Dependency of Slot Parameters 5 8 Dependency of Slot Parameters The parameters that define a slot used for a GSM measurement are dependant on each other and only the following combinations of these parameters are available in the R amp S FPS GSM application see chapter 6 3 3 2 Slot Settings on page 94 Table 5 5 Dependency of slot parameters Burst Type Modulation Filter TSC AB GMSK GMSK Pulse TS 0 TS 1 TS 2 User HSR QPSK 16QAM 32QAM Narrow Pulse TSC 0 TSC 7 Wide Pulse User NB 8PSK 16QAM 32QAM Linearised GMSK Pulse TSC 0 TSC 7 User AQPSK Linearised GMSK Pulse Subchannel 1 TSC 0 Set 1 TSC 7 Set 1 Subchannel 2 TSC 0 Set 1 TSC 7 Set 1 TSC 0 Set 2 TSC 7 Set 2 Subchannel 1 User Subchannel 2 User GMSK GMSK Pulse TSC 0 Set 1 TSC 7 Set 1 TSC 0 Set 2 TSC 7 Set 2 User 5 9 Definition of the Symbol Period 5 9 1 The following sections define the symbol period for various modulation types GMSK Modulation Normal Symbol Rate The GMSK frequency pulse is defined in the standard document 3GPP TS 45 004 as a Gaussian pulse convolved with a rectangular pulse as illustrated at the top of fig ure 5 12 The phase of a GMSK signal due to a sequence of symbols a is defined in the standard as t iT e t
165. MS or 10 MHz for multicar rier BTS device types CNARrow The span is set to the span of the active carriers plus a margin of 1 8 MHz to either side This setting is suitable for narrowband noise measurements CWIDe The span is set to the span of the active carriers plus a margin of 6 MHz to either side This setting is suitable for narrowband noise and most of the wideband noise and intermodulation measurements MANual the frequency span is defined by a start and stop frequency or a center frequency and span RST TXB Example FREQ SPAN MODE MAN FREQ SPAN STAR 9150000 FREO SPAN STOP 970000000 Manual operation See Setting the Span to Specific Values Automatically on page 140 11 6 3 11 6 4 Configuring and Performing MCWN Measurements SENSe FREQuency STARt lt Frequency gt Parameters lt Frequency gt 0 to fmax min span RST 0 Example FREQ STAR 20MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Start Stop on page 140 SENSe FREQuency STOP lt Frequency gt Parameters lt Frequency gt min span to fmax RST fmax Example FREQ STOP 2000 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Start Stop on page 140 Triggering Measurements The commands for triggering measurements are described in chapter 11 5 4 Triggering Measurements on page 213 Configuring the Reference Measurement Reference power levels can either be defined manually or determined automatically
166. MS DEMod STDBits STD For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 332 Manual operation See Tail amp TSC Bits on page 123 Measurement Measurement settings define how power or spectrum measurements are performed OWEN VS MIMO tee 232 SSDS CUMIN EE 234 e Tridg t to SVOG airs eebe E 237 Power vs Time The Power vs Time filter is used to suppress out of band interference in the Power vs Time measurement see chapter 5 7 1 Power vs Time Filter on page 56 GONFigure BURSEPTEMbplate T ll EE 232 CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate TALign eene ecce aad anaiai RER EE aaa 233 CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate FILTer Type The PvT Filter controls the filter used to reduce the measurement bandwidth for Power vs Time measurements The PvT filter is optimized to get smooth edges after filtering burst signals and to sup press adjacent active channels Depending on the device type single carrier or multicarrier see CONFigure MS DEVice TYPE on page 191 different PvT filters are supported Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query lt Type gt G1000 Default for single carrier device Gaussian Filter 1000 kHz B600 single carrier only Gaussian Filter 600 kHz G500 single carrier only Gaussian Filter 500 kHz MC400 Recommended for measurements with
167. Manual 1176 8480 02 06 30 GSM UO Modulation Accuracy etc Measurement Results Table 4 9 Modulation spectrum results Result Description Offset Fixed frequency offsets from the center frequency at which power is measured kHz Power Nega Power at the frequency offset to the left of the center frequency tive Offsets Levels are provided as dB relative power level dBm absolute power level A to Limit power difference to limit defined in standard negative values indicate the power exceeds at least one of the limits Power Posi Power at the frequency offset to the right of the center frequency tive Offsets Levels are provided as dB relative power level dBm absolute power level A to Limit power difference to limit defined in standard negative values indicate the power exceeds at least one of the limits Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH TST see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 249 Results READ SPECtrum SWITching ALL on page 298 READ SPECtrum SWITching REFerence IMMediate on page 299 Trigger to Sync Graph The Trigger to Sync measurement determines the time between an external trigger event and the start of the first symbol of the TSC The start of the first symbol of the TSC corresponds to the time 0 of the symbol period see chapter 5 9 Definition of the Symbol Period on page 59 Only one result per data capture is provided Therefore it is useful to perf
168. Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 165 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe State This command turns the zoom on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP ZOOM ON Activates the zoom mode Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 165 See Restore Original Display on page 165 See R Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 165 11 7 4 2 Using the Multiple Zoom DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA eese 267 DiSblavlfWiNDow nztZOOM ML Tiple zoomzGTATe cece eee eeeeneteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 268 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area for a multiple zoom To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on pum EINER RN JO ANN NM NNUS User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 267 R amp S FPS K10 11 8 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 1 Frequency Sweep 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual
169. N CONF SPEC IMP 3 5 Apply exceptions to limit check CONF SPEC LIM EXC ON Activate the following result displays 1 Spectrum graph default top 2 Inner IM Table replaces Carrier Power table 3 Outer IM Table bottom 4 Outer narrow band table bottom left 5 Outer wide band table bottom right LAYout REPL WINDow 2 IIMP LAYout ADD WINDow 2 BEL OIMP LAYout ADD WINDow 3 BEL ONAR LAYout ADD WINDow 4 RIGH OWID Initiate a new measurement and wait until the sweep has finished INITiate IMMediate WAI Query trace data for Spectrum graph TRAC1 DATA TRACE1 Query intermodulation results FETC WSP IMPR INN FETC WSP IMPR OUT Query outer narrowband table results and outer wideband table results FETC WSP NARR OUT FETC WSP WID OUT Query wideband noise limit line including exceptions x values CALC1 LIM1 CONT DATA y values CALC1 LIM1 UPP DATA Query limit line trace values for intermodulation measured with 100 kHZ RBW x values CALC1 LIM2 CONT DATA Programming Examples y values CALC1 LIM2 UPP DATA Query limit line trace values for intermodulation measured with 300 kHZ RBW x values CALC1 LIM3 CONT DATA y values CALC1 LIM3 UPP DATA Query number of exceptions of range A Counted number of exceptions CALC1 LIM5 EXC COUN CURR Maximum number of exceptions allowed to pass the excep
170. N CONT KEY 117 152 RUN SINGLE cor 118 152 S Sample rate imde etn eie pue 115 127 OptitmiZilig aeree enero ci tese eoe ne ore I tr do Ede 177 ec 221 Scaling el 164 YAKS eE S 163 164 SCPIR vsisi oeno 49 51 96 345 remote Control cese cte enia teens 197 Select MANKEN sie ioie at ete ee A AA 162 Select E 85 Sequence estimator aasian iiias 122 Sequencer 11 85 Aborting remote ntn E ertt edes 224 Activating remote 224 MOUE oec le eendeitege 86 Mode remote eet eer enti o ee et pnus 225 MSRA FGSM m 83 Remote 223 e crm 86 State 86 SFH 945 SFH Slow frequency hopping c ceeceeseeeeereeteeeeeaee 46 Signal capturing D ratiomM semaine tee ite eros t e toa cae matte Duration remote see also Data acquisition siinseist 114 Signal descriptio x ree rit brio need esame Re e tensa MOWN MCWN remote Signal source REMOTE eo i ete ieee ene et ern 207 Single Sequencer eu EE 86 Single sweep SOfIK8y EE 118 152 SMIE ZOOM EE 165 Slope He L TelEE E 112 150 216 Slots IAGUV inesset pice ne a DEO erre ee tee 53 54 96 Active remote 2 eue eee 196 Active part GohliguratiOni csiis arris erts Display niter nr greens Equal length z First slot to measure First to measure Limit line alignment Multiple Numb
171. NPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FPS User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FPS No further trigger parameters are available for the con nector Output The R amp S FPS sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 218 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection on page 217 Output Type Trigger 2 Type of signal to be sent to the output Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FPS triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FPS is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 218 Level Output Type Trigger 2 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port LEVel on page 218 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command
172. NTer 1E9 would also set a frequency of 1 GHz Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down If the number you have entered is not supported e g in case of discrete steps the command returns an error Instead of a number you can also set numeric values with a text parameter in special cases e MIN MAX Defines the minimum or maximum numeric value that is supported e DEF Defines the default value 11 1 6 2 11 1 6 3 Introduction e UP DOWN Increases or decreases the numeric value by one step The step size depends on the setting In some cases you can customize the step size with a corresponding command Querying numeric values When you query numeric values the system returns a number In case of physical quantities it applies the basic unit e g Hz in case of frequencies The number of dig its after the decimal point depends on the type of numeric value Example Setting SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ Query SENSe FREQuency CENTer would return 1E9 In some cases numeric values may be returned as text e INF NINF Infinity or negative infinity Represents the numeric values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 e NAN Not a number Represents the numeric value 9 91E37 NAN is returned in case of errors Boolean Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represen ted by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is repre
173. Nnel SLOT3 MTYPe GMSK CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT3 TSC USER CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT3 TSC USER Set User TSC bits CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT3 TSC USER 10111101100110010000100001 Query User TSC bits CY CY E ET O I Programming Examples CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT3 TSC USER 10111101100110010000100001 Set slot 4 Off CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT4 STATe OFF Set slot 5 Off CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT5 STATe OFF Set slot 6 Off CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT6 STATe OFF Set slot 7 Off CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT7 STATe OFF eege Demodulation and Slot Scope Configure slot 1 slot to measure for single slot measurements e g EVM modulation spectrum CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots MEASure 1 Configure slots 0 3 for multi slot measurements e g PvT transient spectrum Set First slot to measure 0 Set No of slots to measure 4 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots 4 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet 0 Use sequence estimator for the symbol decision CONFigure MS DEMod DECision SEQuence Replace detected Tail amp TSC bits by the standard bits CONFigure MS DEMod STDBits STD gj e PvT Measurement settings Use Gaussian PvT filter with 500 kHz for single carrier BTS CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate FILTer G500 Align the limit line to mid of TSC for each slot CONFigure BURSt PTEM
174. Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 341 Manual operation See Frequency on page 99 CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier lt c gt MTYPe lt Modulation gt This command defines or queries the burst type and modulation of the selected carrier Suffix lt c gt 1 16 Active carrier Parameters lt Modulation gt Example Example Manual operation Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Frequency in Hz AGMSk Access burst GMSK modulation HN16qam Higher symbol rate burst narrow pulse 16 QAM modulation HN32qam Higher symbol rate burst narrow pulse 32 QAM modulation HNQPsk Higher symbol rate burst narrow pulse QPSK modulation HW16qam Higher symbol rate burst wide pulse 16 QAM modulation HW32qam Higher symbol rate burst wide pulse 32 QAM modulation HWQPsk Higher symbol rate burst wide pulse 16 QPSK modulation N16Qam Normal burst 16 QAM modulation N32Qam Normal burst 32 QAM modulation N8PSk Normal burst 8PSK modulation NAQPsk Normal burst AQPSK modulation NGMSk Normal burst GMSK modulation RST NGMS CONF MCAR CARR3 MTYP AQPS See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 341 See Modulation on page 99 CONFigure MS MCARrier FALLocation Mode This command describes the measurement setup for multicarrier measurements Parameters Mode CONTiguous Setup
175. R Fe Ep ket Ee EH TX TEEPEE 235 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence AVERage COUNtE esee enne 242 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence CARRier NUMBar esee 243 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence CARRier AUTO CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence MEASure essere CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence PLEVel essent rennen CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence RPOWer essere rennen CONFigure SPECtrum MObDulation IMMedijate 22 1 rnit tn ni tnt tne trot ens GONFigure SPECtrum NNARFOW 111 tta rris eta rra o Proh a a eR e YE Ee erar RE CER CRECEN E RR ER CONFOUre SPECON NIDE e CONFigu re SPECir m E anian reti ere E LEM a a e n EX a TES GONFigure SPECtrum SWITching EIMIIT si isse on co ten n re th tn a etie eterni ta i en ee ee ia BE elle D dE GONFigure SPECtrum SWITching IMMediate 22 cerner n trn ne CONFigure TRGS ADPSize CONFigure TRGS NOFBins CONFigure TRGSEIMMediat tei tnr a nne nm ree ren nene EES GONFigure WSPectrum MObDulation L MIT iis ooi tuat ene renta nore DEET CONFigure WSPectrum MOD lation EIS T SE Lect rrr rrr eee co eek tne ro enar CONFigure WSPectrum MObDulation IMMediate 22 2 nennen tnn enne tnn tnt nnn CONFigure MS ARFC EE CONFigure MS AUTO FRAMe ONCE ei CONEFigure EMS AUTO LEVELONGE EE GONFigu
176. R amp SSFPS K10 GSM Measuremen User Manual Current 1176 8480 02 06 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Test amp Measurement User Manual This manual applies to the following R amp S9FPS models with firmware version 1 30 and higher R amp S FPS4 1319 2008K04 R amp S FPS7 1319 2008K07 R amp S FPS13 1319 2008K13 R amp S FPS30 1319 2008K30 R amp S FPS40 1319 2008K40 The following firmware options are described e R amp S FPS K10 1321 4091 02 The firmware of the instrument makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgement on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2015 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S9FPS is abbreviated as R amp S FPS R amp S FPS K10 Contents Contents ME ooi er eee ee ee ee eee eee 7 Li About this Manual 5 iue rii innen dinner ONEA RERNA
177. READ BURG MAC CuracvlPtbRbor PDEAkK GDEMiatlon eene 287 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERRor RMS AVERage essen 287 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERRor RMS CURRent essere 287 FETOCH BURG MAC CuracvlPERbRor RMG MANImum nennen 287 FETCh BURSI MAGCuracy PERRor RMS SDEVlation iocos conata c buta a coo caca as 287 READ BURG MAC CuracvlPtERb or HMG AVEHRage eren 287 READ BURG MAC CuracvlPtERb orHRMGCURbent serene 287 READ BURG MAC CuracvlPERbor HMG MANimum eee ceeeeaeaeaeaeaeaeeeenenenenes 287 READ BURStEMACCu racy PERRO HMG GDtEViaton cece eaeaeeeeeeeeeenenenes 287 Retrieving Results FETCh BURSt MACCuracy ALL READ BURSt MACCuracy ALL This command starts the measurement and returns all the modulation accuracy results For details on the individual parameters see Modulation Accuracy on page 20 When the measurement is started the R amp S FPS is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the mea surement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem Return values lt MeasValue gt lt Error Vector Magnitude RMS gt lt Error Vector Magnitude Peak gt lt Magnitude Error RMS gt lt Magnitude Error Peak gt lt Phase Error RMS gt lt Phase Error Peak gt lt Origin Offset Sup pression IQ Offset IQ Imbalance gt lt Frequency Error Burst Power gt Amplitude Droop gt lt 95 ile EVM gt lt 95 ile Mag Error gt lt 95
178. RSIEMACGuracy FERRor SDEVialiori critt pa Tiaan aAa 329 READ BURG MAC CuracvlFERRor AVEHRage neret nnns 329 READ BURSI MACCuracy FERRor CURR6ent iae ceri esee ii ee saam eaae naa kal oe aaa saa RR 329 READ BURG MAC CuracvlFERRorMAvimum nnne nennen neret nnns 329 READ BURG MAC CuracvlFERRor GDEViaton nennen 329 FETCH WSPectrumMODulaton ABL sss atu reet ert exer Fe eee ceat e 330 READ WSPectrum MODulation PALE 2 1 2 22 12 2 2 Loretta ENEE EVEN 330 FETCh WSPectrum MODulation HRtFerence tnter 330 READ W bechrum MODulaton HRtFerencef MMediatel nen enenenererene 330 READIAUT OE WWiime EE 331 READ SPECtrun WMO DulationsGA Ne KEEN 331 CONFigure BURSt ETIMe IMMediate CONFigure BURSt MACCuracy IMMediate CONFigure BURStMERRor IMMediate CONFigure BURSt PFERror IMMediate CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate IMMediate CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate SELect Value CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation IMMediate CONFigure SPECtrum SELect Mode CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching IMMediate CONFigure TRGS IMMediate CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation IMMediate These commands select a specific result display They are maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the LAYout commands for new remote control programs see chap ter 11 7 1 2 Working with Windows in the Display on page 248 Usage Setting only CONFigure MS MULTi BURSt CONStell State CONFigure MS MULTi BURSt DEModulation State CONFigure MS MULTi BU
179. RSt PTEMplate State CONFigure MS MULTi SPECtrum MODulation State Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility CONFigure MS MULTi SPECtrum SWITching lt State gt CONFigure MS MULTi STATe State These commands are maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the LAYout com mands for new remote control programs see chapter 11 7 1 2 Working with Windows in the Display on page 248 CONFigure MS BSEarch lt State gt This command toggles between active burst search and inactive burst search Note This command is retained for compatibility with R amp S FS K5 only Use CONFigure MS SYNC MODE BURSt or CONFigure MS SYNC MODE ALL instead see CONFigure MS SYNC MODE on page 228 Parameters for setting and query lt State gt 110 ON OFF ON Burst search on OFF Burst search off RST 1 CONFigure MS BSTHreshold lt Value gt This command changes the burst find threshold Note This command is retained for compatibility with R amp S FS K5 only Due to the improved measurement capabilities of this GSM analysis software this remote control command and the function behind is not required any more Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt numeric value Threshold for burst detection Default unit dB Example CONF BSTH 10 DB Mode GSM CONFigure MS MCARrier ACTCarriers lt NofActCarriers gt This parameter specifies the total number of active carriers of the multicarrier
180. SM UO Measurements INITiate lt n gt CONMeas This command restarts a single measurement that has been stopped using ABORt or finished in single measurement mode The measurement is restarted at the beginning not where the previous measurement was stopped As opposed to INI Tiate lt n gt IMMediate this command does not reset traces in maxhold minhold or average mode Therefore it can be used to continue measure ments using maxhold or averaging functions Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Usage Event Manual operation See Continue Single Sweep on page 118 INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous lt State gt This command controls the measurement mode for an individual measurement chan nel Note that in single measurement mode you can synchronize to the end of the mea surement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous measurement mode synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous measurement mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single measurement end synchronization For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FPS User Manual If the measurement mode is changed for a measurement channel while the Sequencer is active see INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate on page 224 the mode is only considered the next time the measurement in that channel is activated by the Sequencer
181. SM frames Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching TYPE on page 235 6 3 8 3 Trigger to Sync The Trigger to Sync measurement allows for further configuration Power vs Time Spectrum Trigger to Sync Trigger to Sync Histogram Adaptive Data Size User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 128 6 3 9 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration No of Bins Specifies the number of bins for the histogram of the Trigger to Sync measurement For details see Trigger to Sync Graph on page 31 Remote command CONFigure TRGS NOFBins on page 237 Adaptive Data Size Specifies the number of measurements I Q captures after which the x axis of the Trigger to Sync histogram is adapted to the measured values and fixed for subse quent measurements Up to the defined number of measurements the Trigger to Sync value is stored When enough measurements have been performed the x axis is adapted to the value range of the stored results For subsequent measurements the result is no longer stored and the x axis and thus the dimensions of the bins is maintained at the set range The higher the Adaptive Data Size the more precise the x axis scaling For details see Trigger to Sync Graph on page 31 Remote command CONFigure TRGS ADPSize on page 238 Adjusting Settings Automatically Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FPS automatically according to the current measurement settings To activate the automatic ad
182. SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT2 See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 216 UO Power Trigger Source Trigger Settings Triggers the measurement when the magnitude of the sampled UO data exceeds the trigger threshold Remote command TRIG SOUR IQP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 216 IF Power Trigger Source Trigger Settings The R amp S FPS starts capturing data as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the third intermediate frequency For frequency sweeps the third IF represents the start frequency The trigger band width at the third IF depends on the RBW and sweep type For measurements on a fixed frequency e g zero span or UO measurements the third IF represents the center frequency This trigger source is only available for RF input The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuation and preamplification A refer ence level offset if defined is also considered For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet Remote command TRIG SOUR IFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 216 RF Power Trigger Source Trigger Settings Defines triggering of the measurement via signals which are outside the displayed measurement range For this purpose the instrument uses a level detector at the first intermediate fre quency The input signal must be in the frequency range between 500 MHz and 7 GHz The resulting trigger level at the RF input
183. SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt ALL CRESt This command starts the measurement and reads out the crest factor for the selected slot for all measured frames Retrieving Results This command is only available when the Power vs Time measurement is selected see PvT Full Burst on page 27 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command Suffix lt Slot gt lt 0 7 gt Slot number to measure power on The selected slot s must be within the slot scope i e First slot to measure lt s lt First slot to measure Number of Slots to measure 1 Return values Result numeric value Crest factor Default unit dB Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Set the slot scope Use all 8 slots for the PvT measurement Number of slots to measure 8 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots 8 First Slot to measure 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet 0 Activate PvT Power vs Time measurement LAY ADD 1 LEFT PTF Note READ starts a new single sweep annd then reads the results Use FETCh to query several results READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 ALL CRESt Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 26 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt ALL MAXimum READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot
184. Set number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 SUBChannell TSC 0 1 Subchannel 1 Query TSC number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 SUBChannell TSC TSC gt 0 Subchannel 1 Query Set number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 SUBChannell TSC SET 1 Subchannel 2 TSC 0 Set 1 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 SUBChannel2 TSC 0 2 Subchannel 2 Query TSC number and Set number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 SUBChannel2 TSC 0 2 Subchannel 2 Query TSC number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 SUBChannel2 TSC TSC 0 Subchannel 2 Query Set number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 SUBChannel2 TSC SET o ee ees Slot 2 7 configuration CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT3 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT4 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT5 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT6 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT7 STATe OFF 11 13 3 Programming Examples o Demodulation and Slot Scope Configure slot 0 slot to measure for single slot measurements e g EVM modulation spectrum CONFigure MS CHANnel MSL MEASure 0 Configure slots 0 1 for multi slot measurements e g PvT transient spectrum Set First slot to measure 0 Set No of slots to measure 2 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSL NOFS 2 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSL OFFSet 0 Use sequence estimator for the symbol decision CONFigure MS DEMod DECision SEQuence rrenen
185. TS Slots and frames The time domain is divided into s ots with a duration of 576 923 us exactly 3 5200 s 8 slots numbered 0 to 7 are combined into 1 frame with a duration of approximately 4 6154 ms exactly 3 650 s Multiframes and superframes Frames can be grouped into a multiframe consisting of either 26 for support traffic and associated control channels or 51 for all other purposes frames Multiframes can be grouped to superframes consisting of either 51 26 frame or 26 51 frame multiframes Multiframes and superframes are not of relevance for the physical measurements on the GSM system and thus not discussed in detail here A mobile phone therefore does not communicate continuously with the base station instead it communicates discretely in individual slots assigned by the base station dur ing connection and call establishment In the simplest case 8 mobiles share the 8 slots of a frame TDMA Frequency bands and channels The frequency range assigned to GSM is divided into frequency bands and each band in turn is subdivided into channels Each frequency channel is identified by its center frequency and a number known as the ARFCN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number which identifies the fre quency channel within the specific frequency band The GSM channel spacing is 200 kHz Communication between a mobile and a base station can be either frequency continu ous or frequency discrete distribut
186. TT 10 dB Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 106 INPut EATT AUTO State This command turns automatic selection of the electronic attenuation on and off If on electronic attenuation reduces the mechanical attenuation whenever possible Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 11 5 4 11 5 4 1 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Example INP EATT AUTO OFF Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 106 INPut EATT STATe State This command turns the electronic attenuator on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 106 Triggering Measurements Trigger settings determine when the input signal is measured e Configuring the Triggering Conditions sisisi 213 e Configuring the Trigger Outpult entero t tht nenne ph neon den nU Ene SER ERE 217 Configuring the Triggering Conditions The following commands are required to configure the trigger for the GSM measure ment TRIGE SEQUENCE A E 213 TRiGger SEOQuence HOLDotf MME EE 214 TRIGger SEQuence IFPowerlHOL Dofr 2 2 22 22 iiri teet ote ceed EENEG 214 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis eese nene ener 214 TRIGger SEQuenceJ LEVel EXTernal port cessere
187. UNt CURRent This command returns the currently reached number of frames or measurements used for statistical evaluation It can be used to track the progress of the averaging process until it reaches the set Statistic Count see SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 226 For Trigger to Sync measurements use the SENSe SWEep COUNt TRGS CURRent command to query the number of data acquisitions that contribute to the current result Usage Query only 11 5 6 11 5 6 1 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements SENSe SWEep COUNt TRGS CURRent This command returns the currently reached number of data acquisitions that contrib ute to the Trigger to Sync result It can be used to track the progress of the averaging process until it reaches the set Statistic Count see SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 226 For GSM measurements other than Trigger to Sync use the SENSe SWEep COUNt CURRent command to query the number of frames or measurements that contribute to the current result Usage Query only Demodulation Demodulation settings determine how frames and slots are detected in the input signal and which slots are to be evaluated The commands for frame and slot configuration are described in chapter 11 5 1 2 Frame on page 195 and chapter 11 5 1 3 Slot on page 196 W SIOl SCOPE pm 227 DNE puse 228 Slot Scope The slot scope defines which slots are to be evaluat
188. URSt MACCuracy IQOFfset MAXIMUM coriaria idiniin iiaiai aaas 284 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy IQOFfset SDEVIA ON iiinis dariniais 284 READ BURG MAC CuracvllOOFtset AVEhRage nntu enne nnne 284 READ BURSI MACCuracy IGOFfset CURRGNU a eieiei tendat ter reae nda 284 READ BURG MAC CuracvllOOFtset MAxlmum ener nnne 284 Retrieving Results READ BURSt MACCuracy IQOFfset SDEViation ceccseseeeeeseeeeeeeaceeeseseeeeeeenenees 284 FETCH BURG MAC CuracvlMERRor PEAK AVERage isse 284 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor PEAK CURRent essen 284 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor PEAK MANlmum esses enne 284 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK SDEV AtON ne 284 READ BURG MAC CuracvlMERbRor PDEAK AVEHRage hne 284 READ BURG MAC CuracvlMERbRor PDEAkK CUbent rennen 284 READ BURG MAC CuracvlMERbRor DEAK MANimum eren nnne 284 READ BURG MAC CuracvlMERbRor PDEAkK GDEViaton eee 284 FETChBURGOC MAC CuracvlMERRor RMG AVEhHRage 285 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS CURRent cccccssecsecccntetecseteeeseeseceeeeeeaeees 285 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor RMS MAXimum cessisse 285 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor RMS SDEViation cesses seen 285 READ BURSIt MACCuracy MERRor RMS AVERage sisse nenne 285 READ BURSIt MACCuracy MERRor RMS CURRent essen 285 READ BURSIt MACCuracy MERRor RMS MAXimum cessisse 285 READ BURSI MACCuracy MERRor
189. VM on page 332 TRACe lt n gt DATA X lt TraceNumber gt This command reads the x values time in seconds of the Power vs Time measure ment if active out of the window specified by the suffix lt n gt If a trace number is defined as a parameter for this command the x values time in seconds of the Trigger to Sync measurement if active out of the window specified by the suffix lt n gt are returned For details see chapter 11 8 2 5 Trigger to Sync Results on page 275 Retrieving Results Query parameters lt TraceNumber gt TRACe1 TRACe2 TRACe3 TRACe4 Trace number TRACe1 Average trace Transient Spectrum Maximum trace Trigger to Sync histogram values TRACe2 Maximum trace Trigger to Sync PDF of average trace TRACe3 Minimum trace TRACe4 Current trace Example TRACe2 DATA X Returns the Power vs Time values for the active trace in window 2 TRACe3 DATA X TRACel Returns the Trigger to Sync values for trace 1 in window 3 Usage Query only Manual operation See PvT Full Burst on page 27 See Trigger to Sync Graph on page 31 TRACe IQ DATA MEMory lt OffsetSamples gt lt NoOfSamples gt This command queries the UO data currently stored in the memory of the R amp S FPS By default the command returns all UO data in the memory You can however narrow down the amount of data that the command returns using the optional parameters By default the amount of available d
190. W 100e3 32 8 CONF SPEC MOD REF RPOW 30 3 27 2 Example CONF SPEC MOD REF MEAS ON CONF SPEC MOD REF RPOW 30e3 Queries the measured reference power level for an RBW of 30 kHz Manual operation See Ref Power RBW 300 kHz on page 154 See Ref Power RBW 100 kHz on page 154 See Ref Power RBW 30 kHz on page 155 Configuring the Noise Measurement The noise measurement can provide various results The following commands are required to configure the noise measurement Useful commands for configuring noise measurements described elsewhere SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 226 Remote commands exclusive to configuring noise measurements CONFigure SPECtrumtIMPOrder 2 oir eeeter ainainen e ERR a Der Road 245 CONFigure SPECtrami LIMitE XCeplion STAT trot tta Irt a 246 CONFigure SPECtrumeNNARTFOW e raavee deae anaana Eu aede NEEN 246 GONFigure SPEGIFUmp Te 246 CONFigure SPECtrum IMPorder Order This command defines for which order of intermodulation products the noise measure ment determines the level Configuring and Performing MCWN Measurements Parameters lt Order gt 0 3 3 5 0 No intermodulation products are measured 3 IM products order of 3 are measured 3 5 IM products order of 3 and 5 are measured RST 3 5 Example CONF SPEC IMP 3 Manual operation See Intermodulation on page 156 CONFigure SPECtrum LIMit EXCeption STATe lt State gt If enabled excepti
191. Wer SLOT lt s gt ALL AVERage READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt ALL AVERage This command starts the measurement and reads out the average power for the selected slot for all measured frames This command is only available when the Power vs Time measurement is selected see PvT Full Burst on page 27 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command Suffix lt Slot gt lt 0 7 gt Slot number to measure power on The selected slot s must be within the slot scope i e First slot to measure lt s lt First slot to measure Number of Slots to measure 1 Return values Result numeric value Average Default unit dBm Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Set the slot scope Use all 8 slots for the PvT measurement Number of slots to measure 8 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots 8 First Slot to measure 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet 0 Activate PvT Power vs Time measurement LAY ADD 1 LEFT PTF Note READ starts a new single sweep annd then reads the results Use FETCh to query several results READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 ALL AVERage Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 26 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt ALL CRESt READ BURSt
192. acy PERRor RMS CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the RMS value of the Phase Error When the measurement is started the R amp S FPS is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the mea surement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the Phase Error results see table 4 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value Phase error Default unit NONE User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 287 11 8 5 Retrieving Results Example READ BURS PERR RMS SDEV Usage Query only Modulation Spectrum Results The following commands are required to query the results of the Modulation Spectrum Table evaluation For details on the individual results see Modulation Spectrum Table on page 23 READ vs FETCh commands Note that for each result type two commands are provided which are almost identical The READ command starts the measurement and reads out the result When the mea surement is started the R amp S FPS GSM application is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via
193. aeessaueeeeuaueas 33 GSM UO Modulation Accuracy etc Measurement Results The UO data that was captured by the default GSM Modulation Accuracy etc mea surement can be evaluated using different methods All evaluation methods available for the GSM measurements are displayed in the selection bar in SmartGrid mode To activate SmartGrid mode do one of the following Z Select the SmartGrid icon from the toolbar e Select the Display button in the configuration Overview Select the Display Config softkey from the MEAS CONFIG menu Press the MEAS key For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FPS Getting Started manual By default the GSM measurement results for UO measurements are displayed in the following windows e Magnitude Capture e PvT Full Burst Modulation Accuracy R amp S FPS K10 Measurements and Result Displays e Power vs Slot The following evaluation methods are available for GSM UO measurements ecl Mc P U 17 EE 17 MAG MIU ele TEE 18 Magodo ENOR E 19 Marker ET 20 Modulation ee te 20 Modulation Spectrum Graphie 22 Modulation Ee ef RE LEE ER Phase EMO geingt EES EES teed 25 POWER VS Slobe anctcedeneshieasdcaanaiwentennseudcaaeavastasacatadeneassaansaaecayavuaeenncatesca 26 Py TRUM BUT S EE 27 Transient Spectrum ET e GE 29 Transient Spectrum TADS ssena E E E 30 TMQ GESl 16 SVMS Cora DEE 31 Ke ere eene 33 Constellation The complex so
194. age FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the peak result of the Error Vec tor Magnitude taken over the selected number of bursts When the measurement is started the analyzer is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the mea surement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the EVM results see table 4 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value EVM Default unit NONE Example READ BURS PEAK AVER Usage Query only For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 332 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the RMS value of the Error Vec tor Magnitude When the measurement is started the R amp S FPS is automaticall
195. age 192 Center Frequency Specifies the center frequency of the signal to be measured typically the center of the Tx band If the frequency is modified the ARFCN is updated accordingly for UO measure ments see ARFCN Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 208 Span Defines the frequency span The center frequency is kept constant The following range is allowed SpanNmin lt f span lt f max fmax and Span min are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency SPAN on page 241 Start Stop Defines the start and stop frequencies The following range of values is allowed fmin s start s fmax Span min fmin SPanmin s Fstop s fmax fmin fmax and Spanmin are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency STARt on page 242 SENSe FREQuency STOP on page 242 Setting the Span to Specific Values Automatically In Manual mode the frequency span is defined by a Start Stop or a Center Fre quency and Span If the Auto span mode is enabled default the span for the MCWN measurement is set to one of the following values automatically 6 4 4 3 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Tx Band The span for the MCWN measurement is set to the Tx band 10 MHz for multicarrier BTS device types or 2 MHz for all other device types The Tx bands are defined in the standard in 3GPP TS 45 005 chap ter 2 Frequency bands and channel arrang
196. age 332 READ SPECtrum MODulation GATing READ WSPectrum MODulation GATing This command reads out the gating settings for gated Modulation Spectrum mea surements see Modulation Spectrum Table on page 23 Retrieving Results The returned values can be used to set the gating interval for list measurements i e a series of measurements in zero span mode at several offset frequencies This is done in the Spectrum mode using the SENSe LIST subsystem see SENSe LIST POWer SET Prior to this command make sure you set the correct Trigger Mode IF power or External and Trigger Offset see chapter 11 5 4 Triggering Measurements on page 213 Return values lt TriggerOffset gt Calculated trigger offset based on the user defined Trigger Off set and Frame Configuration such that 50 90 of the active part of the Slot to measure excluding TSC is measured lt GateLength gt Calculated gate length based on the user defined Trigger Off set and Frame Configuration such that 50 90 of the active part of the Slot to measure excluding TSC is measured Example READ WSP MOD GAT Results 0 00032303078 0 00016890001 Usage Query only 11 8 6 Power vs Slot Results The following commands are required to query the results of the Power vs Slot evalu ation For details on the individual results see Power vs Slot on page 26 READ vs FETCh commands o Note that for each result type
197. al to one of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors OUTPuETRIGSersport DI Rebllori eh ioco EE ett eso crea SEENEN 217 QUTP t HslGgereport EEVel iere eate ce epa itta peto teta prepa nett Sande ea ebbe neni bu 218 OUTPULTRIGHEIS pom OT Pens dee dde ea cae Gide cai eee etia ane ite utn e tea 218 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate esee eene nennen enne nnns 219 OUTbutTRlGoer zportz PULL Se ENG 219 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection Direction This command selects the trigger direction for trigger ports that serve as an input as well as an output Suffix lt port gt Selects the used trigger port 2 TRG AUX Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters lt Direction gt INPut Port works as an input OUTPut Port works as an output RST INPut Manual operation See Trigger 2 on page 107 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel lt Level gt This command defines the level of the signal generated at the trigger output This command works only if you have selected a user defined output with OUTPut TRIGgereport 0TYPe Suffix port Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 TRG AUX Parameters lt Level gt HIGH TTL signal LOW OV RST LOW Manual operation See Trigger 2 on page 107 See Level on page 108 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe lt OutputT ype gt This command selects the type of signal generated at the trigger output Suffix lt p
198. alculate an average Typically a much larger average count than for the reference measure ment is required to obtain suitable results for noise measurements thus a separate average count is available for reference and noise measurements Wideband noise and intermodulation sweeps After the narrowband noise measurement if either wideband noise or intermodulation or both are enabled frequency sweeps are performed in the defined span Since the standard requires different RBWs depending on the distance from the outermost carri ers several sweeps are required to obtain results for the complete span The first sweep measurement is performed using an RBW of 100 kHz The second sweep mea surement is performed using an RBW of 300 kHz For more details on how intermodulation is calculated see chapter 5 15 5 Intermodu lation Calculation on page 77 For more details on how wideband noise results are determined see chapter 5 15 6 Wideband Noise Measurement on page 80 Evaluating the results for display After all the reference and noise measurements have been performed the measured data is evaluated for the final result display This includes the following procedures e Averaging the results from several measurements e Putting the results in relation to the reference power values Merging the traces according to the distance from the carriers and the position of the intermodulation products Performing limit checks see chapter
199. alculation The more points are used the higher the resolution in the spectrum becomes but the lon ger the calculation takes Return values lt NoOfBins gt integer value Range 3 to 524288 RST 1024 Example IQ FFT LENG 2048 Usage Query only SCPI confirmed TRACe lt n gt DATA lt TraceNumber gt This command reads trace data out of the window specified by the suffix lt n gt This command is only available for graphical result displays The returned values are scaled in the current level unit The data format depends on FORMat DATA on page 269 For Constellation diagrams the result is a vector of UO values for the measured points in the diagram The result is returned as a list of 1 Q value pairs Retrieving Results Query parameters lt TraceNumber gt TRACe1 TRACe2 TRACe3 TRACe4 Trace name to be read out TRACe1 Average trace transient spectrum Maximum trace TRACe2 Maximum trace TRACe3 Minimum trace TRACe4 Current trace Example TRAC1 DATA TRACel Usage Query only Manual operation See EVM on page 17 See Magnitude Capture on page 18 See Magnitude Error on page 19 See Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 22 See Phase Error on page 25 See PvT Full Burst on page 27 See Transient Spectrum Graph on page 29 See Trigger to Sync Graph on page 31 See Spectrum Graph on page 35 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the E
200. als AA 174 How to Perform a Basic Measurement on GSM Sig nals 1 2 Press the MODE key and select the GSM application Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for a GSM measurement Select the Signal Description button and configure the expected signal by defin ing the used device and slot characteristics as well as the modulation e Define the expected burst type and modulation for each active slot e Define the training sequences or syncs with which each slot will be compared to synchronize the measured data with the expected data e For AQPSK modulated signals define a TSC for each subchannel and each active slot e Foraccess bursts also define a Timing Advance i e the position of the burst within the slot e For signals from base stations capable of using multiple carriers define addi tional settings on the Multicarrier tab Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s frequency band and center frequency Select the Amplitude tab in the Input Frontend dialog box to define the correct power class for the base station or mobile device Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an external trigger to start capturing data only when a useful signal is transmitted Optionally to perform statistical evaluation over several measurements switch to the Sweep tab in the Data Acquisition dialog
201. anged Inverted sideband Q j l Off and Q signals are not interchanged Normal sideband I j Q Remote command SENSe SWAPiq on page 220 Sweep The Sweep settings define how often data is captured from the input signal by the R amp S FPS GSM application Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Data Acquisition e Data Acquisition Statistic Count Statistic Count SSIS ee 117 Continuous SweepiRUN Bee EE 117 Single sweep RUN SINGL E 118 Cominue Single EE 118 PRONG Ne MOM HR 118 Statistic Count Defines the number of frames to be included in statistical evaluations For measure ments on the Slot to Measure the same slot is evaluated in multiple frames namely in the number specified by the Statistic Count for statistical evaluations The default value is 200 in accordance with the GSM standard For details on the impact of this value see chapter 5 14 Impact of the Statistic Count on page 70 Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 226 Continuous Sweep RUN CONT After triggering starts the measurement and repeats it continuously until stopped While the measurement is running the Continuous Sweep softkey and the RUN CONT key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started Note Sequencer Furthermore the RUN CONT key controls the Sequ
202. ansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt NTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Troubleshooting 11 10 3 6 Controlling the Positive Transition Part STATus OPERation PTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable PTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit PTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt PTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt These commands control the Positive TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is
203. are measured up to 1800 kHz or 5800 kHz Parameters for setting and query Mode NARRow The frequency list comprises offset frequencies up to 1 8 MHz from the carrier The sample rate is 6 5 MHz NSParse More compact version of NARRow The sample rate is 6 5 MHz WIDE The frequency list comprises offset frequencies up to 6 MHz from the carrier The sample rate is 19 5 MHz WSParse More compact version of WIDE The sample rate is 19 5 MHz RST WIDE Example CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIST SELect NARRow Manual operation See Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List on page 127 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 332 SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE Type This command switches the filter type for the resolution filter for the Modulation Spec trum Transient Spectrum and Wide Modulation Spectrum measurement 11 5 7 3 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query lt Type gt NORMal P5 NORMal Gaussian filter with a 3 dB bandwidth of either 30 kHz or 100 kHz This value is retained for compatibility with R amp S FS K5 only P5 5 Pole filter with a 3 dB bandwidth of either 30 kHz or 100 kHz This filter is required by the GSM standard specification RST P5 Example BAND TYPE NORM Manual operation See Filter Type on page 126 READ WSPectrum MODulation GATing This command reads
204. arrier in a multicarrier signal disable the limit check for frequencies to the left or right of the carrier frequency of interest see Enable Left Limit Enable Right Limit on page 126 This allows you to measure the spectrum of the left or right most channel while ignoring the side where adjacent channels are located Make sure you select the correct Slot to Measure for Modulation Spectrum results see chapter 6 3 7 1 Slot Scope on page 118 Calculating limit lines according to the used DUT For multicarrier measurements ensure that the DUT is configured correctly see chapter 6 3 3 1 Frame on page 91 The number of active carriers and the specified BTS class affect the calculation of the limits according to the 3GPP standard for the modulation spectrum measurement Aligning the limit line correctly The limit line defined by the standard must be aligned to the measured slots The align ment can either be determined individually for each slot or the entire line is aligned according to the Slot to Measure see Limit Line Time Alignment on page 125 User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 178 10 4 Error Messages The standard requires that the entire line be aligned according to the Slot to Measure However in this case the Delta to Sync value will be identical for all slots in the scope see table 4 7 Note that the R amp S FPS GSM application assumes that all slots have equal length If they do not disable this setti
205. arts the measurement to read out the crest factor for the selected slot in the current frame This command is only available when the Power vs Time measurement is selected see PvT Full Burst on page 27 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command Suffix lt Slot gt lt 0 7 gt Slot number to measure power on The selected slot s must be within the slot scope i e First slot to measure s First slot to measure Number of Slots to measure 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value Crest factor Default unit dB Retrieving Results Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Set the slot scope Use all 8 slots for the PvT measurement Number of slots to measure 8 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots 8 First Slot to measure 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet 0 W Activate PvT Power vs Time measurement LAY ADD 1 LEFT PTF Note READ starts a new single sweep annd then reads the results Use FETCh to query several results READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 CURRent CRESt Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 26 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt CURRent MAXimum READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt CURRent MAXimum This command starts the meas
206. ata depends on TRACe 10 SRATe on page 221 and SENSe SWEep TIME on page 220 Parameters lt OffsetSamples gt Selects an offset at which the output of data should start in rela tion to the first data If omitted all captured samples are output starting with the first sample Range 0 to lt of samples 1 with lt of samples being the maximum number of captured values RST 0 lt NoOfSamples gt Number of samples you want to query beginning at the offset you have defined If omitted all captured samples starting at offset are output Range 1 to lt of samples gt lt offset samples gt with lt of samples gt maximum number of captured values RST lt of samples gt 11 8 2 Return values lt lQData gt Example Example Usage Retrieving Results Measured value pair I Q for each sample that has been recor ded The data format depends on FORMat DATA Default unit V Preset the instrument RST Enter GSM option INST SEL GSM Set center frequency to 935 MHz FREQ CENT 935MHZ Sample Rate 6 5 MHz TRAC IQ SRAT 6 5MHz Capture Time 100 ms SET SWE TIME 0 1 s Set statistic count to 1 to obtain the I Q data of a single cap ture Otherwise several captures are performed until the set II statistic count is reached VQ data is returned from the last capture SWE COUN 1 JI Switch to single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Start measurement and
207. ates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 163 11 7 2 3 Scaling The scaling for the vertical axis is highly configurable using either absolute or relative values These commands are described here DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe AUTO cececeeee cece eee ee canes ae nennen enne enean 261 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MAXimum eese 261 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MINimum eeeeeeee eene 262 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVISION eren 262 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition eene 263 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue esses 263 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue MAXimum eese 263 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue MlNimum eeeeeeeeee n 263 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe AUTO State If enabled the Y axis is scaled automatically according to the current measurement Parameters for setting and query State OFF Switch the function off ON Switch the function on RST ON Manual operation See Automatic Grid Scaling on page 164 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MAXimum Value This command defines the maximum value of the y axis for all traces in the selected result display The suffix t is irrelevant Analyzing GSM Measurement
208. ation RBW at 1800 kHz was configurable the R amp S FPS configures the RBW and VBW internally according to the selected frequency list see Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List on page 127 For the Modulation Spectrum Graph both the RBW and VBW are set to 30 kHz For the Modulation Spectrum Table they are set accord ing to table 4 6 The frequency list also determines the used sample rate see Sample rate on page 115 1 8 MHz The frequency list comprises offset frequencies up to 1 8 MHz from the carrier The sample rate is 6 5 MHz In previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers this setting was referred to as narrow 1 8 MHz More compact version of 1 8 MHz The sample rate is 6 5 MHz sparse 6 MHz The frequency list comprises offset frequencies up to 6 MHz from the carrier The sample rate is 19 5 MHz In previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers this setting was referred to as wide 6 MHz More compact version of 6 MHz The sample rate is 19 5 MHz sparse Remote command CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIST SELect on page 236 Transient Spectrum Reference Power This setting is only required by the Transient Spectrum evaluation see Transient Spectrum Graph In this evaluation the power vs spectrum for all slots in the slot scope is evaluated and checked against a spectrum mask To determine the relative limit values a reference power is required In order to detect irregulari
209. ation product frequency inside or outside the gap the R amp S FPS GSM application places an intermodulation measurement range of a cer tain bandwidth regardless whether intermodulation measurement is enabled or not Due to their more relaxed limits the IM measurement wins over the wideband noise measurement Thus many overlapping IM ranges can narrow down the wideband noise measurement segment until it is eliminated You can check this by activating only intermodulation IM order 3 and 5 OR only wideband measure ment and determining where a limit line is drawn and where there are none Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH IWID see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 249 Results FETCh WSPectrum WIDEband INNer ALL on page 311 Outer Wideband Table Displays the numeric results of the wideband noise measurement for the frequencies outside of the sub blocks but not in the gap Measurement offsets relative to outer most carriers are always greater than 1 8 MHz Note The results for the gap are displayed in the Inner Wideband Table R amp S FPS K10 Measurements and Result Displays JEE SS ea eae 1 Spectrum Graph Start 935 8 MHz 10001 pts 2 84 MHz Stop 964 2 MHz 3 Outer Wide Band Table Segment Freqs Worst Result RBW 100 kHz Start MHz Stop MHz Offset MHz Freq MHz dB dBm to Limit 2 Inner Wide Band Table Segment Freqs Worst Result RBW 100 kHz Start MHz Stop MHz Offset MHz Freq MHz dB dBm A to Limit 9 o For each
210. balance CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy IQlMbalance MAXimum FETCh BURSIt MACCuracy IQlMbalance SDEViation READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQlMbalance AVERage READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQlMbalance CURRent READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQlMbalance MAXimum READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQlMbalance SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the result of the I Q Imbalance When the measurement is started the R amp S FPS is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the mea surement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the I Q Imbalance see table 4 1 Return values Result numeric value 1 Q Imbalance Default unit NONE User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 283 R amp S FPS K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements WEEN Example READ BURS IQIM SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy IQOFfset AVERage FETCh BURSIt MACCuracy IQOFfset CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy IQOFfset MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy IQOFfset SDEViation READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQOFfset AVERage READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQOFfset CURRent READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQOFfset MAXimum READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQOFfset SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the standard deviation measure ment of the IQ Offset taken over the selected number of bursts When the measure ment is started the analyzer is automatically set to single s
211. band edges are counted Bands containing third order IM products and adjacent bands are ignored For the exact details see 3GPP TS 51 021 chapter 6 12 3 e For other device types Bands in a distance of 600 kHz to 6 MHz above and below the outermost carrier are counted For the exact details see 3GPP TS 45 005 chapter 6 2 1 4 1 The suffix required to query the number of exceptions in range A using remote com mands lt k gt is 5 Range B e For multicarrier BTS device types Bands inside the Tx band 10 MHz are counted Bands containing third order IM products and adjacent bands are ignored These are the only exceptions allowed by the standard Note that this range includes range A The number of exceptions thus includes the results from range A For the exact details see 3GPP TS 51 021 chapter 6 12 3 e For other device types Bands in a distance over 6 MHz from the outermost carriers are counted For the exact details see 3GPP TS 45 005 chapter 6 2 1 4 1 The suffix required to query the number of exceptions in range B using remote com mands lt k gt is 6 5 15 5 Intermodulation Calculation If intermodulation measurement is activated the following calculations are performed If there are N active carriers with frequencies f4 fz fs fy find all possible combina tions of integer coefficients C4 C2 C3 cy for which the following equation is true Multicarrier and Wideband Noise N 2je M k 1 with
212. by a reference measurement prior to the noise measurement the following commands are required to configure the reference measurement CONFloure SGbtChrum MODulation RE Ference AVERage COUN 242 CONFloure SGbtChrum MODulsation RE Ference CARbiert ALUTTOL neern nen eneenenne 243 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence CARRier NUMBer esee 243 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence MEASure cesses eene 244 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation RE Ference PL EVel 244 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence RPOWer esses 244 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence AVERage COUNt Number This command defines the number of reference measurements to be performed in order to determine the average reference values This value is ignored if no reference measurement is performed see CONF igure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence MEASure on page 244 Configuring and Performing MCWN Measurements Parameters lt Number gt integer value Range 1 32767 RST 10 Example CONF SPEC MOD REF AVER COUN 5 Manual operation See Reference Average Count on page 151 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence CARRier AUTO lt State gt This command specifies whether the carrier at which the reference powers for the MCWN measurement are measured is selected automatically if reference power mea surement is enabled see CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence MEASure on page 244
213. ce 6 Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an external trigger to start capturing data only when a useful signal is transmitted For external triggers do not forget to set the correct Trigger Offset to the beginning of the GSM frame 7 Optionally to perform statistical evaluation over several measurements switch to the Sweep tab in the Data Acquisition dialog box and define a Statistics Count 8 Select the Demodulation button to determine how bursts are detected and demodulated 9 Select the Measurement button and define the special measurement settings for the Power vs Time measurement e Define the PvT filter to be used for selection criteria see chapter 5 7 1 Power vs Time Filter on page 56 e Define how the limit line defined by the standard is to be aligned to the mea sured slots and whether the relative positioning of the TSCs is measured or derived from the position of the specified Slot to Measure only For measurements strictly according to standard use the default Limit Line Time Alignment Slot to Measure For non standard signals or signals with conspicuous slot timing use the Per Slot setting Tip use the Delta to Sync result of the Power vs Slot measurement to verify the slot timing User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 173 10 11 12 13 14 15 How to Analyze the Spectrum of GSM Signals Select the Display C
214. ch has different burst modulation characteristics Power vs time limit checks and the transient spectrum measurements for example are deter mined for multiple slots Statistical evaluation of several measurements is also possible Finally the GSM mea surement results can be exported to other applications GSM UO Modulation Accuracy etc Measurement Results 4 Measurements and Result Displays 4 1 The R amp S FPS GSM application provides two different measurements in order to deter mine the parameters described by the GSM specifications The default GSM UO measurement captures the UO data from the GSM signal The UO data includes magnitude and phase information which allows the R amp S FPS GSM application to demodulate signals and determine various characteristic signal parame ters such as the modulation accuracy power vs time modulation and transient spec trum in just one measurement For multicarrier measurements some parameters required by the GSM standard require a frequency sweep with varying resolution bandwidths Thus a new separate measurement is provided by the R amp S FPS GSM application to determine the wideband noise in multicarrier measurement setups For details on selecting measurements see Selecting the measurement type on page 85 e GSM UO Modulation Accuracy etc Measurement Results 16 e Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurement 00c cccccssseecccsseeseeeeeessee
215. checking how many c 0 Overlapping intermodulation limit lines Intermodulations with different orders for example 3 and 5 might fall on the exact same frequency or so close that the corresponding limit line ranges overlap In this Multicarrier and Wideband Noise case the R amp S FPS GSM application checks which IM s limit value or relaxation value applies according to the GSM standard The following cases may occur The overlapping limit lines have the same level cl LA LL B bebe IM C IM A B In this case the point in the middle of both IM frequencies is determined and each limit line is restricted to the area up to or starting from this point LL A LL B e IM C IM A B The limit lines have different values and overlap over the entire span LL A LL B lr IM IM A B The less stringent limit line is applied LL A y IM IM A B e The limit lines have different values and overlap over a partial span LLA LL B m M C D IM A B The less stringent limit line is applied in the overlapping area the distinct limit lines are reduced to the remaining area s Multicarrier and Wideband Noise LL A LL B IM C D IM A B 5 15 6 Wideband Noise Measurement If wideband noise measurement is activated the total frequency range of the measure ment defined by the selected span and the GSM band is divided in non overlapping frequency segments according to the following rule
216. ching the marker type does not activate an additional marker it only switches the type of the selected marker Normal A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position in the diagram Delta A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the speci fied reference marker marker 1 by default Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 258 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 258 Assigning the Marker to a Trace The Trace setting assigns the selected marker to an active trace The trace deter mines which value the marker shows at the marker position If the marker was previ ously assigned to a different trace the marker remains on the previous frequency or time but indicates the value of the new trace If a trace is turned off the assigned markers and marker functions are also deactiva ted Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe on page 259 All Markers Off Deactivates all markers in one step Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF on page 259 7 1 2 2 7 1 2 3 Result Configuration General Marker Settings General marker settings are defined in the Marker Config tab of the Marker dialog box Markers Marker Settings Traces Marker Table Marker Scaling ist eidel 2 PvT Full Burst Marker Table Display Defines how the marker information is displayed On Displays the marker informat
217. cified file Example See chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 332 Status Reporting System The status reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the instrument e g information on errors or limit violations which have occurred This infor mation is stored in the status registers and in the error queue The status registers and the error queue can be queried via IEC bus The GSM application uses the standard status registers of the R amp S FPS However some registers are used differently Only those differences are described in the follow ing sections For details on the common R amp S FPS status registers refer to the description of remote control basics in the R amp S FPS User Manual RST does not influence the status registers Description of the Status Registers All the status registers are the same as those provided by the base system with the exception of the following registers which are provided by the R amp S FPS and are not available from the R amp S FPS GSM application command tree e STATus QUESTionable ACPLimit e STATus QUESTionable LMARgin lt 1 2 gt 11 10 1 Status Reporting System The commands to query the contents of the following status registers are described in chapter 11 10 3 Querying the Status Registers on page 319 e STATus QUEStionable SYNC Register AAA 318 e STATus QUEStionable LIMit Regester 318 e Querying the Statu
218. closest carrier at which intermodu lation power is measured Default unit Hz lt IMOrder gt 3 5 35 Order of the intermodulation 3 IM order 3 5 IM order 5 35 IM orders 3 and 5 lt RBW gt numeric value Resolution bandwidth used for measurement Default unit Hz lt Power gt numeric value Absolute or relative power level to reference power measured at IM frequency Default unit dBm dB lt Limit gt numeric value absolute or relative power level limit to reference power Default unit dBm dB lt AbsRelMode gt ABS REL Determines whether absolute or relative power values are returned lt LimCheck gt Example Example Usage Manual operation Retrieving Results Result of the limit check at this offset frequency PASSED power within limits FAILED power exceeds limit FETC WSP IMPR INN See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 341 Query only See Inner IM Table on page 37 FETCh WSPectrum IMPRoducts OUTer ALL This command queries the results of the measured intermodulation products up to the order specified using CONFigure SPECtrum IMPorder for the frequencies outside of the subblocks but not in the gap for non contiguous carrier allocation For each measured offset frequency the following values are returned Return values lt FreqAbs gt lt FreqRel gt lt IMOrder gt lt RBW gt lt Pow
219. cluded in statis tical evaluations For measurements on the Slot to Measure the same slot is evaluated in multiple frames namely in the number specified by the Statistic Count for statisti cal evaluations For Trigger to Sync measurements where only one result is calculated per data acqui sition the Statistic Count determines how many values are considered for averaging As mentioned above the Statistic Count for Trigger to Sync measurements refers to the number of data acquisitions whereas for all other measurements the value refers to the number of frames Since usually more than one frame is captured per data acquisition the number of data acquisitions required to obtain the required number of results the Statistic Count may vary considerably If both Trigger to Sync and other result types are active at the same time the latter are finished first and the traces in particular the current measurement trace remains unchanged until the Trigger to Sync measurement has also finished The counter in the channel bar counts the slower of the two events i e the number of measurements if a Trigger to Sync result display is active o Statistic count for Trigger to Sync vs other measurements In MSRA mode only a single data acquisition is performed by the MSRA Master and the R amp S FPS GSM application analyzes this data repeatedly Thus the Trigger to Sync measurement will only count one data acquisition and can never reach
220. commen ded that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel on page 211 R amp S FPS K10 Configuration Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level The scal ing of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FPS so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Note however that the internal reference level used to adjust the hardware settings to the expected signal optimally ignores any Reference Level Offset Thus it is impor tant to keep in mind the actual power level the R amp S FPS must handle and not to rely on the displayed reference level internal reference level displayed reference level offset Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 211 Mechanical Attenuation Defines the mechanical attenuation for RF input Attenuation Mode Value Mechanical Attenuation The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level Auto mode This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation
221. contains the start and stop values for the displayed time frequency or symbol range Understanding the Display Information Status bar information Global instrument settings the instrument status and any irregularities are indicated in the status bar beneath the diagram Furthermore the progress of the current operation is displayed in the status bar 3 About the Measurement A basic GSM measurement in the R amp S FPS GSM application includes a power vs time and a spectrum measurement as well as modulation accuracy e g EVM phase error for a GSM signal as defined by the relevant 3GPP standards The UO data from the GSM signal applied to the RF input of the R amp S FPS is captured for a specified mea surement time This data is demodulated and synchronized with a reference signal to identify the individual frames and slots The slots of interest are then analyzed in order to display the spectral and power results either graphically or numerically and to calcu late the modulation parameters The standard distinguishes between single slot and multi slot measurements Single slot measurements analyze one slot referred to as the Slot to measure within the GSM frame which consists of 8 slots in total Modulation specific parameters such as the phase error EVM or spectrum due to modulation are determined on a per slot basis Multi slot measurements on the other hand analyze a slot scope of up to 8 con secutive slots each of whi
222. contiguous El 73 Carrier configuration essesssssss 99 136 Sap WEE Limit check Normal te SyHCehEOnkZaliOn s cnet cobrar vp sa poche eia Normal symbol period TEEN see also Normal symbol period 60 NSR Normal symbol rate Number of Slots to measure Demod 228 O Offset Analysis E 116 Frequency Reference level eitis aie eaa Ecco santa 105 143 Optimizing Measurements ui cde rex tr eet ti xi Dea Desk eri cog oa n 177 Options Electronic attenuation ssssussss 106 143 Outer IM Table Result display toe ior ete cei e dee aieo 38 Outer Spectrum Table R s lt display aee i oko ei N 39 42 Output ConfiguratiOn u c eoe etri tees Configuration remote Klee EE TEQUE ccc core t ran iret in eese Overview Configuration Configuration MCWN P Parameters IntermodulatiOrni 2 taucht carico rta Modulation Accuracy Narrowband noise Wideband noise 22 2 inet ticae tauri oe cintas o lp Peak search GY aire emailed Pedo E O enr seuneate 163 Peaks Absolute caisgire as eren ic ck der eden evan 163 Marker positlonilig sssini 163 DONKEY EE 163 Performance IrpkoNiImg cc ems octets Dent Dep dade 177 Performing GSM measurement ssssosnnieseneniineseeriirnnneneerne ne 170 Phase Error
223. cope of the Measurement on page 53 Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots on page 228 First Slot to measure This parameter specifies the start of the measurement interval for mulit slot measure ments i e Power vs Time and Transient Spectrum measurements relative to the GSM frame boundary The following conditions apply e First Slot to measure s Slot to Measure e Slot to Measure s First Slot to measure Number of Slots to measure 1 See also chapter 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement on page 53 Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet on page 228 Frame Configuration Select Slot to Configure This area shows a graphical representation of the configuration of each slot Select a slot to display its Slot dialog box see chapter 6 3 3 2 Slot Settings on page 94 For active slots the following information is shown e The burst type e g Normal NB for a normal burst e The modulation e g GMSK e The training sequence TSC and Set 6 3 7 2 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration For details on how to interpret the graphic see Frame configuration and slot scope in the channel bar on page 54 Demodulation Settings The demodulation settings provide additional information to optimize frame slot and symbol detection The settings in this dialog box are available when you do the following e Inthe Overview select the Demodulation button then swi
224. cscecseeeeeneeeeeeceseceeeeeneneseseaenaaaaeaeaeneaeaes 302 CAL Culate nz LlMitks EAIL eei seeee esee eene nennen nnne nnne rennes n nnns 302 CAL Culate nzLlMitcks LOwWerl DATAI nennen nennt nnne nnn n 303 CALCulate n LIMit k UPPer DATAJ ueeeseeeeeeee nnne nenne niii innen nnn nennt nnns 303 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA This command queries the x values of the limit specified line Suffix lt k gt 1 2 3 4 The limit line to query 1 upper limit line 2 lower limit line PvT Full Burst only Return values lt LimitLinePoints gt For PvT Full Burst display Time in seconds Usage Query only SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 22 See PvT Full Burst on page 27 See Spectrum Graph on page 35 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL This command queries the result of the limit check of the limit line indicated in the selected measurement window Note that a complete sweep must have been per formed to obtain a valid result A synchronization with OPC OPC Or WAI should therefore be provided Suffix lt k gt 1 2 3 4 The limit check to query 1 Max trace gt upper limit line 2 Min trace gt lower limit line PvT Full Burst only Return values Result 1 0 1 Failed see table 11 6 0 Passed see table 11 6 Example CALCulate2 LIMit1 FAIL Usage Query only
225. ct is that the mobile can send power on a frequency in more than one slot Short Introduction to VAMOS The Voice services over Adaptive Multi user Channels on One Slot VAMOS exten sion to the GSM standard allows transmission of two GMSK users simultaneously within a single time slot Subchannels The standard specifies the downlink signal using Adaptive QPSK AQPSK modulation see 3GPP TS 45 004 where two subchannel binary sequences are multiplexed to Short Introduction to VAMOS form a single QPSK sequence The ratio of powers for the subchannels is referred to as the Subchannel Power Imbalance Ratio SCPIR One of the subchannels is inter preted as interference The value of SCPIR affects the shape of the AQPSK constella tion For an SCPIR of OdB the constellation is square as in normal QSPK while for other values of the SCPIR the constellation becomes rectangular Training sequences TSCs A new set of training sequences TSCs has also been proposed see 3GPP TS 45 002 for GMSK signals The previous TSCs for GMSK bursts are listed as Set 1 while the new TSCs are listed as Set 2 AQPSK signals can be formed using TSCs from Set 1 on the first subchannel and TSCs from either Set 1 or Set 2 on the second subchannel In case a TSC from Set 2 is used it should match the TSC from Set 1 i e TSC lt n gt from Set 1 on subchannel 1 should match TSC lt n gt from Set 2 on subchannel 2 for n 0 7 TSC vs Midamble
226. cy Measurement Configuration Center Frequency Specifies the center frequency of the signal to be measured typically the center of the Tx band If the frequency is modified the ARFCN is updated accordingly for UO measure ments see ARFCN Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 208 ARFCN Defines the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number ARFCN The Center Fre quency on page 103 is adapted accordingly Possible values are in the range from 0 to 1023 however some values may not be allowed depending on the selected Frequency Band Remote command CONFigure MS ARFCn on page 208 Center Frequency Stepsize Defines the step size by which the center frequency is increased or decreased when the arrow keys are pressed When you use the rotary knob the center frequency changes in steps of only 1 10 of the Center Frequency Stepsize The step size can be coupled to another value or it can be manually set to a fixed value X Span Sets the step size for the center frequency to a defined factor of the span The X Factor defines the percentage of the span Values between 1 and 100 in steps of 1 96 are allowed The default setting is 10 96 This setting is only available for MCWN measurements Center Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency The used value is indicated in the Value field Manual Defines a fixed step size for the center frequency Enter the step size in the Va
227. d E 218 OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe IMMediate 1 terr tenta trennt tte innere t dines rns 219 OUTPut TRIGgersport PULSS E EE 219 KREE WR e DA NET 331 READ BURSEPTEMplate TRGS AVERGage67 iere ent tree bre ric er ERR EE 300 READ BURSEPTENMplate IRGS GUREGSnt crore t tree e onse ATIAN EE EHE RN XS CHF e Ea 300 READ BURSt PTEMplate TRGS MAXimum wes READ BURSEPTEMplate TRGS MINIIYUtrI ioo tooth rino rr etae rer eerta tr Sara eins 301 READ BURSEPTEMplate TRGS SDENVIGLIOIT c onore t t reet epa tesa FUSE ENEEK TEPATE Ee 301 READ BURStSPOWer SLOT sSlot ALL AVERage rrt tht n rn reds 291 READ BURStSPOWer SLOT sSlot ALL MAXimum essere nennen nnne TEPENE 292 READ BURStSPOWer SLOT lt Slot CURRENtAVERAGE rnnt ttr nre ende 293 READ BURSEtSPOWer SLOT sSlot CURRent CHE 294 READ BURStSPOWer SLOT sSlot CURRent MAXimum eese nennen 295 READ BURSECtSPOWer SLOTsSlot DELTatosync north rrt rete Sa 296 READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt LUIMICEAILN ceeeeeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeceseeeceseeecaeseesaesneeeaeeeseaeenteneeeateaes 297 READ BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop AVERage READ BURStEMACCuracy ADRoop CURRENT eebe cerei eer eps rr italiane 281 READ BURSt MACOCuracy ADRoop MAXimum essent 281 READ BURSI MACCuracy ADROOp SDEVialiori rt ricette it re rg 281 READ B RSIEMAGGUracy ALL
228. d Q parts of the sig nal Swap the and Q values after data acquisition in the R amp S FPS GSM application to reverse this effect see Swap Q on page 116 11 d 11 1 Introduction Remote Commands to Perform GSM Mea surements The following commands are required to perform measurements in the GSM applica tion in a remote environment It is assumed that the R amp S FPS has already been set up for remote operation in a network as described in the R amp S FPS User Manual Note that basic tasks that are also performed in the base unit in the same way are not described here For a description of such tasks see the R amp S FPS User Manual In particular this includes e Managing Settings and Results i e storing and loading settings and result data Basic instrument configuration e g checking the system configuration customizing the screen layout or configuring networks and remote operation Using the common status registers The following topics specific to the GSM application are described here Tu E 180 e COMMON rr 185 e Activating GSM Measurements cei ise innin HELL LEE Ra Ld ua 185 e Selecting the Measurement iecit ndn trennen ihn 190 e Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements reee 190 e Configuring and Performing MCWN Measurements AAA 240 e Analyzing GSM Measurements ceeeesieeeee nennt nne trennen thin nennt 247 e Retrieving Resuht
229. d for this shift numerically by the application Note In MSRA mode the setting command is only available for the MSRA Master For MSRA applications only the query command is available Parameters lt Offset gt Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Example FREQ OFFS 1GHZ Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Frequency Offset on page 103 Amplitude Settings The following commands are required to configure the amplitude settings in a remote environment Useful commands for amplitude settings described elsewhere INPut COUPling on page 205 INPut IMPedance on page 206 CONFigure MS POWer CLASs on page 193 Remote commands exclusive to amplitude settings DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVISION 2 cccceeeceeee eren 210 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel sese eene 211 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFF Set ccececeeceeteeeeeeeeeeeeneneees 211 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe sessssssssssesssseseee eene nnne 211 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision Value This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y axis for all diagrams where possible The suffix t is irrelevant Parameters Value numeric value WITHOUT UNIT unit according to the result dis play Defines the range per division total range 10 lt Value gt RST depends on
230. desired full scale voltage of 1 V ScalingFactor 1 V maximum int16 value 1 V 215 3 0517578125e 5 V Scaling Factor Numerical value Numerical value x ScalingFac tor Minimum negative int16 value 215 32768 1V Maximum positive int16 value 215 1 32767 0 999969482421875 V Example PreviewData in XML lt PreviewData gt lt ArrayOfChannel length 1 gt lt Channel gt PowerVs1 Min lt Arra SEX fl l ime yOfFloat length 256 gt oat 134 float oat 142 float efl oat 140 float ArrayOfFloat Min Max lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 float 70 float float 71 float float 69 float ArrayOfFloat Max PowerVsTime Spectrum Min ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt float 133 float float 111 float A 2 2 UO Data File Format iq tar lt float gt 111 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Min gt lt Max gt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 67 lt float gt lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt float gt 70 lt float gt lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Max gt lt Spectrum gt IQ lt Histogram width 64 height 64 gt 0123456789 0 lt Histogram gt IQ lt Channel gt lt ArrayOfChannel gt lt PreviewData gt UO Data Binary File The I Q data is saved in binary format according to the
231. dowName gt This command removes a window from the display in the active measurement channel Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Usage Event LAYout REPLace WINDow lt WindowName gt lt WindowType gt This command replaces the window type for example from Diagram to Result Sum mary of an already existing window in the active measurement channel while keeping its position index and window name To add a new window use the LAYout ADD WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows in the active measurement channel use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt WindowType gt Type of result display you want to use in the existing window See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 249 for a list of availa ble window types Example LAY REPL WIND 1 MTAB Replaces the result display in window 1 with a marker table LAYout SPLitter lt Index1 gt lt Index2 gt lt Position gt This command changes the position of a splitter and thus controls the size of the win dows on each side of the splitter Compared to the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE on page 248 command the LAYout SPLitter changes the size of all windows to either side of the splitter per manently
232. ds and channels on page 46 The following frequency bands are supported e T GSM 380 e T GSM 410 e GSM 450 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration GSM 480 GSM 710 GSM 750 T GSM 810 GSM 850 P GSM 900 E GSM 900 R GSM 900 T GSM 900 DCS 1800 PCS 1900 The default frequency band is E GSM 900 Remote command CONFigure MS NETWork TYPE on page 192 CONFigure MS NETWork FREQuency BAND on page 192 Power Class The following power classes are supported 1 8 BTS 1 5 MS GMSK E1 E2 E3 MS all except GMSK M1 M2 M3 Micro BTS P1 Pico BTS The default power class is 2 Remote command CONFigure MS POWer CLASs on page 193 Equal Timeslot Length This parameter is only taken into account if Limit Time Alignment is set to Slot to measure see Limit Line Time Alignment on page 125 If activated all slots of a frame are considered to have the same length 8 x 156 26 normal symbol periods In this case the limit line for each slot required for the Power vs Time spectrum masks is aligned by measuring the TSC of the Slot to Measure only and using this value to align the limit line for all slots in the frame see also PvT Full Burst on page 27 If deactivated slots number 0 and 4 of a frame have a longer duration all others have a shorter duration compared to the Equal Timeslot Length 157 156 156 156 157 156 156 156 normal symbol periods See GPP TS 51 02
233. duction ear a ee ee DE eege E E 180 Common Suffixes nete etian Sak cate ss Se AAEE cued tue ncn ESENE SEEKERS 185 Activating GSM Measurements eese nennen nnne nnn nien nnne 185 Selecting the Measurement sees nennen nnne nennen 190 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements eese 190 Configuring and Performing MCWN Measurements eee 240 Analyzing GSM Measurements eese enne enne nennen nnns 247 Retrieving Results ete eH eie deer 268 Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results eee 316 Status Reporting System eeesseseeeseseeeeeeee nennen nennen nnn nennen nnns 317 Troublesliooting 1 niente ni Hii rediisse iiie 322 User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 4 11 12 Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility 323 11 13 Programming Example cccisisccccccssccccssescccccecevsiceccesevsscecesevseccecesdeesceseesvseciesessdetceees 331 A Annex Reterence REENEN 345 AGT List of abbreviations eire rete Ec Ere gege ee 345 A VQ Data File Format iq tar ccccciciccccciccsscceesssceccsceesecsseesenseeas snes csbsceeseceesessnesesteceessenss 346 List of COMMAMNG EN 352 MAEN M s 361 About this Manual 1 Preface 1 1 About this Manual This GSM Measurements User Manual provides all the infor
234. e dance using a matching pad of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The power loss correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 Parameters Impedance 50 75 RST 50 Q Example INP IMP 75 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Impedance on page 101 INPut SELect lt Source gt This command selects the signal source for measurements i e it defines which con nector is used to input data to the R amp S FPS If no additional input options are installed only RF input is supported Parameters lt Source gt RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector RST RF 11 5 2 2 Configuring the Outputs Configuring trigger input output is described in chapter 11 5 4 2 Configuring the Trig ger Output on page 217 DIAGRostic SERVICS NSONFGB oae tee hare aen heat n kr a ripida naian ni ANEN ANNE 207 DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce State This command turns the 28 V supply of the BNC connector labeled NOISE SOURCE CONTROL on the R amp S FPS on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example DIAG SERV NSO ON Manual operation See Noise Source on page 107 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements 11 5 3 Frontend Configuration 11 5 3 1 The following commands are required to configure frequency and amplitude settings which represent the frontend of the measurement setup 9 ie 208 LEE le Ee EE 210
235. e B currently maximum detected vs maximum allowed provided only if exceptions are enabled lt k gt 6 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH WSFDomain see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 249 Results TRACe DATA TRACel1 see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 270 Limit results FETCh SPECtrum MODulation LIMit FAIL on page 305 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL on page 302 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA on page 302 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer DATA on page 303 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt EXCeption COUNt CURR on page 304 CALCulate n LIMit k EXCeption COUNt MAX on page 305 Carrier Power Table Displays the measured power levels and reference powers of all active carriers 2 Carrier Power Table Carrier Power Level Reference Power dBm No Freq MHz RBW 300 kHz RBW 100 kHz RBW 30 kHz max 1 10 2 5 7 10 1 D 10 1 9 J 10 1 a 9 10 1 Ne 9 2 The following parameters are shown User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 36 Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurements Table 4 11 Carrier power measurement results Parameter Description Carrier No Active carrier number as defined in chapter 6 3 3 3 Carrier Settings on page 98 Additional labels e max the carrier with the highest power level If the reference power is determined by a reference measurement see Enabling a reference power measurement Measure on page
236. e Configuring the Aitenuation sss entente tenente nne 211 Frequency The following commands are required to configure the frequencies to measure Useful commands for configuring frequencies described elsewhere CONFigure MS NETWork FREQuency BAND on page 192 CONFigure MS NETWork TYPE on page 192 Remote commands exclusive to configuring frequencies CONEi gurep MSI ARFOR EE 208 SENSe FREQuesncy CENTGr 1 2 endete ora ecco EERSTEN 208 SENSE JFREQUSnCy EEN 209 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO cette ttt tette 209 SENSe FREQuesncy OFFSel 3 er ctas aa rus Pesos rav te E d ed EN RIP Rc 210 CONFigure MS ARFCn Value This command specifies the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number ARFCN to be measured Setting the ARFCN updates the frequency Parameters for setting and query Value numeric value Range 0 to 1023 some values may not be allowed depending on the selected frequency band Default unit NONE Example CONF ARFC 5 Manual operation See ARFCN on page 103 SENSe FREQuency CENTer Frequency This command defines the center frequency If you change the frequency the R amp S FPS updates the ARFCN accordingly Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters lt Frequency gt The allowed range and fmax is specified in the data sheet UP Increases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP comma
237. e Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 157 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Freq This function adjusts the center frequency and ARFCN I Q mode only automatically For multicarrier measurements all carrier settings are automatically adjusted see chapter 6 3 3 3 Carrier Settings on page 98 Carriers are only detected in a range of approximately 25 MHz to 2 GHz For further details see chapter 5 16 Automatic Carrier Detection on page 81 Remote command SENSe ADJust FREQuency on page 239 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized In order to do so a level measurement is performed to determine the optimal reference level This function is not available in MSRA mode Remote command CONFigure MS AUTO LEVel ONCE on page 239 Result Configuration 7 Analysis General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers windows etc can be configured via the Result Configuration dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following 7 1 In the Overview select the Result Config button Press the MEAS CONFIG key then select the Res
238. e Triggering Measurements ree retten rie re aa de cene eoe 213 LENPr UCPSeU im 219 e JDemodulatigli E 227 MOaSLIFGnie E 232 e Adjusting Settings Automatically eese 238 11 5 1 11 5 1 1 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Signal Description The signal description provides information on the expected input signal which optimi zes frame detection and measurement e Device under Test Set lgs o o tere eee ete ote e dee terr euet 191 LEM cuu IIIS 195 ME e 196 CANNER fle r 202 Device under Test Settings The type of device to be tested provides additional information on the signal to be expected CONFigiire MS DEVICE d EE 191 GONFigure MSENETWork TYPE Ji orrida eri neri dauri a a aiiin iiaii 192 CONFioure MS N E TWorkFREOuencv BAND 192 CONFigurer MS PONWeDGLASS EE 193 CONFigure MSEPOWerPOARrFier iiie ocio net axez ocius eu cesa apte iaaa aaau 194 CONFigure MS POWer PCARrier AUTOY caer eniti enean nnn hanh nhan asa eR p KEREN 195 CONFigure MS DEVice TYPE Value This command specifies the type of device to be measured Parameters for setting and query Value BTSNormal BTS TRX power class Normal BTSMicro BTS TRX power class Micro BTSPico BTS TRX power class Pico MSNormal MS normal type MSSMall MS small type MCBLocal Multicarrier BTS Local Area MCBMedium Multicarrier BTS Mediu
239. e an OFFSET value of 0 Modulation modes Different modulation modes are used in the GSM mobile radio network The original GSM modulation is GMSK with the normal symbol rate NSR of approximately 270 833 ksymb s exactly 1625 6 ksymb s This corresponds to a bit rate of 270 833 kbit s The details are specified in chapter 2 of SGPP TS 45 004 see table 5 1 The 8PSK Phase Shift Keying modulation which is used within EDGE was intro duced to increase the data rate on the physical link It uses the same symbol rate the normal symbol rate as GMSK 270 833 ksymb s but has a bit rate of 3 x 270 833 kbit s exactly 812 5 kbit s In this method three bits represent a symbol The details are specified in chapter 3 3GPP TS 45 004 see table 5 1 The 16QAM and 32QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation modulation which are used in EDGE Evolution were introduced to further increase the data rate on the phys ical link They use the normal symbol rate 270 833 ksymb s but have bit rates of 4 x 270 833 kbit s or 5 x 270 833 kbit s respectively The details are specified in chapter 4 3GPP TS 45 004 see table 5 1 The QPSK 16QAM and 32QAM modulation with a higher symbol rate which are used in EDGE Evolution were introduced to further increase the data rate on the physical link They use a higher symbol rate 325 ksymb s but have bit rates of 2 x 325 kbit s 4 x 325 kbit s or 5 x 325 kbit s respectively The details are s
240. e bci ot or pee copa ud E Sure RE RR 315 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe GAL Culate lt n gt MSRA ALING DREIWEN SEENEN SEENEN CAL Culatespn2 MSRA CABINSEVALUe iso t teo p ee cha p teen bebe a ou eb Reuben UXOR EEN 264 GALGCulatesn MSRA WINDowsn MAL irit tnnt tr in et rtt th nier i ATETA TE p Fa tia Ras 265 GALCulatesn MSRA WINDowsxn MIMa l retten terrent i aaa 265 GONFigure BURSCETIMe IMMediate ii rc theo tt reet er cre tek chatte C Ex el ER Dee ER 324 GONFigure BURStMACCU racy IMMediate trn eo toner re eise npn ierit torre deines 324 CONFigure BURSt MERRor IMMediate CONFigure BURSt PFERror IMMediate CONFiguresBURSER TEMplate FILT Eissens reee enu qeu exo sae euo reas R TE EEEN SENERE GONFigure BURStPTEMplate SEL6CL 2 trt rre erre rrt tr nennen e dete GONFigure BURSEPTEMbplate TALIgR iret err tnn e eret otn t eee ener erre c ives coed GONFigure BURSEPTENMplate IMMediate rper rt too ep aere te patte p etti ER YI b ttbi 324 GCONFigure MEASUretriert conira rette a e ai SEENEN CEA CONFigure SPECtrum IMPorder CONFigure SPEGtrum LIMit EXCeption S TATe suain tr rennen nbn tern rtt 246 CONFigure SPECtrumt LIMIE LEFT ncc rtt tn tre e t eo een i n erp prenne t en Re Ye 234 CONFigure SPECtrum LIMIt RIGPFIL tarn rrt treten oa e a rh e ea e Ee eoi ea DR TENEN ea 234 GONFigure SPEGtrum MObDulation EIM IT en aeree rir tuto resa tih e HR E e
241. e ees 252 Maximizing reiiote e cte cr 248 Querying remote errore teneret 251 Replacing remote 252 Splitting remote i con rte e tette 248 Types remote edicere ree etes 249 X X value EI EE 161 Y Y axis el RE 164 Y Scalitig ird e Ete 163 pics 345 YIG preselector Activating Deactivating Activating Deactivating remote Z Zooming Activating remote EE 267 Area Multiple mode remote sss 267 Area remota 2 tae detta ote ld 266 Deactivating a 165 Multipl mode ner rens 165 Multiple mode remote 267 268 acm M M 266 Restoring original display 165 Single mode pn e t E enean 165 Single mode remiole cete 266
242. e frequency range between 500 MHz and 7 GHz The resulting trigger level at the RF input depends on the RF attenuation and preampli fication For details on available trigger levels see the instrument s data sheet Note If the input signal contains frequencies outside of this range e g for fullspan measurements the measurement may be aborted and a message indicating the allowed input frequencies is displayed in the status bar A Trigger Offset Trigger Polarity and Trigger Holdoff to improve the trigger stabil ity can be defined for the RF trigger but no Hysteresis Remote command TRIG SOUR RFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 216 Trigger Level Trigger Settings Defines the trigger level for the specified trigger source For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower on page 215 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower on page 215 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port on page 214 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower on page 215 Drop Out Time Trigger Settings Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again Remote command TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe on page 213 Trigger Offset Trigger Settings Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the measurement Note When using an external trigger the trigger offset is particularly important in order to detect the
243. e is started immediately Remote command SYSTem SEQuencer on page 189 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate on page 224 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt on page 224 Sequencer Mode Defines how often which measurements are performed The currently selected mode softkey is highlighted blue During an active Sequencer process the selected mode softkey is highlighted orange Single Sequence Each measurement is performed once until all measurements in all active channels have been performed Continuous Sequence The measurements in each active channel are performed one after the other repeatedly in the same order until sequential operation is stopped This is the default Sequencer mode Remote command INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer MODE on page 225 6 2 6 3 Display Configuration Display Configuration The captured signal can be displayed using various evaluation methods All evaluation methods available for the selected measurement are displayed in the evaluation bar in SmartGrid mode when you do one of the following Select the EJ SmartGrid icon from the toolbar e Select the Display Config button in the Overview e Press the MEAS key Select the Display Config softkey in any GSM menu Up to 16 evaluation methods can be displayed simultaneously in separate windows The GSM evaluation methods are described in chapter 4 1 GSM I Q Modulation Accuracy etc Measurement Results on page
244. e number of channels that can be configured at the same time depends on the avail able memory on the instrument Only one measurement can be performed on the R amp S FPS at any time If one mea surement is running and you start another or switch to another channel the first mea surement is stopped In order to perform the different measurements you configured in multiple channels you must switch from one tab to another However you can enable a Sequencer function that automatically calls up each activa ted measurement channel in turn This means the measurements configured in the channels are performed one after the other in the order of the tabs The currently active measurement is indicated by a 8 symbol in the tab label The result displays of the individual channels are updated in the corresponding tab as well as the Multi View as the measurements are performed Sequencer operation is independent of the currently displayed tab for example you can analyze the SEM measurement while the modulation accuracy measurement is being performed by the Sequencer For details on the Sequencer function see the R amp S FPS User Manual The Sequencer functions are only available in the MultiView tab Sequencer Slate eese Ee shuns tiat ese rain roe RR sevens EY RR A RE RR ari 86 Se ueneer let EE 86 Sequencer State Activates or deactivates the Sequencer If activated sequential operation according to the selected Sequencer mod
245. e size of several windows on the screen permanently use the LAY SPL command see LAYout SPLitter on page 252 Parameters Size LARGe Maximizes the selected window to full screen Other windows are still active in the background SMALI Reduces the size of the selected window to its original size If more than one measurement window was displayed originally these are visible again RST SMALI Example DISP WIND2 LARG 11 7 1 2 Working with Windows in the Display The following commands are required to change the evaluation type and rearrange the screen layout for a measurement channel as you do using the SmartGrid in manual operation Since the available evaluation types depend on the selected application some parameters for the following commands also depend on the selected measure ment channel LAYout ADD WINDOW reote treni t sod r it eoo reves e ce CER a uc cU aa code daa 249 LAY eut CATalog WINDONWIP 2e Rieger g etre cree rore edo sedan ss sung epe ane gra Fb ex EE nean uxs 251 LAYoutIDENUV WINDOW 2 ciirerreie eterni RENE ENEE ENNER REENEN se chan AER 251 LAYoutsREMove WINDOW 2 1 oido EERSTEN he 252 Bd EE le EE 252 Be 252 LEAY GUE WINDOWS ele KEE 254 LAYO WINDOW SAA IDENY Z 2 22 22 22 siesta 1I nanna a K EN 254 Analyzing GSM Measurements LAYGUEWINBOWSm REMO redeas uei cano aee una ecu i onn edi eden aes 254 LAY out WINDowsn REPLaQS creta Foch pra pe S o EEGENEN EEGENEN EEN 255 BN eler trit
246. e use of many commands and can usually be executed directly for test purposes List of remote commands Alpahabetical list of all remote commands described in the manual Index 1 2 Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FPS consists of the following parts e Printed Getting Started manual e Online Help system on the instrument e Documentation CD ROM with Documentation Overview Getting Started User Manuals for base unit and firmware applications Service Manual Release Notes Data sheet and product brochures Online Help The Online Help is embedded in the instrument s firmware It offers quick context sen sitive access to the complete information needed for operation and programming Online help is available using the icon on the toolbar of the R amp S FPS Getting Started This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the CD ROM It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instrument Basic operations and handling are described Safety information is also included The Getting Started manual in various languages is also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FPS product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FPS html User Manuals User manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional firmware application The user manuals are available in PDF format in pri
247. eak List towards the top 70 of the screen The following commands have the exact same effect as any combination of windows above and below the splitter moves the splitter vertically AY SPL 3 2 70 AY SPL 4 1 70 AY SPL 2 1 70 User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 253 Analyzing GSM Measurements LAYout WINDow lt n gt ADD lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt This command adds a measurement window to the display Note that with this com mand the suffix n determines the existing window next to which the new window is added as opposed to LAYout ADD WINDow for which the existing window is defined by a parameter To replace an existing window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace command This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result Parameters Direction LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to add See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 249 for a list of availa ble window types Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY WIND1 ADD LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify This command queries the name of a particular display window indicated by the lt n gt suf
248. easurement Configuration Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 219 Data Acquisition You must define how much and how often data is captured from the input signal The settings in this dialog box are available when you do one of the following e Select the Data Acquisition button from the Overview Press the BW SPAN SWEEP or MEAS CONFIG key then the Data Acquisition softkey Data Acquisition The Data Acquisition settings define how long data is captured from the input signal by the R amp S FPS GSM application Data Acquisition e Im Data Acquisition Sweep Cap Settings Sample Rate Analysis Bandwidth Swap I Q Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration ae E 115 Analysis BAG WY MUD E 115 Capture TIMO m 115 Capture ql D 116 e e EE 116 Sample rate The sample rate for UO data acquisition is indicated for reference only It is a fixed value depending on the frequency range to be measured see also chapter 6 3 8 2 Spectrum
249. easurements relative to the GSM frame boundary The following rule applies 0 lt Slot to Measure s 7 The Slot to Measure is used as the only slot to measure in the following measure ments see First Slot to measure on page 120 Modulation Accuracy EVM Phase Error Magnitude Error Modulation Spectrum Constellation Qe User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 119 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Furthermore the Slot to Measure is used to measure the reference power for the fol lowing measurements e Power vs Time Modulation Spectrum e Transient Spectrum Finally the Slot to Measure is used to measure the position of its TSC which repre sents the timing reference for the Power vs Time mask limit lines of all slots See also chapter 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement on page 53 For details on the measurement types see chapter 4 1 GSM UO Modulation Accuracy etc Measurement Results on page 16 Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots MEASure on page 227 Number of Slots to measure This parameter specifies the Number of Slots to measure for the measurement inter val of multi slot measurements i e the Power vs Time and Transient Spectrum mea surements Between 1 and 8 consecutive slots can be measured See also chapter 5 6 Defining the S
250. eater than 8 GHz There fore switching the YIG preselector on or off has no effect if the frequency is below that value Note For the following measurements the YIG Preselector is off by default if available e UO Analyzer and thus in all applications in MSRA operating mode e GSM e VSA Remote command INPut FILTer YIG STATe on page 206 Frequency Settings Frequency settings can be configured via the Frequency dialog box which is dis played when you do one of the following e Select the FREQ key and then the Frequency Config softkey Select the Frequency tab in the Input Frontend Settings dialog box Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Input Source Frequency Amplitude Output erer 13 25 GHz ARFCN ay TEM 0 0 Hz Frequency Band E 102 Ege 103 ARP ONE e 103 Center Frequency Gtepelze A 103 aire Acc Mm 103 Frequency Band The frequency band defines the frequency range used to transmit the signal For details see Frequency bands and channels on page 46 The following frequency bands are supported T GSM 380 T GSM 410 GSM 450 GSM 480 GSM 710 GSM 750 T GSM 810 GSM 850 P GSM 900 E GSM 900 R GSM 900 T GSM 900 DCS 1800 PCS 1900 The default frequency band is E GSM 900 Remote command CONFigure MS NETWork TYPE on page 192 CONFigure MS NETWork FREQuency BAND on page 192 Modulation Accura
251. eatures e Measurements on downlink or uplink signals according to the Third Generation Partnership Project 3GPP standards for GSM EDGE EDGE Evolution EGPRS2 and Voice services over Adaptive Multi user Channels on One Slot VAMOS e Measurement in time frequency or UO domains e Measurements of mobile devices MS single carrier and multicarrier base trans ceiver stations BTS Measurement of signals ith GMSK AQPSK QPSK 8PSK 16QAM and 32QAM modulation normal or higher symbol rate Measurement of signals using different Tx filters e g narrow and wide pulse Measurements for Power vs Time Modulation Accuracy and Modulation and Tran sient Spectrum as required in the standard Measurements of wideband noise and intermodulation products in multicarrier operation as defined in 3GPP TS 51 021 chapter 6 12 This user manual contains a description of the functionality that the application pro vides including remote control operation All functions not discussed in this manual are the same as in the base unit and are described in the R amp S FPS User Manual The latest version is available for download at the product homepage http www2 rohde schwarz com product FPS html Installation You can find detailed installation instructions in the R amp S FPS Getting Started manual or in the Release Notes 2 1 Starting the GSM Application GSM measurements are performed in a separate application on the R amp S FPS
252. ecause the window is reduced in height the range per division is increased in order to display the same result range in the smaller window In this case the per division value does not correspond to the actual display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision on page 210 Ref Position Relative Scaling Reference per Division Defines the position of the reference value in percent of the total y axis range Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 263 Ref Value Relative Scaling Reference per Division Defines the reference value to be displayed at the specified reference position Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue on page 263 7 2 Zoom Functions The zoom functions are only available from the toolbar Zoom Functions Soe IN MM c 165 Iso DEE 165 Restore Original Display ov 16 0c00 dee Oe tenet cett eaten eeepc aod 165 k Deaclivaling Zoom Selection EE 165 Single Zoom ER A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace This function can be used repetitively until the required details are visible Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn Z00M STATe on page 267 DISPlay WINDowcn Z00M AREA on page 266 Multiple Zoom In multiple zoom mode you can enlarge several different areas of the trace simultane ously An overvie
253. eceeeeeeaeeceeeeeeceeeeneneeeeaneaeas 281 READ BURSIt MACCuracy ADRoop MAXimum essere 281 READ BURSIt MACCuracy ADRoop SDEViation sisse 281 FETCH BURG MAC CuracvlBbOWer AVERage nennen enne 281 FETCh B RSI MACCuracy BPOWer CURREN P aurreren niiina rainane 281 FETCH BURG MAC Curacvl BbOWer MA vimum cece ee cee eee aeaeaeaeaeeeeeeeeeeteseeeeeeeeeees 281 FETCH BURG MAC Curacvl BbOWer GDEViaton eene 281 READ BURG MAC CuracvlBbOVWer AVERage eene eene enne 281 READ BURG MAC CuracvlBbOVWer CUpRbent nene 281 READ BURG MAC CuracvlBbOVWer MAxlmum enne nnne 281 READ BURG MAC CuracvlBbOVWer GDEVMlatton eene 281 FETChBURGOCMACCuracevlEVMIDEAK AVEHRage niidi 282 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM PEAK CURRent essen 282 FETChBURGOCMACCuracvltEVMIPDEAK MANImum nennen 282 FETCHBURSMACCuracltEVMEPEAK SDEVlaton tn 282 READ BURG MAC CuracvlEVMIPDEAK AVERage eene 282 READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK CURREM1 esescssssessssescssseestesseesvesseevsesasavsees 282 READ BURSI MACCuracy EVM PEAK MAXimum esses nene 282 READ BURG MAC CuracvllEVMIDEAkK GDEViaton ennenen e eererrerererersrnrnrnne nn 282 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS AVERage cesses nennen 282 FETChBURGOCMACCuracvltEVMIRMS CURbRent AAA 282 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS MAXimum eese nnne 282 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS SDEViation essere 282 READ BURSIt
254. ectrum Table displays the measured power levels and their offset to the limits defined by the standard as numeric results Note The GSM standards define both absolute and relative limits for the spectrum The limit check is considered to fail if both limits are exceeded User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 23 R amp S FPS K10 Measurements and Result Displays Values that exceed both limits are indicated by red characters and an asterisk next to the value and a negative A to Limit value 2 Modulation Spectrum Table Offset Power Negative Offsets Power Positive Offsets dB to Limit dB dBm to Limit Note The graphical results of the modulation spectrum evaluation are displayed in the Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 22 The following values are displayed Table 4 4 Modulation spectrum results Result Description Offset Fixed frequency offsets from the center frequency at which power is measured kHz Power Nega Power at the frequency offset to the left of the center frequency tive Offsets Levels are provided as dB relative power level dBm absolute power level A to Limit power difference to limit defined in standard negative values indicate the power exceeds at least one of the limits Power Posi Power at the frequency offset to the right of the center frequency tive Offsets Levels are provided as dB relative power level dBm absolute power level A to Limit power difference to
255. ed see also chapter 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement on page 53 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots MEAGSure eese nnne 227 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOF Slots ccceeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeea 228 CONFigurep MS CHANnelMSLots OPPSel 2 tite taa ott tn ere teet etn 228 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots MEASure SlotToMeasure This command specifies the slot to be measured in single slot measurements relative to the GSM frame boundary Parameters for setting and query lt SlotToMeasure gt Slot to measure in single slot measurements RST 0 Slots Example CONF CHAN MSL MEAS 5 Manual operation See Slot to Measure on page 119 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 332 or chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 336 11 5 6 2 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots lt NofSlotsToMeas gt This command specifies the number of slots to measure for the measurement interval of multi slot measurements i e the Power vs Time and Transient Spectrum mea surements Between 1 and 8 consecutive slots can be measured Parameters for setting and query lt NofSlotsToMeas gt Number of slots to measure Range 1to8 RST 8 Slots Example CONF CHAN MSL NOFS 5 Manual operation See Number of Slots to measure on page 120
256. ed across various frequency channels FDMA In the standard the abbreviation SFH slow frequency hopping is used to designate the latter mode of communication Uplink and downlink Base stations and mobiles communicate in different frequency ranges the mobile sends in the uplink UL and the base station in the downlink DL The frequencies specified in the standard plus their channel numbers ARFCN are shown in the figure and table below Short introduction to GSM GMSK EDGE and EDGE Evolution 300 T GSM 380 T GSM 410 GSM 450 GSM 480 GSM 710 GSM 750 T GSM 810 GSM 850 Frequency Band P GSM 900 E GSM 900 R GSM 900 T GSM 900 DCS 1800 PCS 1900 Fig 5 1 The frequencies specified in the GSM standard 400 500 H H H H H 600 700 800 900 Frequency MHz 1000 1100 E 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 Table 5 2 Frequencies and channel numbers ARFCN in the GSM standard 1700 1800 1900 2000 Uplink Downlink Band Class UL Fre DL Fre Fre Band UL ARFCN MHz quen MHz quen quen DL cy cy cy Shift Mid dle Low Up Low Up UL DL Range 1 Range 2 T GSM 380 380 2 389 8 390 2 399 8 385 0 395 0 10 0 48 MHz T GSM 410 410 2 419 8 420 2 429 8 415 0
257. ed for further analysis in external applications The import and export functions are available in the Save Recall menu which is dis played when you select the LI Save or EN Open icon in the toolbar For details on importing and exporting UO data see the R amp S FPS UO Analyzer User Manual e Default Settings for GSM Modulation Accuracy Measurements 88 e Gonfiguration EE 90 EE EH e DEE EN e Inputand Frontend Settfgs ud eet Genie eddie 100 e Thgger SOUS Sails ao Cerere n aenea idee taxa E a de ERR E oars 108 RE TE e DEE 114 LEE urs 118 e Measurement Sell on cen cnt a dition dde ce Rt x adr eee os 123 e Adjusting Settings Automatically eese 129 6 3 1 Default Settings for GSM Modulation Accuracy Measurements When you switch a measurement channel to the GSM application the first time a set of parameters is passed on from the currently active application center frequency and frequency offset reference level and reference level offset attenuation e preamplification Signal source input coupling After initial setup the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re entering the channel Thus you can switch between applications quickly and easily Apart from these settings the following default settings are activated directly after a measurement channel has been set to the GSM application or after a P
258. eet diece tite EE ee 145 Blo ie te 145 KEE NEED 145 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements VE LE Raa A TENERO MOERS E ERT 146 GR TEE 146 L Send eenegen 146 IF VIDEO Output This function is not available for the R amp S FPS GSM application IF Out Frequency This function is not available for the R amp S FPS GSM application Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on the R amp S FPS on or off if available External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R amp S FPS itself for example when measuring the noise level of a DUT Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce on page 207 Trigger 2 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER AUX connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FPS User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FPS No further trigger parameters are available for the con nector Output The R amp S FPS sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 218 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection on page 217 Output Type Trigger 2 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a
259. efer ence values according to table 5 8 would be RBW Reference power 300 kHz 35 dBm 1 7 dB 33 3 dBm 100 kHz 35 dBm 3 8 dB 31 2 dBm 30 kHz 35 dBm 7 7 dB 27 3 dBm 5 15 4 Limit Check for MCWN Results For MCWN measurements various limit lines are calculated e Wideband noise limits e Limits for intermodulation products that have to be measured with an RBW of 100 kHz Multicarrier and Wideband Noise e Limits for intermodulation products that have to be measured with an RBW of 300 kHz e Limits for narrowband measurements that have to be measured with an RBW of 30 kHz The limit is defined at 3 distinct measurement offsets each then connected by straight lines For each of these limit lines a limit check is performed and the results can be queried They are also indicated in the Spectrum Graph display see Spectrum Graph on page 35 Exceptions For measurements using an RBW of 100 kHz wideband noise certain intermodulation products the standard allows for the signal to exceed the specified limits in excep tional cases Thus you can define whether the limit check for MCWN measurements considers these exceptions or not If exceptions are considered the R amp S FPS GSM application divides the measurement range into 200 kHz bands If the limit line in one of these bands is exceeded a new higher limit line with an exceptional level is applied to the band Only if this excep tional limit li
260. eger value The range is specified in the data sheet If the defined reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenuation the refer ence level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed 6 3 4 4 a Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration NOTICE Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels When decreasing the attenuation manually ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level allowed at the RF input as an overload may lead to hardware damage Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 211 INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 212 Using Electronic Attenuation If the optional Electronic Attenuation hardware is installed on the R amp S FPS you can also activate an electronic attenuator In Auto mode the settings are defined automatically in Manual mode you can define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately Note Electronic attenuation is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 7 GHz In Auto mode RF attenuation is provided by the electronic attenuator as much as possible to reduce the amount of mechanical switching required Mechanical attenua tion may provide a better signal to noise ratio however When you switch off electronic attenuation the RF attenuation is automatically set to the same mode auto manual as the electronic attenuation was set to Thus the RF attenuation may be set to automatic mode and the f
261. el to be measured has a reduced power e g 30 dB compared to its adjacent channels Remote command CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate FILTer on page 232 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Limit Line Time Alignment Controls how the limit lines are aligned in a Power vs Time measurement graph see PvT Full Burst on page 27 Limit lines are defined for each slot The limit lines are time aligned in each slot based on the position of the TSC the center of the TSC is the reference point This parameter affects how the center of the TSC is determined for each slot Slot to measure default For each slot the center of the TSC is derived from the measured center of the TSC of the Slot to Measure and the timeslot lengths speci fied in the standard see Timeslot length in 3GPP TS 45 010 and Equal Timeslot Length on page 93 Per Slot For each slot the center of the TSC is measured This provides reasona ble time alignment if the slot lengths are not according to standard Note that in this case the Power vs Time limit check may show pass even if the timeslot lengths are not correct according to the standard Note The Limit Time Alignment also decides whether the Delta to sync values of the Power vs Time list result are measured for Limit Time Alignment Per Slot or if they are constant as defined by the 3PP standard for Limit Time Alignment Slot to measure The R amp S FPS GSM application offers a
262. els ADEM Analog Demod IQ IOQ Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer2 Usage Query only Activating GSM Measurements Table 11 1 Available measurement channel types and default channel names in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode Application lt ChannelType gt Default Channel Name Parameter Spectrum SANALYZER Spectrum UO Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer Analog Demodulation R amp S FPS K7 ADEM Analog Demod GSM R amp S FPS K10 GSM GSM Noise R amp S FPS K30 NOISE Noise Phase Noise R amp S FPS K40 PNOISE Phase Noise VSA R amp S FPS K70 DDEM VSA 3GPP FDD BTS R amp S FPS K72 BWCD 3G FDD BTS 3GPP FDD UE R amp S FPS K73 MWCD 3G FDD UE TD SCDMA BTS R amp S FPS K76 BTDS TD SCDMA BTS TD SCDMA UE R amp S FPS K77 MTDS TD SCDMA UE cdma2000 BTS R amp S FPS K82 BC2K CDMA2000 BTS cdma2000 MS R amp S FPS K83 MC2K CDMA2000 MS 1xEV DO BTS R amp S FPS K84 BDO 1xEV DO BTS 1xEV DO MS R amp S FPS K85 MDO 1xEV DO MS WLAN R amp S FPS K91 WLAN WLAN LTE R amp S FPS K10x LTE LTE Note the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel INSTrument REName lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command renames a measurement channel Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the channel you want to rename
263. ement This setting is recommended for measurements according to the standard Carriers 1 8 MHz The span is set to the span of all active GSM carriers plus a margin of 1 8 MHz to either side This setting is suitable for narrowband noise measurements Carriers 6 MHz The span is set to the span of all active GSM carriers plus a margin of 6 MHz to either side This setting is suitable for all narrowband noise and most of the wide band noise and intermodulation measurements Remote command SENSe FREQuency SPAN MODE on page 241 Frequency Offset Shifts the displayed frequency range along the x axis by the defined offset This parameter has no effect on the instrument s hardware or on the captured data or on data processing It is simply a manipulation of the final results in which absolute fre quency values are displayed Thus the x axis of a spectrum display is shifted by a constant offset if it shows absolute frequencies but not if it shows frequencies relative to the signal s center frequency A frequency offset can be used to correct the display of a signal that is slightly distorted by the measurement setup for example The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is O Hz Note In MSRA mode this function is only available for the MSRA Master Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 210 Amplitude Settings Amplitude settings affect the y axis values To configure
264. ement is not defined one channel is assumed DataFilename Contains the filename of the UO data binary file that is part of the iq tar file It is recommended that the filename uses the following convention lt xyz gt lt Format gt lt Channels gt ch lt Type gt e xyz a valid Windows file name e Format complex polar or real see Format element e Channels Number of channels see NumberOfChannels element e Type float32 float64 int8 int16 int32 or int64 see DataType element Examples xyz complex 1ch float32 e xyz polar 1ch float64 e xyz eal 1ch int16 xyz complex 16ch int8 UO Data File Format iq tar Element UserData Description Optional contains user application or device specific XML data which is not part of the iq tar specification This element can be used to store additional information e g the hardware configuration User data must be valid XML content PreviewData Optional contains further XML elements that provide a preview of the UO data The preview data is determined by the routine that saves an iq tar file e g R amp S FPS For the definition of this element refer to the RsIqTar xsd schema Note that the preview can be only displayed by current web browsers that have JavaScript enabled and if the XSLT stylesheet open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt is available Example ScalingFactor Data stored as in t16 and a
265. en you select the Save or Open icon in the tool bar For a description of the other functions in the Save Recall menu see the R amp S FPS User Manual joo er ELLE 167 GI ent 167 EEX DOME EE 167 eic E 167 How to Export and Import UO Data Import Provides functions to import data UO Import Import Opens a file selection dialog box to select an import file that contains IQ data This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications Note that the I Q data must have a specific format as described in the R amp S FPS UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual UO import is not available in MSRA mode Remote command MMEMory LOAD I1Q STATe on page 316 Export Opens a submenu to configure data export UO Export Export Opens a file selection dialog box to select an export file to which the IQ data will be stored This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For detail
266. encer not indi vidual sweeps RUN CONT starts the Sequencer in continuous mode Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 223 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Single Sweep RUN SINGLE While the measurement is running the Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the high lighted softkey or key again Remote command INITiate lt n gt IMMediate on page 224 Continue Single Sweep While the measurement is running the Continue Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 223 Refresh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated and only for MSRA applications The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged This is useful for example after evaluation changes have been made or if a new sweep was performed from another application in this case only that application is updated automatically after data acquisition Note To update all active applications at once use the Refresh all function in the Sequencer menu Remote command INITiate lt n gt REFResh on page 265 6 3 7 Demodulation Demodulation settings determine how frames and slots are de
267. ennen rnit ennnns 300 FETCh BURSEPTEMplate HUE ees rere th nnd eee hee 300 FETCh BURStPTEMplate TRGS MAXIRWIIYI 11 22 eL Ie opo uz coco ERR alcol Depp rose ey ia 300 FETCH BURSEPTEMPplate TRGS MINIMUM 2 22222 xao tre ER rexit re ere Een 300 FETCHBURStPTEMplate TRGG GDEViaton eene emen 300 READ BURSEPTEMplate TRES AVERAGE ccinn tudo orto eter ette vete 300 READ BURSEPTEMplate TROS CURRUGRIE 1 12 tet hpn ENEE NEEN SE SE 300 READBURGGCbPTEMpolate TRGG MANimum senes 300 READ BURSEPTEMplate TIRES MINIMUM zi Eege tdeo REESEN dd robe 301 READ BURSEPTEMplate TRGS SDEViation 2 2 m cr anersvermeatendavatatevevevenerevadaneds 301 FETCh BURSt PTEMplate TRGS AVERage FETCh BURSt PTEMplate TRGS CURRent FETCh BURSt PTEMplate TRGS MAXimum FETCh BURSt PTEMplate TRGS MINimum FETCh BURSt PTEMplate TRGS SDEViation READ BURSt PTEMplate TRGS AVERage READ BURSt PTEMplate TRGS CURRent READ BURSt PTEMplate TRGS MAXimum 11 8 9 Retrieving Results READ BURSt PTEMplate TRGS MINimum READ BURSt PTEMplate TRGS SDEViation This command starts a Trigger to Sync measurement and reads out the time between the external trigger event and the start of the first symbol of the TSC This command is only available if an external trigger is selected and the Trigger to Sync measurement is active see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 216 and Trigger to Sync Graph on page 31 Return va
268. ents of the IOIMbalance Resulttype ance signal 76 Fre Frequency error of the center frequency currently mea READ BURSt MACCuracy quency sured in the Slot to Measure FERRor lt Resulttype gt Error Hz Burst Average power measured in the slot READ BURSt MACCuracy Power BPOWer lt Resulttype gt dBm Ampli Indicates how much the amplitude decreases over a READ BURSt MACCuracy tude measured slot ADRoop lt Resulttype gt Droop dB GSM UO Modulation Accuracy etc Measurement Results The R amp S FPS GSM application also performs statistical evaluation over a specified number of results see Statistic Count on page 117 To do so the same slot is eval uated in multiple frames namely in the number specified by the Statistic Count The default value is 200 in accordance with the GSM standard For each parameter the following results are displayed Table 4 2 Calculated summary results Result Description SCPI query for result value type Current Value for currently measured frame only READ BURSt MACCuracy lt Parameter gt CURRent Average Linear average value of Current results from the speci READ BURSt MACCuracy fied number of frames lt Parameter gt AVERage Exception The average of the Origin Offset Suppres sion is the linear average of the power ratio converted to dBm subsequently Peak Maximum value of Current results from specified
269. ents of the reference power of the Transient Spectrum measurement see Transient Spectrum Table on page 30 Prior to this command make sure you set the correct Trigger Mode IF power or External and Trigger Offset see chapter 11 5 4 Triggering Measurements on page 213 Retrieving Results Return values lt TriggerOffset gt Calculated trigger offset based on the user defined Trigger Off set and Frame Configuration such that the useful part of the Slot to measure is measured lt GateLength gt Calculated gate length based on the user defined Trigger Off set and Frame Configuration such that the useful part of the Slot to measure is measured Example READ SPEC SWIT REF GAT Result 0 00000185076 0 00054277002 Usage Query only 11 8 8 Trigger to Sync Results The following commands are required to query the numeric results of a Trigger to Sync measurement For details on the individual results see Trigger to Sync Table on page 33 READ vs FETCh commands ED Note that two commands are provided for each result type which are almost identical The READ command starts the measurement and reads out the result When the mea surement is started the R amp S FPS GSM application is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command FETCh BURSt PTEMplate TRGG AVERage n
270. er gt numeric value Absolute frequency of intermodulation Default unit Hz numeric value Frequency offsets from the closest carrier at which intermodu lation power is measured Default unit Hz 3 5 35 Order of the intermodulation 3 IM order 3 5 IM order 5 35 IM orders 3 and 5 numeric value Resolution bandwidth used for measurement Default unit Hz numeric value Absolute or relative power level to reference power measured at IM frequency Default unit dBm dB Retrieving Results lt Limit gt numeric value absolute or relative power level limit to reference power Default unit dBm dB lt AbsRelMode gt ABS REL Determines whether absolute or relative power values are returned lt LimCheck gt Result of the limit check at this offset frequency PASSED power within limits FAILED power exceeds limit Example FETC WSP IMPR OUT Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 341 Usage Query only Manual operation See Outer IM Table on page 38 FETCh WSPectrum NARRow INNer ALL This command queries the results of the measured distortion products for the frequen cies in the gap between the GSM carrier subblocks for non contiguous carrier alloca tion The frequency offsets are defined as offsets from the closest carrier i e the uppermost carrier of the lower sub block and the lowermost carrier of the upper sub block
271. er to measure ssassn Parameters dependency sssisniriiriis iriiri 59 POWOE isinai ode odes awe ai yia etes shart Des 53 SCOPE Conf UI le WEE 118 Scope default 88 131 SCOPE defining iei ce ea Diete eiae e 53 lee EE 54 Eed DEET 93 120 Slot to measure 53 93 118 119 120 227 Slate isis Lose erat a ree ts 96 Statistical evaluation 21 117 SUCUT L 94 Time alignment 59 65 Useful patt error entren trires 299 Softkey remote control eren eet 245 Softkeys Amplitude Config ttt 104 141 AUTO FROG m te 157 Auto Level 129 157 Capture Ofset TEE 116 Continue Single Sweep essssss 118 152 Continuous SEQUENCER EEN ENEE edu 86 Continuous Sweep 2 Display Gonfig ertt ttr dre on M M External Free Run saasieaen Co Frequency CONTIG E 101 Frequency Config MCWN 138 oe 111 IPF Ge 111 148 IMPOR GE 167 Input Source Config 100 137 Input Frontend 100 137 eg een EE 167 IQ Import zx 167 Marker Config s 199 Marker t Tae ugeet DE reto ed 161 Ml 163 Notim Delta cerner ined dente ade 161 Outputs Config 106 144 Peak oet ace deste eed a S 163 Ref Level 105 142 Ref Level Offset 105 143 AUi MM ei terete eestor EE 118 RF Attem AUTO inii eani ete eed HERE 105 143 RF Atten Manual 105 143 RF Power
272. eriod 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 Time Symbol Periods Fig 5 13 EDGE transmit pulse top and the first transmitted symbol bottom Definition of the Symbol Period The description above also applies to the 16QAM and 32QAM modulations defined for EDGE Evolution using the normal symbol rate 5 9 3 QPSK 16QAM and 32QAM Modulation Higher Symbol Rate For the newer reduced symbol period higher symbol rate the standard document 3GPP TS 45 004 defines two transmit pulse shapes the so called narrow and wide pulses The narrow pulse is the same linearised GMSK pulse as described in chapter 5 9 2 8PSK 16QAM 32QAM AQPSK Modulation Normal Symbol Rate on page 60 while the wide pulse was designed based on a numerically optimized set of discrete filter coefficients Both narrow and wide pulse shapes are illustrated at the top of figure 5 14 where you can see that the center of the pulse occurs at 3T with T being the reduced symbol period For a sequence of symbols the transmitted sig nal is defined in the standard as y t S t iT 2 57 The transmitted signal for a sequence of symbols 5 3 where c t the transmit pulse which may be either the narrow or wide pulse Note that the standard 3GPP TS 45 004 specifies in chapter 5 5 Pulse shaping for higher symbol rate burst QPSK 16QAM and 32QAM The time reference t 0 is the start of the active part of the burst as shown in figure 3 This is also t
273. erview of the currently measured spec trum the tables provide detailed numeric values and an accurate conform ance check of the DUT to the GSM standard How to Analyze the Spectrum of GSM Signals e The modulation spectrum shows the spectrum for a portion of a burst ina single slot see Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 22 the transient spec trum shows the spectrum for all slots in the slot scope including the rising and falling edges of the bursts Arrange the windows on the display to suit your preferences 11 Exit the SmartGrid mode 12 Start a new sweep with the defined settings e To perform a single measurement press the RUN SINGLE key e To start a new continuous measurement press the RUN CONT key 13 Check the result of the limit check in the graph If it indicates FAIL refer to the numeric results in the table display for more precise information on which fre quency exceeds the limit indicated by a negative A to Limit value and red char acters 10 10 1 10 2 Improving Performance Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Mea surement If the results of a GSM measurement do not meet your expectations try the following recommendations to optimize the measurement e improving FerforffislGO isis varies teste prre tne nee neti eee 177 e Imptoving EVM ACOA occon rtc rote Lec E ce e tet tide 177 e Optimizing Limit COCKS EE 178 OMM S ccc Dt 179 Improving Performance If the GSM measurement
274. esis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis which is only available for IF Power trig ger sources Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range 3 dB to 50dB RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 112 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt port gt lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger event Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port 1 trigger port 1 TRIG IN connector on rear panel 2 trigger port 2 TRIG AUX connector on rear panel Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5V to 3 5V RST 1 4V Example TRIG LEV 2V Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 112 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IF Power lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 10 dBm Example TRIG LEV IFP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 112 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower lt TriggerLevel gt
275. ettings Displayed EE 13 Higher symbol rate 45 62 HSCSD scott 49 345 HSR Higher symbol rate AA 45 48 Hysteresis Bep 112 150 l I Q correlationi threshold 2 retten 122 UO data Export file binary data description Export file parameter description EXpoOrtlirig sieri fariniero eren Exporting remote Exporting Importing Importing Importing remote Importing Exporting UO Power BEI 111 Trigger level remote rns 215 IF Power Bra 111 148 Trigger level remote sees 215 Impedance Ee ED 206 SEWING 101 Importing VQ data UO data remote iiec Inner IM Table Res lt display nere ettet tnn 37 Inner Narrow Band Table RESUME display erret e treten 39 Inner Spectrum Table Res ltdisplay ssiri niente 41 Input Configuration iti eode deer 100 137 Configuration remote ssssssseseeese 205 Coupling 100 138 Coupling remote ine tatem 205 Seltihigs inten 100 106 144 Source Configuration softkey 100 137 Source Radio frequency RF 100 137 Input Frontend SOFKOV 22 repente ede cu a etu da 100 137 Input output MOWN remote E 240 instalation sina aias i 10 Intermodulation MCWIN H 37 38 72 Measurement MCWN 156 Results 284 tele else ati Ede alts 38 Intermodulation
276. ex sample 1 01 2 1 Q 0 21 Channel 0 Complex sample 2 11 21 OTI 21 Channel 1 Complex sample 2 21 215 C121 12 Channel 2 Complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel This example demonstrates how to store complex cartesian data in float32 format using MATLAB o Save vector of complex cartesian I Q data i e iqiqiq N 100 iq randn 1 N 1j randn 1 N fid fopen xyz complex float32 w for k 1 length iq fwrite fid single real iq k float32 fwrite fid single imag iq k float32 end fclose fid List of Commands SENSE JADIJUSt FREQUENCY ET 239 SENSe BANDwidth RESolutioti T YPE ics etate tri Ert p tbt acere eR Eee que s cad neue Ice 236 SENSE T lee On WERT 208 SENS FREQuency CENTOS TEP niti tin e ra edo b Dette ERR oed e e rap d 209 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUNTO iaceo aa ea to ct eee ek ists ED De bacc dE ceca xe pod 209 SENSe FREQuency OFFSet EI E eene DEE SENSE FREQUENCY S E SENSE FREQUENCY Re SENSE NO FFT LENGIR iier tette e e vetere C rec Lg ete at 270 SENSE MSRA CAP Mee m 266 SENSEI SWAPi EE 220 SENS SWE P COUNT EE 226 SENSeSWEep CGOUNE CUREB efE itte a E ec d eee EE mud tpa RI esent un 226 SENSe ISWESp GOUNETRGS CURRGFIE iir en rir Get qae raa ir det uta i En eg ER TD 227 SENS SWESp TIME o rede Rn ant De tice igo b Du teta Sut SENSe SWEep
277. ey can be defined manually by the user In the latter case a power level is defined as well as three reference power levels for an RBW of 30 kHz 100 kHz and 300 kHz Multicarrier and Wideband Noise The reference powers depend on the modulation characterists Some typical values for various modulation types are provided in table 5 8 The table indicates the reference powers for the three RBWs relative to a defined power level Since all reference pow ers are measured with a smaller bandwidth than the power level all values are nega tive To define reference powers manually define a power level and then subtract the val ues indicated in Reference powers relative to power level for various modulation types for the used modulation to determine the reference power levels Table 5 8 Reference powers relative to power level for various modulation types Modulation RBW 300 kHz RBW 100 kHz RBW 30 kHz NB GMSK 0 3 dB 2 2 dB 7 8 dB NB 8PSK 1 7 dB 3 8 dB 7 7 dB NB 16QAM 2 8 dB 4 5 dB 8 6 dB NB 32QAM 2 9 dB 5 0 dB 9 3 dB NB AQPSK SCPIR 0dB 2 5dB 4 0 dB 8 5 dB HSR N QPSK 1 9 dB 3 9 dB 8 2 dB HSR N 16QAM 3 0 dB 4 7 dB 8 7 dB HSR N 32QAM 3 5 dB 5 5 dB 10 0 dB HSR W QPSK 1 6 dB 5 0 dB 10 0 dB HSR W 16QAM 3 1 dB 5 5 dB 10 3 dB HSR W 32QAM 3 1 dB 6 1 dB 11 3 dB Example For a normal burst 8PSK signal for example and a power level of 35 dBm the r
278. f the TSC within the signal is not known Thus it is referred to as a wide search 2 Once the synchronization point has been found the application checks whether enough samples remain in the capture buffer in order to analyze another frame If so the process continues with the next step Synchronization Otherwise a new capture is started and the process begins with step 1 again 3 Assuming the signal is periodic the synchronization point in the signal is moved by exactly one GSM frame length From there a narrow search for the next TSC is performed within only a small search area Thus the remaining frames in the capture buffer can be synchronized quickly after the initial wide search Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until all frames have been detected Sync Search 1 Sync Search 2 Syne Found YES 0 ms Capture Fig 5 15 Synchronization using wide and narrow searches Synchronization errors The process described above assumes the GSM frame length in the signal is periodic within a given tolerance frame length error If this is not the case however for example if a frame is too short the application cannot synchronize to further frames after the initial search Frequency hopping can lead to the same problem as successive frames may not be detected on the measured frequency channel Sync Search 1 Sync Search 2 Sync Found NO a g He ee ness Frame Length Error auio ms Capture Fig 5 16
279. ference level offset if available Freq ARFCN Center frequency for the GSM signal Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number if available Device Band Device type and frequency band used by the DUT as defined in the Signal Description settings Slot Scope Minimized visualization of the frame configuration and slots to be mea sured see chapter 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement on page 53 SGL The sweep is set to single sweep mode Count Number of frames already evaluated Total number of frames required for statistical evaluation Statistic Count For Statistic Count gt 1 TRG Trigger source if not Free Run and used trigger bandwidth for IF RF IP power triggers or trigger offset for external triggers In addition the channel bar also displays information on instrument settings that affect the measurement results even though this is not immediately apparent from the display of the measured values e g transducer settings This information is displayed only when applicable for the current application For details see the R amp S FPS Getting Star ted manual Window title bar information For each diagram the header provides the following information 2 Magnitude Capture Fig 2 1 Window title bar information in the Pulse application 1 Window number 2 Window type 3 Trace color 4 Trace number 6 Trace mode Diagram footer information The diagram footer beneath the diagram
280. fix in the active measurement channel Note to query the index of a particular window use the LAYout IDENtifyl WINDow command Return values lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window In the default state the name of the window is its index Usage Query only LAY out WINDow lt n gt REMove This command removes the window specified by the suffix lt n gt from the display in the active measurement channel The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REMove WINDow command Usage Event 11 7 2 11 7 2 1 Analyzing GSM Measurements LAY out WINDow lt n gt REPLace lt WindowType gt This command changes the window type of an existing window specified by the suffix lt n gt in the active measurement channel The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REPLace WINDow com mand To add a new window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt ADD command Parameters lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to replace another one with See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 249 for a list of availa ble window types LAY out WINDow lt n gt TYPe Queries the window type of the window specified by the index lt n gt For a list of possi ble window types see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 249 Example LAY WIND2 TYPE Response MACC Modulation accuracy Usage Query only Result Config Some evaluation methods require or allow for additional set
281. format and data type specified in the XML file see Format element and DataType element To allow reading and writing of streamed UO data all data is interleaved i e complex values are interleaved pairs of and Q values and multi channel signals contain interleaved complex sam ples for channel 0 channel 1 channel 2 etc If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is presumed Example Element order for real data 1 channel I 0 Real sample 0 I 1 Real sample 1 I 2 Real sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel I 0 Q 0 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 0 I 1 Q 1 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 1 I 2 21 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex polar data 1 channel Mag 0 Phi 0 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 0 Mag 1 Phi l Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 1 Mag 2 Phi 2 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 2 Q Data File Format iq tar Example Element order for complex cartesian data 3 channels Complex data I channel no time index Q channel no time index 01 0 Otol 0 Channel 0 Complex sample 0 1 0 Q 1 0 Channel 1 Complex sample 0 2 01 Q 2 0 Channel 2 Complex sample 0 O 1 Q 0 1 Channel 0 Complex sample 1 ITT gir Channel 1 Complex sample 1 2 1 Of27 111 Channel 2 Compl
282. ge In each segment StartX to StopX the red arrow shows the worst delta to limit result The first segment fails assuming no exception is allowed here e The second segment passes e In the third segment the normal limit line dotted line fails at frequency a How ever an exception is allowed and raises the limit for a certain range Thus the R amp S FPS GSM application recalculates the internal delta to limit trace solid orange line The new worst result is determined at position Worst3 This position is then used to determine the noise power and limit line values for the wideband noise table 5 16 Automatic Carrier Detection An automatic carrier detection function is now available Adjusting the Center Fre quency Automatically Auto Freq For multi carrier measurements this function detects the available carriers in the input signal within a frequency range of approxi mately 25 MHz to 2 GHz The Auto Frequency function is sensitive to overload conditions Thus before using this function make sure the reference level is not lower than the input signal s peak power On the other hand avoid reference level settings that are much too high as they make very low carriers approx 50 dB under the reference level disappear in the noise floor and they will not be detected 5 17 GSM in MSRA Operating Mode Optionally use the Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level function to finetune the attenuators a
283. ge 20 See Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 22 See Modulation Spectrum Table on page 23 See Phase Error on page 25 See Power vs Slot on page 26 See PvT Full Burst on page 27 See Transient Spectrum Graph on page 29 See Transient Spectrum Table on page 30 See Trigger to Sync Graph on page 31 See Trigger to Sync Table on page 33 See Spectrum Graph on page 35 See Carrier Power Table on page 36 See Inner IM Table on page 37 See Outer IM Table on page 38 See Inner Narrow Band Table on page 39 See Outer Narrowband Table on page 39 See Inner Wideband Table on page 41 See Outer Wideband Table on page 42 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 332 Table 11 3 lt WindowType gt parameter values for GSM application Parameter value Window type Default UO Modulation Accuracy measurement CONStell Constellation ETIMe EVM vs Time MCAPture Magnitude Capture MERRor Magnitude Error vs Time MTABle Marker Table MACCuracy Modulation Accuracy MSFDomain Modulation Spectrum Graph Frequency domain MSTable Modulation Spectrum Table PERRor Phase Error vs Time PSTable Power vs Slot PTFull PvT Full Burst TGSGraph Trigger vs Sync Graph TGSTable Trigger to Sync Table TSFDomain Transient Spectrum Graph Frequency domain Analyzing GSM Measurements
284. gger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 218 Level Output Type Trigger 2 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 218 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth on page 219 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 219 Trigger Settings Trigger settings determine when the input signal is measured Trigger settings can be configured in the Trigger dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Press the TRIG key and then select the Trigger Config softkey R amp S FPS K10 Configuration e Inthe Overview select the Trigger button Trigger Source Trigger In
285. gt ALL MAXimum This command starts the measurement and reads out the maximum power for the selected slot for all measured frames This command is only available when the Power vs Time measurement is selected see PvT Full Burst on page 27 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command Retrieving Results Suffix lt Slot gt lt 0 7 gt Slot number to measure power on The selected slot s must be within the slot scope i e First slot to measure S s First slot to measure Number of Slots to measure 1 Return values Result numeric value Maximum Default unit dBm Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Set the slot scope Use all 8 slots for the PvT measurement Number of slots to measure 8 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots 8 First Slot to measure 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet 0 Activate PvT Power vs Time measurement LAY ADD 1 LEFT PTF Note READ starts a new single sweep annd then reads the results Use FETCh to query several results READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 ALL MAXimum Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 26 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt CURRent AVERage READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt CURRent AVERage
286. gt Absolute level values in dBm Usage Query only SCPI confirmed 11 8 10 Retrieving Results Manual operation See Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 22 See PvT Full Burst on page 27 See Specirum Graph on page 35 MCWN Results The following commands are required to retrieve results from a multicarrier wideband noise measurement see chapter 4 2 Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurements on page 33 Useful commands for retrieving MCWN results described elsewhere chapter 11 8 9 Limit Check Results on page 301 Remote commands exclusive to retrieving MCWN results CAL Culate nzLlMitcks ENCGeptionCOUNGCURR isses nennen 304 CAL Culate nzLlMitcks ENCGeptonCOUNCMANT liess nennen nnns 305 FETCh SPECIunm MODulalorm EI MIEPAIE ioa ante Rer ee otc EENS SEH 305 FEIChWSPestr m MPROoducts INNer ALL ass aa ccu tt e Ernte nonet 306 FETCh WSPectrum MPRoducts OUTer ALE 2 222i iei roo kd ome taz onte etate envie 307 FETCh WSPectrum NARRow INNer ALL eeessssssssessssesesene eene enne nnn nnne nnne 308 FE TChW bechumNAhRbRow OUTTert ALL 309 FETCh WSPesetr m REFerence POWerALE irte ee ead tai tette inte 310 FETCh WSPectrum WIDEband INNer ALL esee icri eee eitis hhan 311 FETCh WSPectrum WIDEband OUTer ALL eer ritenere nnns 312 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt EXCeption COUNt CURR This command queries the number of bands with e
287. he start of the symbol period of symbol number 0 containing the first tail bit as defined in 3GPP TS 45 002 The transmitted pulse for the first tail symbol is illustrated at the bottom of figure 5 14 where you can see that the decision instant corresponding to the center of the trans mit pulse occurs in the center of the first symbol period i e at t 0 5T Synchronization EDGE Evo Transmit Pulses Narrow Pulse Wide Pulse Amplitude normalized Time Reduced Symbol Periods First Transmitted Symbol Amplitude Narrow Pulse 1 Wide Pulse Amplitude normalized e e Time Reduced Symbol Periods Fig 5 14 EDGE Evolution transmit pulses top and the first transmitted symbols bottom 5 10 Synchronization In order to detect and distinguish the individual slots and frames in the measured sig nal the known signal sequence Sync or TSC must be found in each frame The synchronization process in the R amp S FPS GSM application depends on how or if the measurement is triggered Power trigger or Free run mode Synchronization process If a power trigger or no trigger is used free run mode the synchronization process consists of the following steps 1 Beginning at the start of a capture the application searches for the synchronization pattern or TSC of the Slot to Measure within one GSM frame length This search must be performed over the entire area as the time of occurrance o
288. hen you do one of the following Press the MEAS CONFIG key and then select the Noise Meas softkey e Inthe Overview select the Noise Meas button Reference Meas Noise Meas Multicarrier Wideband Noise Spectrum Average Count Narrowband Noise lt 1 8 MHz E i i Wideband Noise gt 1 8 MHz S Intermodulation Apply Exceptions On Noise Average Coupt e ENENeESNEEEEREEEEEESEENENEEEENENENEEEEENEEEEEEEERENEN KEEN Da Rata aaa 155 Namowband Noise 1 9 E EE 156 Wideband Noise 21 9 MHZ EE 156 Tore e MOM EE 156 Adapting the limit lines for wideband noise Apply Exceptions 156 Noise Average Count Defines the number of noise measurements to be performed in order to determine the average result values Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 226 6 4 9 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Narrowband Noise lt 1 8 MHz If enabled narrowband noise is measured as part of the MCWN measurement Note that narrowband noise measurement is only available for multicarrier device types see Device Type on page 92 for which at least 2 carriers are configured see chap ter 6 3 3 3 Carrier Settings on page 98 Narrowband noise is measured with an RBW of 30 kHz at 3 single offset frequencies below the lowermost active carrier of the lower sub block and above the uppermost active carrier of the upper sub block For details see Narrowband noise measurement on page
289. hermore the table may be empty in the following cases mm SSS gt ae User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 43 R amp S FPS K10 Measurements and Result Displays The span is too small Wideband noise measurement cannot start closer than 1 8 MHz from the outermost carriers and ends 10 MHz outside the edge of the rel evant transmit band This measurement range may be restricted further by the defined measurement span see chapter 6 4 4 2 Frequency Settings on page 138 For a measurement according to standard set the span to the TX band automatically see Setting the Span to Specific Values Automatically on page 140 e Intermodulation measurement overrides wideband noise measurement Around every calculated intermodulation product frequency inside or outside the gap the R amp S FPS GSM application places an intermodulation measurement range of a cer tain bandwidth regardless whether intermodulation measurement is enabled or not Due to their more relaxed limits the IM measurement wins over the wideband noise measurement Thus many overlapping IM ranges can narrow down the wideband noise measurement segment until it is eliminated You can check this by activating only intermodulation IM order 3 and 5 OR only wideband measure ment and determining where a limit line is drawn and where there are none Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH OWID see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 249 Results FETCh WSPectrum WIDEband OUTer ALL on
290. hus a burst may coin cide with a slot but it must not necessarily do so Usually only slots in which a burst is expected are of interest Such slots are defined as active slots in the signal description Within this slot scope defined by First Slot to measure and Number of Slots to mea sure a single slot Slot to Measure is selected for a more detailed analysis e g Modulation Accuracy measurement see Modulation Accuracy on page 20 The Slot to Measure is required for the following reasons To provide the reference power and time reference for the Power vs Time mea surement see PvT Full Burst on page 27 Typically the masks for all slots are time aligned according to the timing of the Slot to Measure see Limit Line Time Alignment on page 125 e All Modulation Spectrum results are based on the Slot to Measure see Modula tion Spectrum Graph on page 22 The results of all Transient Spectrum dia grams are based on the slot scope i e on the interval defined by the First Slot to measure and the Number of Slots to measure see Transient Spectrum Graph on page 29 e Allresults that require demodulation of one slot and statistical analysis e g Modu lation Accuracy Phase Error and EVM are based on the Slot to Measure Defining the Scope of the Measurement The slot scope is defined in the Demodulation Settings see chapter 6 3 7 1 Slot Scope on page 118 and it is indicated by a filled green box
291. ig re MSIE SYNE IQC Threshold ouai return Leve USE Inn Ro qe TEER ER TEEPE waaay 230 CONFigure MS SYNC MODE CONFigureEMSI SYNGO ONDY 2 p iert a E deed DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce DIAGrnostic SERVICS SIINFO2 cte ttp rae tae cte Eg t POE ee dac epe e do Hk E Ce rp 322 DISPlay FORMat otii ee tie rct e i n UR rcd rade aiden vide Er ra Ev Evo dre XR ERE 248 DISP MTA ei 259 DISPlayEWINDOWSTnI 9 IZE cte tct tn ette tta eae tpe ve dt e ro aq 248 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe AUTO sssssessesseeseeeneeenee nent rennen araarida etre trennen 261 BISPlay WINDowsn7 TRACES MODE e conor petu ta Rene SQ reir reae n ve depen ete xe coena DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe us DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MAXimum cessere nennen 261 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel ttt DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet tts 211 DISPlayWINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition sttt tts 263 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue ttt 263 DiSblaufWINDowenstTRAtCests SC AL el BAL ue M Mimum risenti risntrrsstr rreren 263 DISPlay WINDow n
292. ignal is measured Trigger settings can be configured in the Trigger dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following Press the TRIG key and then select the Trigger Config softkey Inthe Overview select the Trigger button Trigger Source Trigger In Out Source Drop Out Time Offset Slope Rising Falling Hysteresis Holdoff Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements The GSM measurements can be performed in Free Run untriggered mode how ever an external trigger or a power trigger can speed up measurements For more information see chapter 5 5 Trigger settings on page 52 External triggers from one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S FPS are configured in a separate tab of the dialog box Trigger Source Trigger In Out Trigger 2 Output Output Type User Defined E Low Pulse Length 100 0 us Send Trigger Jt Trigger 3 Input e Output Note that manually configured gating is not available for GSM measurements Mea surements that require gating such as reference power and narrowband noise mea surement use internal gating mechanisms automatically For step by step instructions on configuring triggered measurements see the R amp S FPS User Manual Tigger SENGS I E 148 E 148 Bi E EE 148 L External WIR NN 148 el POWE oreinen uno a a 148 B ONSE e NT EE 149 DAS o dE o NN EROS 149 L TEE 149 EU C o1 NOR 149 MEE EE 150 EY e A E EE 15
293. igure MS POWer PCARrier AUTO is ON 11 5 1 2 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters lt Power gt maximum output power in dBm RST 0 dBm Example CONF POW PCAR AUTO OFF CONF POW PCAR 4 dBm Usage Query only CONFigure MS POWer PCARrier AUTO lt State gt If enabled the maximum measured power level for the carriers is used as the maxi mum output power per carrier If disabled the maximum power is defined by CONFigure MS POWer PCARrier on page 194 Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example CONF POW PCAR AUTO OFF CONF POW PCAR 4 dBm Usage Query only Frame Frame settings determine the frame configuration used by the device under test R Lee WEE Ne RE e E DEE 195 CONFigure MS CHANnel FRAMe EQUal State If activated all slots of a frame have the same length 8 x 156 26 normal symbol peri ods If deactivated slots number 0 and 4 of a frame have a longer duration all other a shorter duration compared to the equal slot length 157 156 156 156 157 156 156 156 normal symbol periods See 3GPP TS 51 0213GPP TS 51 021 and 3GPP TS 45 0103GPP TS 45 010 chapter 6 7 Timeslot length for further details This parameter is used to adjust the time for the Power vs Time masks of all slots The Slot to measure is used as the time reference for the entire frame Parameters for setting and query State 110 ON OFF RST ON Example CONF CHAN FRAM
294. ilable for applications in MSRA mode not for the MSRA Master It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements Parameters lt Offset gt This parameter defines the time offset between the capture buf fer start and the start of the extracted application data The off set must be a positive value as the application can only analyze data that is contained in the capture buffer Range 0 to lt Record length gt RST 0 Manual operation See Capture Offset on page 116 11 7 4 Zooming into the Display 11 7 4 1 Using the Single Zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA eene ennt en nsns ener tiene rt rere irn nnns 266 DISPlayEWINDowsnspZOONM S TT cuoc REENEN act ene euer eret uae avus a ck DIR AD EDDIE NR 267 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on R amp S FPS K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 1 Frequency Sweep iRm e 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT
295. imeslot Length off or the Equal Timeslot Length Equal Timeslot Length on cri terion see also Equal Timeslot Length on page 93 which are illustrated in fig Bop Siot t Sie 2 Siot3 Slot 4 SoS Skt 8 Bio 7 Middle of Middie of Middle of Middle ot Middle of Middle of Middle of Midde of Midamble Midamble Midamble Midamble Midamble Midamble Midamble Midamble 157 NSP 1884 RSP 156 NSP 156 NSP 187 2 RSP Sit Siot 1 Slot 2 Sio 3 Slot 4 Sot 5 Shot 6 Siot 7 Middle of Middie of Middle of Mode of Middle of Midde of Middle of Midde of Midamble Midamble Midamible Midarnble Midamble Midamble Midamble Midamble e le 156 25 NSP 156 25 NSP 156 25 NSP 15625 NSP 156 25 NSP 156 25 NSP 156 25 NSP 156 25 NSP 187 5 RSP 187 5 RSP 187 5 RSP 187 5 RSP 187 5 RSP 187 5 RSP 187 5 RSP 187 5 RSP Fig 5 19 Not equal top and equal bottom timeslot length criteria Note that since the reference point at the middle of TSC of each slot must coincide the length of the guard interval between successive bursts will depend on both the 5 12 Delta to Sync Values timeslot length and the symbol rate of bursts in successive slots As stated in the standard 3GPP TS 45 010 for the Equal Timeslot Length case if there is a pair of different symbol period bursts on adjacent timeslots then the guard period between the two bursts shall be 8 5 normal symbol periods which equals 10 2 reduced symbol periods For the Not Equal Timeslot
296. in chapter 11 5 5 2 Configuring and Performing Sweeps on page 221 Analyzing GSM Measurements General analysis settings and functions concerning the trace markers windows etc are available for GSM measurement results Configuring Ie Result Display ret et rro he kde eo nee dert nnt 247 e Result Config cerei ce i ced eee sa RC e Rte eS 255 e Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only 264 e Zooming into the Display eicere cene nennen toL a Lees et Rana oes 266 Configuring the Result Display The commands required to configure the screen display in a remote environment are described here e General Window e lu Le EE 247 e Working with Windows in the Display 248 General Window Commands The following commands are required to configure general window layout independent of the application RE FORMAN m 4 248 BISPlayEWINDBoewesns SlZE 2 tii rrr tenter aaraa aai N desee tere eyes vae 248 Analyzing GSM Measurements DISPlay FORMat lt Format gt This command determines which tab is displayed Parameters lt Format gt SPLit Displays the MultiView tab with an overview of all active chan nels SINGIe Displays the measurement channel that was previously focused RST SING Example DISP FORM SPL DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE Size This command maximizes the size of the selected result display window temporarily To change th
297. ion in a table in a separate area beneath the diagram Off Displays the marker information within the diagram area Remote command DISPlay MTAB1e on page 259 Marker Positioning Functions The following functions set the currently selected marker to the result of a peak search These functions are available as softkeys in the Marker To menu which is displayed when you press the MKR gt key Select MIKE EE 162 EE a A 163 Search MIMI EE 163 dax IPSSK era aces Sere etatesepsntotsunpafiiee tanger eae taste E eee ee 163 Select Marker Selects the subsequent marker marker 1 2 3 4 or delta marker to be edited or to be used for a marker function The currently selected marker number is highlighted Remote command Marker selected via suffix lt m gt in remote commands Result Configuration Peak Search Sets the selected marker delta marker to the maximum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK on page 260 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK on page 261 Search Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the minimum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK on page 260 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum PEAK on page 261 Max Peak Sets the active marker delta marker to the largest absolute peak value maximum or minimum of
298. issing keyword is assumed to be the value 1 Optional keywords are emphasized with square brackets Example Without a numeric suffix in the optional keyword SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as FREQuency CENTer With a numeric suffix in the optional keyword DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe DISPlay ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 1 no suffix DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 4 Introduction 11 1 5 Alternative Keywords A vertical stroke indicates alternatives for a specific keyword You can use both key words to the same effect Example SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution In the short form without optional keywords BAND 1MHZ would have the same effect as BWID 1MHZ 11 1 6 SCPI Parameters Many commands feature one or more parameters If a command supports more than one parameter these are separated by a comma Example LAYout ADD WINDow Spectrum LEFT MTABle Parameters may have different forms of values e EE e 183 BOGI DEE 184 Character Dala EE 184 e Character E 185 e Block EE 185 11 1 6 1 Numeric Values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point or exponent In case of physical quantities you can also add the unit If the unit is missing the com mand uses the basic unit Example with unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ without unit SENSe FREQuency CE
299. it does not just maximize a single window temporarily Note that windows must have a certain minimum size If the position you define con flicts with the minimum size of any of the affected windows the command will not work but does not return an error R amp S FPS K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements y 100 x 100 y 100 1 01 GHz 102 12 dim x 0 y 0 x 100 Fig 11 1 SmartGrid coordinates for remote control of the splitters Parameters lt Index1 gt The index of one window the splitter controls Index2 The index of a window on the other side of the splitter Position New vertical or horizontal position of the splitter as a fraction of the screen area without channel and status bar and softkey menu The point of origin x 0 y 0 is in the lower left corner of the screen The end point x 100 y 100 is in the upper right cor ner of the screen See figure 11 1 The direction in which the splitter is moved depends on the screen layout If the windows are positioned horizontally the splitter also moves horizontally If the windows are positioned vertically the splitter also moves vertically Range 0 to 100 Example LAY SPL 1 3 50 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Table to the center 50 of the screen i e in the fig ure above to the left Example LAY SPL 1 4 70 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker P
300. it line segment the following values are returned Return values lt StartFreqAbs gt numeric value Absolute start frequency of limit line segment Default unit Hz Retrieving Results lt StopFreqAbs gt numeric value Absolute stop frequency of limit line segment Default unit Hz lt WorstFreqRel gt numeric value Frequency offsets from the closest carrier to the worst mea sured wideband noise result in this limit line segment Default unit Hz lt WorstFreqAbs gt numeric value Absolute frequency of the worst measured wideband noise result regarding delta to limit in this limit line segment Default unit Hz lt RBW gt numeric value Resolution bandwidth used for measurement in this limit line segment Default unit Hz lt PowerAtWorst gt numeric value Absolute or relative power level to reference power at that worst result in this limit line segment Default unit dBm dB lt LimitAtWorst gt numeric value Absolute or relative power level limit to reference power at that worst result in this limit line segment Default unit dBm dB lt AbsRelMode gt ABS REL Indicates whether absolute or relative power values are returned depending on CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation LIMIT on page 235 lt LimCheck gt Result of the limit check in this limit line segment PASSED power within limits FAILED power exceeds limit Example FETC WSP WID OUT Usage Query only Manual operation See O
301. ith multi channels of equal power MC300 Recommended for measurement scenarios where a total of six channels is active and the channel to be measured has a reduced power e g 30 dB compared to its adjacent channels The PVvT filter is optimized to get smooth edges after filtering burst signals and to suppress adjacent active channels RST MC400 Example CONF MCAR FILT MC400 Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility CONFigure MS MCARrier STATe lt State gt CONFigure MS MCARrier MCBTs lt MultiCarrierBTS gt This command informs the R amp S FPS K10 that the measured signal is a multicarrier signal If active a special multicarrier filter is switched into the demodulation path and further multicarrier specific parameters become available Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only For new remote control programs select a multicarrier device type using CONFigure MS DEVice TYPE on page 191 Parameters for setting and query lt MultiCarrierBTS gt ON OFF ON Sets the device type to Multicarrier BTS Wide Area OFF Sets the device type to BTS Normal RST OFF Example CONF MCAR MCBT ON New program example CONFigure MS DEVice TYPE MCBWide Example CONF MCAR MCBT OFF New program example CONFigure MS DEVice TYPE BTSNormal CONFigure MS MTYPe Value This command sets the modulation type of all slots Note This command is retained for c
302. ivate slot CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO STATe ON Normal burst CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO TYPE NB AQPSK VAMOS CONFigure MS CHANnel modulation SLOTO MTYPe AQPSk Subchannel Power Imbalance Ratio SCPIR 4 dB SLOTO SCPir 4 User TSC SLOTO SUBChannell TSC USER SLOTO SUBChannell TSC CONFigure MS CHANnel Subchannel 1 CONFigure MS CHANnel CONFigure MS CHANnel USER Subchannel 1 CONFigure MS CHANnel Subchannel 1 Set User TSC bits SLOTO SUBChannell TSC USER Query User TSC bits 10111101100110010000100001 Programming Examples CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO0 SUBChannell TSC USER 10111101100110010000100001 Subchannel 2 User TSC CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SUBChannel2 TSC USER CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SUBChannel2 TSC USER Subchannel 2 Set User TSC bits CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SUBChannel2 TSC USER 11010111111101011001110100 Subchannel 2 Query User TSC bits CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SUBChannel2 TSC USER gt 11010111111101011001110100 A Slot configuration Activate slot 1 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 STATe ON Normal Burst CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 TYPE NB AQPSK VAMOS modulation CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 MTYPe AQPSk Subchannel 1 TSC O Set 1 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 SUBChannell1 TSC 0 1 Subchannel 1 Query TSC number and
303. justment of a setting select the corresponding function in the AUTO SET menu or in the configuration dialog box for the setting where available Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level ceeeece 129 Automatic Frame Configuration ooi cicer tette eter a eec ccr ee ed aeos 129 Faites en 130 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized In order to do so a level measurement is performed to determine the optimal reference level This function is not available in MSRA mode Remote command CONFigure MS AUTO LEVel ONCE on page 239 Automatic Frame Configuration When activated a single auto frame configuration measurement is performed Note This function is not available in MSRA mode if the Sequencer is active Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements The auto frame configuration measurement may take a long time therefore it is deacti vated by default The following parameters are detected and automatically measured e Active slots Slot configuration burst type modulation filter TSC Equal time slot length For VAMOS normal burst and GMSK TSCs of set 1 and set 2 For VAMOS normal b
304. le of the Phase Error measurement taken over the selected number of frames When the measurement is started the R amp S FPS GSM application is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem Return values lt Result gt numeric value Phase error Default unit NONE R amp S FPS K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements IEN Example READ BURS PERC PERR Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the peak value of the Phase Error When the measurement is started the R amp S FPS is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the mea surement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the Phase Error results see table 4 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value Phase error Default unit NONE Example READ BURS PERR PEAK SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCur
305. les mentioned in this general introduction may not be supported by this particular application 11 1 1 Conventions used in Descriptions Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions Command usage If not specified otherwise commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters If a command can be used for setting or querying only or if it initiates an event the usage is stated explicitely e Parameter usage If not specified otherwise a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the result of a query Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values e Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R amp S FPS follow the SCPI syntax rules e Asynchronous commands A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next com mand starts executing overlapping command is indicated as an Asynchronous command Reset values RST Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument RST command are indicated as RST values if available Default unit This is the unit used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the parame ter e Manual operation If the result of a re
306. limit defined in standard negative values indicate the power exceeds at least one of the limits Table 4 5 Frequencies and filter bandwidths in modulation spectrum measurements Offset Frequency kHz RBW kHz VBW kHz 100 30 30 200 30 30 250 30 30 400 30 30 600 30 30 User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 24 GSM UO Modulation Accuracy etc Measurement Results Offset Frequency kHz RBW kHz VBW kHz 800 30 30 1000 30 30 1200 30 30 1400 30 30 1600 30 30 1800 30 single carrier BTS 30 single carrier BTS 100 multi carrier BTS 100 multi carrier BTS Note Normal vs Wide Modulation Spectrum measurements In previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers both a normal and a wide modula tion spectrum were available for GSM measurements In the R amp S FPS GSM applica tion only one evaluation is provided The frequency range of the frequency list how ever can be configured to be wider or narrower see Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List on page 127 The RBW and VBW are then adapted accordingly Note RBW at 1800 kHz As opposed to previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers in which the RBW at 1800 kHz was configurable the R amp S FPS configures the RBW and VBW internally according to the selected frequency list see Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List on page 127 For the Modulation Spectrum
307. lot to measure is evaluated in each frame including the rising and falling burst edges not just the useful part in the Slot to Measure Furthermore the number of fixed frequency offsets is lower and the peak power is evaluated rather than the average power as this measurement is used to determine irregularities The Transient Spectrum Graph displays the measured power levels as a trace against the frequencies for the specified slots The measured values can be checked against defined limits the limit lines are indica ted as red lines in the diagram The result of the limit check PASS FAIL is shown at the top of the diagram Note The GSM standards define both absolute and relative limits for the spectrum The limit check is considered to fail if both limits are exceeded 4 Transient Spectrum Graph 1 Max e2 Clrw Note The graphical results only provide an overview of the spectrum For a detailed conformance check of the DUT to the GSM standard use the Transient Spectrum Table evaluation which uses the 5 pole filter required by the 3GPP standard The numeric results of the modulation spectrum evaluation are displayed in the Modu lation Spectrum Table on page 23 The following default settings are used for Transient Spectrum measurements User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 29 R amp S FPS K10 Measurements and Result Displays EH Setting Default Measurement Scope The slot scope defined by Number of Slots
308. lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the new channel name Note that you can not assign an existing channel name to a new channel this will cause an error Example INST REN Spectrum2 Spectrum3 Renames the channel with the name Spectrum2 to Spectrum3 Usage Setting only Activating GSM Measurements INSTrument SELect lt ChannelType gt This command activates a new measurement channel with the defined channel type or selects an existing measurement channel with the specified name See also INSTrument CREate NEW on page 186 For a list of available channel types see table 11 1 Parameters lt ChannelType gt GSM GSM application R amp S FPS K10 SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute This command restores the default instrument settings in the current channel Use INST SEL to select the channel Example INST Spectrum2 Selects the channel for Spectrum2 SYST PRES CHAN EXEC Restores the factory default settings to the Spectrum2 channel Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Channel on page 91 SYSTem SEQuencer State This command turns the Sequencer on and off The Sequencer must be active before any other Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are executed otherwise an error will occur A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FPS User Manual Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 The Sequencer is activated and
309. lue field Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 209 Frequency Offset Shifts the displayed frequency range along the x axis by the defined offset This parameter has no effect on the instrument s hardware or on the captured data or on data processing It is simply a manipulation of the final results in which absolute fre quency values are displayed Thus the x axis of a spectrum display is shifted by a constant offset if it shows absolute frequencies but not if it shows frequencies relative to the signal s center frequency A frequency offset can be used to correct the display of a signal that is slightly distorted by the measurement setup for example The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is O Hz 6 3 4 3 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Note In MSRA mode this function is only available for the MSRA Master Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 210 Amplitude Settings Amplitude settings affect the y axis values To configure the amplitude settings Amplitude settings can be configured via the AMPT key or in the Amplitude dialog box gt To display the Amplitude dialog box do one of the following e Select Input Frontend from the Overview and then select the Amplitude tab e Select the AMPT key and then the Amplitude Config softkey Input Source Frequency Amplitude Output Power Class Preamplifier Off pM EE
310. lues Result numeric value Trigger to Sync time Default unit S Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM JI Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Set external trigger mode TRIGgerl SEQuence SOURce EXTernal Set minimum capture time to speed up measurement SENSe1 SWEep TIME MINimum Auto set trigger offset II Note Correct frame slot configuration assumed CONFigure MS AUTO TRIGger ONCE JI Activate Trigger to Sync measurement LAY ADD 1 LEFT TGSG LAY ADD 1 BEL TGST Query standard deviation of trigger to sync time II Note READ starts a new single sweep and then reads the results Use FETCh to query several results READ BURS PTEM TRGS SDEV Usage Query only Limit Check Results The following commands are required to query the results of a limit check Currently limit check results can only be queried for the following result displays e PvT Full Burst Modulation Spectrum Graph Transient Spectrum Graph Spectrum Graph Useful commands for retrieving limit check results described elsewhere READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt LIMit FAIL on page 297 Retrieving Results FETCh SPECtrum MODulation LIMit FAIL on page 305 Remote commands exclusive to retrieving limit check results CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA c cccc
311. ly for reference White fields indicate unknown data colored fields indicate known symbol sequences The slot settings vary slightly for different burst types R amp S FPS K10 Configuration Frame Slot Multi Carrier Slot 1 Burst Type Normal Burst NB Slot 2 Modulation Slot3 Filter Slot 4 eidele TSC O Set 1 Slot 5 User TSC 0000000000000000 0000 Slot 6 000000 Slot 7 Slot Multi Carrier Data EGuard Burst Type Access Burst AB Modulation Filter GMSK Pulse Timing Advance Sync User Sync 00000000000000000000 00000000000000000000 Fig 6 3 Slot configuration for access burst User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 95 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration these parameters are available in this dialog box see chapter 5 8 Dependency of o The Slot settings are dependant on each other and only specific combinations of Slot Parameters on page 59 Slot State On Off Activates or deactivates the selected slot The R amp S FPS GSM application expects an input signal within the active slots only At least the Slot to Measure must be active in order to evaluate it Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt STATe on page 196 Burst Type Assigns a burst type to the selected slot The following burst types are supported e Normal NB e Higher Symbol Rate HB e Access AB The graphical slot structure is adapted according to the selected bur
312. lysis interval For details on the MSRA operating mode see chapter 5 17 GSM in MSRA Operating Mode on page 82 and the R amp S FPS MSRA User Manual Date ACQUISM E 219 e Configuring and Performing SWe9Gps ener thin ttn th dna 221 Data Acquisition The Data Acquisition settings define how long data is captured from the input signal by the R amp S FPS GSM application SENSe SWAPiq eee tette teet tette tette sete n0d 220 ESE ASS TWA cas viii ovid ee Put ine adr a acer Rad e did 220 SEN Se IS WEG TIME AUTO DE 220 TRACCI NEE 221 BEE le RE 221 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements SENSe SWAPiq State This command defines whether or not the recorded IQ pairs should be swapped I lt gt Q before being processed Swapping and Q inverts the sideband This is useful if the DUT interchanged the and Q parts of the signal then the R amp S FPS can do the same to compensate for it Try this function if the TSC can not be found Parameters State ON and Q signals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j l OFF and Q signals are not interchanged Normal sideband I j Q RST OFF Manual operation See Swap Q on page 116 SENSe SWEep TIME lt Time gt This command defines the data capture time Tip If you use an external trigger which indicates the frame start the minimum allowed capture time is reduced from 10 ms to 866 us Parameters lt Time
313. m Range MCBWide Multicarrier BTS Wide Area RST BTSNormal Example CONF DEV TYPE BTSNormal Manual operation See Device Type on page 92 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements CONFigure MS NETWork TYPE lt Value gt This command works in conjunction with the CONFigure MS NETWork FREQuency BAND on page 192 command to specify the frequency band of the signal to be measured The command is not in line with the manual operation so the SCPI remote control command remains compatible with the R amp S FS K5 Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt PGSM EGSM DCS PCS TGSM RGSM GSM PGSM Primary GSM EGSM Extended GSM DCS DCS PCS PCS TGSM T GSM RGSM Railway GSM GSM GSM RST EGSM Example CONF NETW PGSM Manual operation See Frequency Band on page 92 CONFigure MS NETWork FREQuency BAND lt Value gt This command works in conjunction with thecONFigure MS NETWork TYPE command to specify the frequency band of the signal to be measured The command is not in line with the manual operation so the SCPI remote control command remains compatible with the R amp S FS K5 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt 380 410 450 480 710 750 810 850 900 1800 1900 380 380 MHz band valid for TGSM 410 410 M
314. m the specified file Usage Setting only Manual operation See UO Import on page 167 MMEMory STORe n IQ COMMent Comment This command adds a comment to a file that contains UO data The suffix n is irrelevant Parameters Comment String containing the comment Example MMEM STOR IQ COMM Device test 1b Creates a description for the export file MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores UO data and the comment to the specified file MMEMory STORe lt n gt lQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command writes the captured UO data to a file The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant 11 10 Status Reporting System The file extension is iq tar By default the contents of the file are in 32 bit floating point format Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FPS User Manual Parameters 1 lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data igq tar Stores the captured UO data to the spe
315. mance lower symbol error rate compared to the Linear method especially at low signal to noise ratios but with a loss of measure ment speed This method is recommended for normal bursts with 16QAM or 32QAM modulation and for Higher Symbol Rate bursts with a narrow pulse Tip Use this setting if it reduces the EVM RMS measurement result Remote command CONFigure MS DEMod DECision on page 230 Tail amp TSC Bits The demodulator in the R amp S FPS GSM application requires the bits of the burst tail data TSC data tail to provide an ideal version of the measured signal The data bits can be random and are typically not known inside the demodulator of the R amp S FPS GSM application tail and TSC bits are specified in the Slot dialog box see Training Sequence TSC Sync on page 97 Detected The detected Tail and TSC bits are used to construct the ideal signal Standard The standard tail and TSC bits as set in the Slot dialog box are used to construct the ideal signal Using the standard bits can be advantageous to verify whether the device under test sends the correct tail and TSC bits Incorrect bits would lead to peaks in the EVM vs Time trace see EVM on page 17 at the positions of the incorrect bits Remote command CONFigure MS DEMod STDBits on page 231 Measurement Settings Measurement settings define how power or spectrum measurements are performed The settings in this dial
316. mand defines the minimum value on the y axis for all traces in the specified window The suffix t is irrelevant 11 7 3 Analyzing GSM Measurements Parameters lt Value gt numeric_value Default unit dBm Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA applications define an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the analysis interval The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applica tions For the GSM application the commands to define the analysis interval are the same as those used to define the actual data acquisition see chapter 11 5 5 1 Data Acquisi tion on page 219 Be sure to select the correct measurement channel before execut ing these commands In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the analysis interval for the GSM measurement Remote commands exclusive to MSRA applications The following commands are only available for MSRA application channels CAL Culatesni gt MSRA ALING SHOW EE 264 CAL Culate nzMSbRA AL INelVAl ue 264 CAL Culate nzMSbRA WlNDow cnzc MAL 265 CAL Culat e lt n MSRA WINDOWS lt 1S MIVA asoini oninia agiia Aa aE 265 INITiate sp E E 265 SENSE MSRA CAPT ure E 266 CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe SHOW This command defines whether or not the analysis line is displayed in all time based
317. mation specific to the application All general instrument functions and settings common to all applications and operating modes are described in the main R amp S FPS User Manual The main focus in this manual is on the measurement results and the tasks required to obtain them The following topics are included Welcome to the GSM Application Introduction to and getting familiar with the application e GSM UO Modulation Accuracy etc Measurement Results Details on supported measurements and their result types e Basics on GSM Measurements Background information on basic terms and principles in the context of the mea surement Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration and Analysis A concise description of all functions and settings available to configure measure ments and analyze results with their corresponding remote control command Q Data Import and Export Description of general functions to import and export raw UO measurement data Howto Perform Measurements in the GSM Application The basic procedure to perform each measurement and step by step instructions for more complex tasks or alternative methods e Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Remote commands required to configure and perform GSM measurements in a remote environment sorted by tasks Commands required to set up the environment or to perform common tasks on the instrument are provided in the main R amp S FPS User Manual Programming examples demonstrate th
318. ment and which offset frequencies in the table spectrum list measurement are checked against the limit This command affects the Modulation Spectrum and Transient Spectrum measurements Note For measurements on multicarrier signals use either the check on the left or right side to measure the spectrum of the left or right most channel and to ignore the side where adjacent channels are located Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query lt State gt 110 ON OFF 1 ON check limit 0 OFF do not check limit RST 1 Example CONF SPEC LIM LEFT OFF Manual operation See Enable Left Limit Enable Right Limit on page 126 CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching TYPE lt DetectorMode gt This command is retained for compatibility with R amp S FPS K5 only Parameters for setting and query lt DetectorMode gt PEAK RMS RST RMS Example CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching TYPE Manual operation See Transient Spectrum Reference Power on page 127 CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching LIMIT lt Mode gt This command selects whether the list results power and limit values of the Transi ent Spectrum measurement are returned in a relative dB or absolute dBm unit This command is only available when the Transient Spectrum measurement is selected see CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching IMMediate on page 324 Parameters for setting and query Mode ABSolute RELative RST RE
319. mote command can also be achieved in manual operation a link to the description is inserted Introduction 11 1 2 Long and Short Form The keywords have a long and a short form You can use either the long or the short form but no other abbreviations of the keywords The short form is emphasized in upper case letters Note however that this emphasis only serves the purpose to distinguish the short from the long form in the manual For the instrument the case does not matter Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as SENS FREQ CENT 11 1 3 Numeric Suffixes Some keywords have a numeric suffix if the command can be applied to multiple instances of an object In that case the suffix selects a particular instance e g a mea surement window Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets lt n gt next to the keyword If you don t quote a suffix for keywords that support one a 1 is assumed Example DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe enables the zoom in a particular mea surement window selected by the suffix at WINDow DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON refers to window 4 11 1 4 Optional Keywords Some keywords are optional and are only part of the syntax because of SCPI compli ance You can include them in the header or not Note that if an optional keyword has a numeric suffix and you need to use the suffix you have to include the optional keyword Otherwise the suffix of the m
320. multi channels of equal power MC300 Recommended for measurement scenarios where a total of six channels is active and the channel to be measured has a reduced power e g 30 dB compared to its adjacent channels RST G1000 single carrier MC400 multicarrier Example CONF BURS PTEM FILT G500 Manual operation See Power vs Time Filter on page 124 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 332 CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate TALign Mode This command controls the time alignment of the limit lines for the Power vs Time measurement see PvT Full Burst on page 27 Parameters for setting and query Mode STMeasure PSLot STMeasure For each slot the mid of TSC is derived from the measured mid of TSC of the Slot to measure and the timeslot lengths speci fied in the standard see Timeslot length in 3GPP TS 45 010 PSLot For each slot the mid of TSC is measured This provides reason able time alignment if the slot lengths are not according to standard However the Power vs Time limit check is also passed RST STMeasure Example CONF BURS PTEM TAL PSL Manual operation See Limit Line Time Alignment on page 125 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 332 11 5 7 2 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Spectrum The modulation and transient spectrum measurements allow f
321. n in MSRA operating mode over a longer period e g over night and then checking the average or MinHold MaxHold trace to detect any irregu larities in the captured data For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FPS MSRA User Manual 6 6 1 Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function Configuration The default GSM UO measurement captures the UO data from the GSM signal and determines various characteristic signal parameters such as the modulation accuracy transient spectrum trigger to sync etc in just one measurement see chapter 4 1 GSM UO Modulation Accuracy etc Measurement Results on page 16 For multicarrier wideband noise MCWN measurements a different configuration is required see chapter 6 4 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements on page 130 The settings required to configure each of these measurements are described here Selecting the measurement type gt To select a different measurement type do one of the following e Select the Overview softkey In the Overview select the Select Measure ment button Select the required measurement e Press the MEAS key In the Select Measurement dialog box select the required measurement Remote command CONFigure MEASurement on page 190 e Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function sssss 85 e Ee d UTC d DE 87 e Modulation Accuracy Measurement Confguratton esses 87 e M
322. n is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command FETCh SPECUUmGSWITehtngpAEL taco rotten eda cav aaae 298 REAB SPEGCtrum SWITching ALE iisiaai ioi ct auctio coe reed eee eee 298 FETCh SPECtrum SWITching REFerence ccccccccccccncseseseseneeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeenenenenenanaee 299 READ SPECtrum SWITching REFerence IMMediate esee 299 READ SPECtrum SWITching REFerence GATing EEN 299 FETCh SPECtrum SWITching ALL READ SPECtrum SWITching ALL This command starts the measurement and reads out the transient spectrum This command is only available for Transient Spectrum Table evaluations see Tran sient Spectrum Table on page 30 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command The result is a list of partial result strings separated by commas Return values Placeholder curently irrelevant lt Freq1 gt Absolute offset frequency in Hz lt Freq2 gt Absolute offset frequency in Hz lt Level gt Measured level at the offset frequency in dB or dBm For more information see CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching LIMIT lt Limit gt Limit at the offset frequency in dB or dBm For more information see CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching LIMIT Retrieving Results
323. n overview of the spectrum For a detailed conformance check of the DUT to the GSM standard use the Modulation Spectrum Table evaluation which uses the 5 pole filter required by the 3GPP standard The numeric results of the modulation spectrum evaluation are displayed in the Modu lation Spectrum Table on page 23 The following default settings are used for a Modulation Spectrum evaluation Table 4 3 Default settings for a Modulation Spectrum evaluation Setting Default Measurement Scope The slot selected as Slot to Measure Averaging Configuration Number of bursts as selected in Statistic Count Limit Check According to standard Limit check of average Avg trace See chapter 5 13 1 Limit Check for Modulation Spectrum on page 68 Note Modulation RBW at 1800 kHz For the Modulation Spectrum Graph both the RBW and VBW are set to 30 kHz Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH MSFD See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 249 Results TRACe n DATA on page 270 CALCulate n LIMit k FAIL on page 302 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer DATA on page 303 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA on page 302 Modulation Spectrum Table The modulation spectrum evaluates the power vs frequency trace of a certain part of the burst 50 to 90 of the useful part excluding the training sequence TSC by mea suring the average power in this part over several frames The Modulation Sp
324. n re rre nene enn 298 FETCh WSPectrum IMPRoducts INNer ALL eni tnn ent rene rini 306 FETCh WSPectrum IMPRoducts OUTer ALL FETCh WSPectrum MODulation REFOererce nius octets ert ecc e ad gp eco Cia ve dap uaa 330 FETCh WSPectrum MODWUlation ALL a erret tt inttr erre rh rne REES 330 FETCH WsPectrum NARROWSINNG PALE insense E aT t ops NEANDER TONETA 308 FETCh WSPectrum NARROW OQU Ter EALL S nonno rn tr t ipe net rn trennen 309 FETCh WSPectrum REFerence POWer ALL rint torte entr rr ie ear ENEE ERE 310 FETCRh WSPectrm WIDEband INNer AEL uaa oce eara euet eo twp epe tege g nete er een teg ep oer ue pne 311 FETCh WSPectrum WIDEband OUTer ALL m FORMaEDEXPort DSEPat alol deeg gegen nt t E e rti e ri Ecce Hr e Oir Lio ela Ha Fo PUR FORMAtU DATA fogs R RP INIMiate DIS Plays m M INITiate lt n gt CONMeas INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous INITiatesn gt REF RESRyevesses coer aranetowescer P INITiate lt n gt SEQuencenABORt EE INlTlate nz GEOuencer IMMedlate AAA ll E ee ele KEE INITiatesns MMSdiate EE INPut ATTenuation INPUtATTen atioMm AUTO DEE INPUt GOUPO GE INPUED iN eanne a a ra e a AEE EEE Sk INPULEA WEE e e RRE EE INPUtEATT S E NK INPut FILTer YIG STATe 1 HIN nelli aite IN EK EE T
325. n the analysis interval of the application the line is indicated in all time based result displays such as time symbol slot or bit dia grams By default the analysis line is displayed however it can be hidden from view manually In all result displays the AL label in the window title bar indicates whether or not the analysis line lies within the analysis interval or not orange AL the line lies within the interval e white AL the line lies within the interval but is not displayed hidden e no AL the line lies outside the interval 2 PvT Full Burst Trigger source for MSRA Master Any trigger source other than Free Run defined for the MSRA Master is ignored when determining the frame start in the R amp S FPS GSM application see chapter 5 5 Trigger settings on page 52 In the default state in MSRA operating mode the Sequencer is active in continuous mode Thus the MSRA Master performs a data acquisition and then the active applica tions evaluate the data in turn after which the MSRA Master performs a data acquisi tion and so on As opposed to some other R amp S FPS applications in MSRA mode stat istical evaluation of the traces averaging MinHold MaxHold is not reset after each evaluation in the R amp S FPS GSM application User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 83 GSM in MSRA Operating Mode You can take advantage of this feature in the R amp S FPS GSM application by performing continuous data acquisitio
326. nabling MCWN ve 199 Manual levels MOHN AAA 154 MEWN EE MCWN remote doc Power level MOWN 2 rere tnn 154 Settings MOWN Jii eer eet 152 Reference power PT aui oer bod esce nes LN Bet aed Transient Spectrum Reference powers le CN 74 Reference EE 65 POT oet a er ra Ea ee Eere 53 Refreshing MSRA applicatioris errem ces 118 MSRA applications remote 265 SOMKGEY M E eaaa erra e dvces edie eaS 118 Remote commands Basics ofi Syntax isuriei aii erain 180 Booleari Values niita 2 EE eg edel ed 184 Capitalization 182 Character data 184 Data blocks 185 Numeric values 41 183 Optional keywords ree 182 SE NEE 183 SUINGS EE 185 SUffIXGS1 EE 182 Restoring Channel settings 4 91 133 RESUIt displays erem See eege EE Ae 16 Cartier Power Table iei ies acetals 36 CotiStellatiOn 52 0 225252 a reor eva CDN 17 DIC m 88 131 EVM Inner IMC Table 2 er Ziedel 37 Inner Narrow Band Table cccccccsscsceeeeeesseeeeeees 39 Inner Spectrum Table nre 41 Magnitude Capture ree erecti tz 18 Magnitude Error 2 2 rette ged 19 Marker table 20 44 MCWN Spectrum Graph sss 35 Modulation Accuracy 3 ren 20 Modulation Spectrum Graph oe eee eee eee eeee 22 Modulation Spectrum Table 23 Outer IM Table 2 oH ee Degr tote 38 Outer Spectrum Table
327. nd DOWN Decreases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Center Frequency on page 103 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size Parameters lt StepSize gt fmax iS specified in the data sheet Range 1 to fMAX RST 0 1 x span Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 103 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO lt State gt This command couples or decouples the center frequency step size to the span In time domain zero span measurements the center frequency is coupled to the RBW Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example FREQ CENT STEP AUTO ON Activates the coupling of the step size to the span 11 5 3 2 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements SENSe FREQuency OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines a frequency offset If this value is not 0 Hz the application assumes that the input signal was frequency shifted outside the application All results of type frequency will be correcte
328. nd the pre amplifier AFTER the correct carrier frequencies have been determined For MCWN measurements make sure all detected carriers are in the measurement span for example using the Carriers 1 8 MHz or Carriers 6 MHz settings see Setting the Span to Specific Values Automatically on page 140 GSM in MSRA Operating Mode The GSM application can also be used to analyze data in MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA appli cations receive an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the applica tion data For the R amp S FPS GSM application in MSRA operating mode the application data range is defined by the same settings used to define the signal capture in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode see Capture Time on page 115 In addition a cap ture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the application data for GSM measurements The Magnitude Capture display shows the application data of the R amp S FPS GSM application in MSRA mode MCWN measurements and MSRA mode Only the default GSM UO measurement Modulation Accuracy is available in MSRA mode not the new MCWN measurement see chapter 4 2 Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurements on page 33 Data coverage for each active application Generally if a signal contains multiple data channels for multiple standards separate applications are
329. ne is also exceeded the limit check fails Maximum number of exceptions The number of bands for which exceptional limits may be applied is restricted by the standard 3GPP TS 45 005 chapter 6 2 1 4 1 for single carrier 3GPP 51 021 chapter 6 12 3 for multicarrier BTS devices Thus the maximum number of bands that may use exceptional limits is indicated for each measurement as well as the number of bands for which exceptions actually were used The limit check compares the number of employed exceptions with the number of maximum allowed exceptions Note that the maximum number of exceptional bands is based on the total number of bands included in the following Exception ranges However if the defined measurement span does not comprise all the bands in these ranges the maximum is not valid In this case the measurement may pass the limit check although too many exceptions occurred for the restricted span To ensure the correct span is used select FREQ Frequency Config TX band see Setting the Span to Specific Values Automatically on page 140 Exception ranges Exceptions are defined for two frequency ranges Multicarrier and Wideband Noise Carriers Af Ss 2 MHz Range A Af s 2 MHz M s 10 0 MHz a FEN lt 10 0 MHz 9 Range B Fig 5 21 Exception ranges for multicarrier BTS limit checks Range A e For multicarrier BTS device types Bands with an offset of 0 Hz to 2 MHz from the Tx
330. nel SLOT0 SUBChannell TSC Il gt 0 1 Subchannel 1 Query TSC number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT0 SUBChannell TSC TSC I1 gt 0 Subchannel 1 Query Set number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SUBChannel1 TSC SET I gt 1 Manual operation See Training Sequence TSC Sync on page 97 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 336 or chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 336 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt TADVance Offset Specifies the position of an access burst within a single slot This command is only available for access bursts see CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT Number TYPE on page 202 Suffix Number lt 0 7 gt Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query lt Offset gt offset from slot start in symbols Range 0 to 63 Increment 10 RST 0 Example CONF CHAN SLOT TADV 1 Manual operation See Timing Advance Access Burst only on page 97 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt TSC lt Value gt This command selects the training sequence code TSC Normal and Higher Symbol Rate Bursts or training synchronization sequence TS for Access Bursts of the specified slot and subchannel used by the mobile or base station See 3GPP TS 45 002 chapter 5 2 Bursts This command is not available for AQPSK modulation
331. ng in the Frame settings see Equal Timeslot Length on page 93 so the limit line is aligned to the slots correctly For non standard signals or if you require more precise delta values use the Time Alignment Per Slot setting Error Messages The following error messages may be displayed in the status bar of the R amp S FPS GSM application Check these descriptions for possible error causes and solutions Burst not found ovie notou need eerte retine Burst not found Possible causes Possible solutions Training sequence TSC or sync is not defined cor rectly Check the TSC sync definition in Slot settings see Training Sequence TSC Sync on page 97 Slot is not in defined slot scope Include the slot in the slots to measure see chap ter 6 3 7 1 Slot Scope on page 118 Sync not found Possible causes Possible solutions Training sequence TSC or sync is not defined cor rectly Check the TSC sync definition in Slot settings see Training Sequence TSC Sync on page 97 No or incorrect position of access burst in slot defined The trigger event does not correspond to the start of the active part in slot 0 Define the correct Timing Advance for the slots containing an access burst see Timing Advance Access Burst only on page 97 Correct the trigger offset for an external trigger see Trigger Offset on page 112 The DUT interchanged the an
332. nge A 6 Exceptions in range B Return values lt NoExcept gt integer Number of exceptions Example CALCulate2 LIMit1 EXC COUN MAX Queries the maximum number of bands with exceptions to the limit line check allowed for wideband noise in window 2 Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 341 Usage Query only Manual operation See Specirum Graph on page 35 FETCh SPECtrum MODulation LIMit FAIL lt Result gt This command queries the results of the limit check for MCWN measurements Parameters lt Result gt 110 ON OFF Result of the limit check 1 ON Pass 0 OFF Fail Example FETC SPEC MOD LIM FAIL Retrieving Results Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 341 Usage Query only Manual operation See Spectrum Graph on page 35 FETCh WSPectrum IMPRoducts INNer ALL This command queries the results of the measured intermodulation products up to the order specified using CONFigure SPECtrum IMPorder for the frequencies in the gap between the GSM carrier subblocks for non contiguous carrier allocation For each measured offset frequency the following values are returned Return values lt FreqAbs gt numeric value Absolute frequency of intermodulation Default unit Hz lt FreqRel gt numeric value Frequency offsets from the
333. nit Hz lt WorstFreqRel gt numeric value Frequency offsets from the closest carrier to the worst mea sured wideband noise result in this limit line segment Default unit Hz Retrieving Results lt WorstFreqAbs gt numeric value Absolute frequency of the worst measured wideband noise result regarding delta to limit in this limit line segment Default unit Hz lt RBW gt numeric value Resolution bandwidth used for measurement in this limit line segment Default unit Hz lt PowerAtWorst gt numeric value Absolute or relative power level to reference power at that worst result in this limit line segment Default unit dBm dB lt LimitAtWorst gt numeric value Absolute or relative power level limit to reference power at that worst result in this limit line segment Default unit dBm dB lt AbsRelMode gt ABS REL Indicates whether absolute or relative power values are returned depending on CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation LIMIT on page 235 lt LimCheck gt Result of the limit check in this limit line segment PASSED power within limits FAILED power exceeds limit Example FETC WSP WID INN Usage Query only Manual operation See Inner Wideband Table on page 41 FETCh WSPectrum WIDEband OUTer ALL This command queries the resultsof the wideband noise measurement below the low est and above the highest carrier but not in the gap for non contiguous carrier alloca tion For each lim
334. nitude Capture default upper left 2 PvT Full burst default below Mag Capt 3 Modulation Accuracy next to Mag Capt 4 Modulation Spectrum Table next to PvT 5 EVM vs Time measurement full width bottom LAYout REMove 3 LAYout REMove 4 LAYout ADD WINDow 1 RIGH MACC LAYout ADD WINDow 2 RIGH MST LAYout ADD WINDow 2 BEL ETIMe ff59sssee eR Signal Description Configure a base station DUT with normal power class 1 CONFigure MS DEV TYPE BTSNormal CONFigure MS NETWORK PGSM CONFigure MS NETWORK FREQ BAND 900 CONFigure MS POW CLAS 1 ees Frame slot configuration CONFigure MS CHANnel FRAM EQU OFF Set slot 1 On Higher Symbol Rate burst 16QAM Wide Pulse TSC 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 STATe ON CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 TYPE HB CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 MTYPe QAM16 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 FILTer WIDE CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 TSC 0 Set slot 2 On Normal burst GMSK modulation TSC 3 Set 1 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 STATe ON CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 TYPE NB CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 MTYPe GMSK CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 TSC 3 1 Query TSC number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 TSC TSC 3 Query Set number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 TSC SET gt 1 Set slot 3 On Normal burst GMSK modulation User defined TSC CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT3 STATe ON CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT3 TYPE NB CONFigure MS CHA
335. nsuring stable reference values Usually a small average count 10 12 is sufficient to obtain suitable results for the reference measurement If this reference measurement is disabled user defined reference values are used for relative results in the final measurement Narrowband noise measurement If enabled the narrowband noise is measured next Narrowband noise measurement is only available for multicarrier device types see Device Type on page 92 for which at least 2 carriers are configured see chapter 6 3 3 3 Carrier Settings on page 98 This measurement consists of zero span sweeps at a number of defined offset fre quencies for each active carrier That means UO data is captured at all relevant outer most carriers i e 2 carriers for contiguous 4 for non contiguous carrier allocation one after another From this UO data all slots and timing information are determined Multicarrier and Wideband Noise At each determined slot a gated zero span measurement with an RBW and VBW of 30 kHz is performed using the same UO data Measurement time is from 50 to 90 of the useful part of the time slot excluding the mid amble Measurement offsets are 400 kHz 600 kHz and 1200 kHz either below or above the outermost carrier If no slots are found the results are invalid due to an invalid measurement setup and a warning is displayed in the status bar Several narrowband noise measurements can be performed subsequently to c
336. nt capture buffer If the number of frames defined by the statistic count all fit into the capture buffer at once the number of values is 2 statistic count If not the number of values is 2 the number of frames in the last capture Example FETCh MCAPture SLOTs MEASure Result for 3 slot scopes e g after a single sweep with statistic count 3 0 002261 0 000577 0 006876 0 000577 0 011492 0 000577 Usage Query only Manual operation See Magnitude Capture on page 18 FETCh MCAPture SLOTs SCOPe This command queries the positions of the slot scopes in the current capture buffer indicated by green bars in the result display 11 8 4 Retrieving Results Return values lt Result gt The result is a comma separated list of positions for each scope with the following syntax xPos 0 xLen 0 xPos 1 xLen 1 where xPos i is the x value in seconds of the i th scope xLen i is the length of the i th scope in seconds The number of values is 2 the number of GSM frames in the current capture buffer If the number of frames defined by the statistic count all fit into the capture buffer at once the number of values is 2 statistic count If not the number of values is 2 the number of frames in the last capture Example FETCh MCAPture SLOTs SCOPe Result for 3 slots to measure e g after a single sweep with sta tistic count 3 0 002261 0 001154 0 006876 0 001154 0 011492 0 001154 Usage Query only
337. nt specific settings for the MC and Wide Noise Spectrum measure ment are available via the Overview o The MARKER FUNCT and LINES menus are currently not used Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements e Default Settings for GSM MOWN Measurement AAA 131 e COMMOUPATION BEE 131 EE e ERR el e DE 133 putand Prontene Selects Petre c eec cent teo cade ra 137 e Tigger culpe E 146 e SWOOP OBS EE 151 e Reference Measurement Geitngs AE 152 e Noise Measurement Senge oie eee iiie de eret EL en ninian 155 e Adjusting Settings Automatically eese eene 156 6 4 1 Default Settings for GSM MCWN Measurements The following default settings are activated when a MCWN measurement is selected Table 6 4 Default settings for GSM MCWN measurements Parameter Value Measurement type MC and Wide Noise Spectrum Sweep mode CONTINUOUS Trigger settings FREE RUN Device type as defined channel default BTS Normal Frequency band as defined channel default E GSM 900 Carriers 1 active carrier at defined center frequency with NB GMSK modulation Reference power Maximum measured active carrier level Noise measurements Narrowband noise Wideband noise Intermodulation measure Order 3 and 5 ments Average count Ref meas 10 Noise meas 200 Limit line exceptions Applied Evaluations Window 1 Spectrum Graph Window 2 Carrier Power Table 6 4 2 Configuration Overview
338. ntable form on the Documenta tion CD ROM delivered with the instrument In the user manuals all instrument func tions are described in detail Furthermore they provide a complete description of the remote control commands with programming examples The user manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the R amp S FPS in general and the Spectrum application in particular Furthermore the soft ware functions that enhance the basic functionality for various applications are descri bed here An introduction to remote control is provided as well as information on main tenance instrument interfaces and troubleshooting In the individual application manuals the specific instrument functions of the applica tion are described in detail For additional information on default settings and parame ters refer to the data sheets Basic information on operating the R amp S FPS is not inclu ded in the application manuals All user manuals are also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FPS product page at http Awww2 rohde schwarz com product FPS html Service Manual This manual is available in PDF format on the Documentation CD ROM delivered with the instrument It describes how to check compliance with rated specifications instru ment function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the R amp S FPS by replacing modules 1 3
339. nuously adjustable RST 32 MHz Example See chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 332 Usage Query only Manual operation See Sample rate on page 115 TRACe IQ BWIDth This command queries the bandwidth of the resampling filter The bandwidth of the resampling filter depends on the sample rate Usage Query only Manual operation See Analysis Bandwidth on page 115 11 5 5 2 Configuring and Performing Sweeps The Sweep settings define how often data is captured from the input signal by the R amp S FPS GSM application Useful commands for configuring sweeps described elsewhere SENSe SWEep TIME on page 220 INITiate lt n gt REFResh on page 265 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Remote commands exclusive to configuring and performing sweeps Pte ORR lip H R OOE 222 INITiate sn ere cc on i e Ho e ert e enr ne 223 INITIate e el Che TEE 223 UN Mite EE 224 EINEN EE OT 224 IN Tiatesn SEQuencerABONRL iei aaa Rari EENS SEENEN 224 INITlate nz GEOuencerJMMedate eene nn nsns 224 INiTiatesn gt e ele RE 225 SENGER HN 22 2212 12 220 eege EE EE roce xD ci toa Ea N N EDA 226 SENSe SWEep COUNL tratta ttt tht ta titt esed ta tdt ta d da acd t 226 SENSe SWEep COUNt CUpRbent etienne enhn en enn n nsns s sentir nre rn nnn 226 SENSE SWEEP COUN TRGS CURREN EE 227 ABORt This c
340. of the following regions the parameters described in Wideband noise results are shown e frequencies to the left of the lowermost carrier e frequencies to the right of the uppermost carrier The wideband noise tables divide the total frequency range of the wideband noise measurement defined by the selected span and the GSM band in non overlapping frequency segments For details see chapter 5 15 6 Wideband Noise Measurement on page 80 The following parameters are shown for wideband noise tables for each segment Table 4 14 Wideband noise results Result Description Start MHz Absolute start frequency of segment Stop kHz Absolute stop frequency of segment Offset MHz Frequency of the worst measured wideband noise result in that segment Relative to the nearest active outermost carrier Freq MHz Absolute frequency of the worst measured wideband noise result in that segment dB Relative power level to reference power of the worst measured wideband noise result in that segment dBm Absolute power level of the worst measured wideband noise result in that segment A to Limit Worst power difference to limit defined in standard in that segment Defined exceptions are considered Negative values indicate limit check failed The rows are sorted in ascending order of the absolute frequencies of the wideband noise measurement segments If noise measurement is disabled this table is empty Furt
341. of the lower sub block and the lowermost carrier of the upper sub block Fig 4 3 Inner and outer intermodulation The rows are sorted in ascending order of the absolute IM frequency R amp S FPS K10 Measurements and Result Displays JEE For contiguous carrier allocation or if Intermodulation is off this table is empty Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH IIMP See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 249 Results FETCh WSPectrum IMPRoducts INNer ALL on page 306 Outer IM Table Displays the measured intermodulation products up to the order specified in Intermo dulation for the frequencies outside of the sub blocks but not in the gap 3 Outer IM Table Intermodulation Offset MHz Freq MHz Order RBW kHz dB 20 100 62 8 100 100 00 8 8 100 100 100 100 100 5 5 5 5 5 9 5 5 9 C For each of the following regions the parameters described in table 4 12 are shown e frequencies to the left of the lowermost carrier e frequencies to the right of the uppermost carrier The rows are sorted in ascending order of the absolute IM frequency The frequency offsets are defined as offsets from the closest carrier i e the lowermost carrier of the lower sub block and the uppermost carrier of the upper sub block Outer w sche Outer IM f IM MN DW gt f Fig 4 4 Inner and outer intermodulation The following parameters are shown Table 4 12 Intermodulation results Result Description Off
342. og box are available when you do one of the following e Inthe Overview select the Measurement button e Press the MEAS CONFIG key then the Meas Settings softkey Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration 6 3 8 1 Power vs Time The Power vs Time filter is used to suppress out of band interference in the Power vs Time measurement see chapter 5 7 1 Power vs Time Filter on page 56 A limit line is available to determine if the power exceeds the limits defined by the standard in each slot Power vs Time Spectrum Trigger to Sync Power vs Time Filter Power vs Time Limit Line Time Alignment Slot to measure PerSlot Power vs Time Filter The PvT filter controls the filter used to reduced the measurement bandwidth in Power vs Time measurements Note The PvT filter is optimized to get smooth edges after filtering burst signals and to suppress adjacent active channels Depending on the Device Type single carrier or multicarrier different PvT filters are supported 1 MHz Gauss default for single carrier device 600 kHz single carrier only for backwards compatibility to FS K5 500 kHz Gauss single carrier only for backwards compatibility to FS K5 400 kHz multicarrier default for multicarrier device Recommended for measurements with multi channels of equal power 300 kHz multicarrier Recommended for multicarrier measurement scenarios where a total of six channels is active and the chann
343. og boxes The Overview and dialog boxes are updated to indicate the settings for the selected window 6 3 3 Signal Description The signal description provides information on the expected input signal which optimi zes frame detection and measurement The Signal Description settings are available from the configuration Overview 9 PI ege post edet ure duas tru REESEN 91 Ee e TE 94 e Caller Getullgs secco ete mam bed eee d natem s c tare 98 6 3 3 1 Frame Frame settings determine the frame configuration used by the device under test Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration The Frame settings are available when you do one of the following e Inthe Overview select the Signal Description or Demodulation button then Switch to the Frames tab Signal Description Frame Slot Multi Carrier Device Under Test Device Type BTS Normal Frequency Band Power Class Frame Configuratior Equal Time Slot Lengths Select Slot to Configure Norm Device Type Defines the type of device under test DUT The following types are available BTS Normal BTS Micro BTS Pico MS Normal MS Small Multicarrier BTS Wide Area Multicarrier BTS Medium Range Multicarrier BTS Local Area The default device type is BTS Normal Remote command CONFigure MS DEVice TYPE on page 191 Frequency Band The frequency band defines the frequency range used to transmit the signal For details see Frequency ban
344. ol of the TSC The start of the first symbol of the TSC corresponds to the time 0 of the symbol period see chapter 5 9 Definition of the Symbol Period on page 59 Only one result per data capture is provided Therefore it is useful to perform several data captures and average the results to obtain an accurate value see Statistic Count on page 117 Both graphical and numeric table results are available While the graphical results are mainly used to determine the required measurement settings see Trigger to Sync Graph on page 31 the numeric results provide the actual trigger to sync value including statistical evaluation 2 Trigger to Sync Table Current Average Std Dev Trigger to Sync us 2 1005 2 0006 2 225 0 00042 Fig 4 2 Trigger to Sync table The Trigger to Sync table shows the following values Value Description Current Trigger to Sync value for current measurement in us Average Trigger to Sync value averaged over the Statistic Count number of measure ments Min Minimum Trigger to Sync value in the previous Statistic Count number of mea surements Max Maximum Trigger to Sync value in the previous Statistic Count number of mea surements Std Dev Standard deviation of the individual Trigger to Sync values to the average value Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH TGST see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 249 Results chapter 11 8 8 Trigger to Sync Results on page 300 Multica
345. om 1 to O in a CONDition bit is not detected The ENAB1e part of the STATus OPERation and STATus QUEStionable registers are set to 0 i e all events in these registers are not passed on Usage Event STATus QUEue NEXT This command queries the most recent error queue entry and deletes it Positive error numbers indicate device specific errors negative error numbers are error messages defined by SCPI If the error queue is empty the error number 0 No error is returned Usage Query only Reading Out the EVENt Part STATus OPERation EVENt STATus QUEStionable EVENt STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable DIQ EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the EVENt section of the status register The command also deletes the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only Reading Out the CONDition Part STATus OPERation CONDition STATus QUEStionable CONDition STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition
346. ommand aborts the measurement in the current measurement channel and resets the trigger system To prevent overlapping execution of the subsequent command before the measure ment has been aborted successfully use the OPC or WAI command after ABOR and before the next command For details see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FPS User Manual To abort a sequence of measurements by the Sequencer use the INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt command Note on blocked remote control programs If a sequential command cannot be completed for example because a triggered sweep never receives a trigger the remote control program will never finish and the remote channel to the R amp S FPS is blocked for further commands In this case you must inter rupt processing on the remote channel first in order to abort the measurement To do so send a Device Clear command from the control instrument to the R amp S FPS on a parallel channel to clear all currently active remote channels Depending on the used interface and protocol send the following commands e Visa viClear Now you can send the ABORt command on the remote channel performing the mea surement Example ABOR INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and immediately starts a new one Example ABOR WAI INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and starts a new one once abortion has been completed Usage Event SCPI confirmed Configuring and Performing G
347. ompatibility with R amp S FS K5 only Parameters for setting and query Value GMSK EDGE Modulation type RST GMSK Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility Example Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Old FS K5 commands CONFigure MS MTYPe EDGE Please use the following K10 commands instead I K5 GMSK gt K10 GMSK I K5 EDGE gt K10 PSK8 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO MTYPe PSK8 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 MTYPe PSK8 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 MTYPe PSK8 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT3 MTYPe PSK8 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT4 MTYPe PSK8 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT5 MTYPe PSK8 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT6 MTYPe PSK8 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT7 MTYPe PSK8 Old FS K5 commands CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 MTYPe GMSK CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 MTYPe Il gt GMSK Please use the following K10 commands instead CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots MEASure gt 0 This is the slot number of the slot to measure Set and query the modulation of the slot to measure CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO MTYPe GMSK CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO MTYPe gt GMSK Mode GSM CONFigure MS POWer AUTO ONCE This command is used to perform an auto level measurement immediately Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use CONFigure MS AUTO LEVel ONCE on page 239 for new remote control pro
348. on on page 51 Note As the User TSC table in the dialog box only displays 25 bits at a time a scrollbar beneath the table allows you to display the remaining bits The currently selected bit number is indicated in the center of the scrollbar Table 6 3 Number of TSC bits depending on burst type and modulation Burst Type Modulation Number of Bits Normal GMSK 26 Normal 8PSK 78 Modulation Accuracy easurement Configuration Burst Type Modulation Number of Bits Normal 16QAM 104 Normal 32QAM 130 Higher Symbol Rate QPSK 62 Higher Symbol Rate 16QAM 124 Higher Symbol Rate 32QAM 155 Access GMSK 41 Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt TSC USER on page 201 AQPSK CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt SUBChannel lt ch gt TSC USER on page 198 6 3 3 3 Carrier Settings The Carrier settings define whether the expected signal contains a single or multiple carriers Up to 16 carriers can be configured for a single MCWN measurement Carrier settings are available from the Signal Description dialog box which is dis played when you select the corresponding button in the configuration Overview Signal Description Device Carriers Carrier Allocation Non Contiguous Gap start after carrier EI Carrier Active Frequency Modulation 1 935 0 MHz NB GMSK 2 935 6 MHz NB GMSK Si 936 2 MHz NB GMSK 4 936 8 MHz NB
349. on and pulse shape filter of each active carrier For possible combinations see chapter 5 8 Dependency of Slot Parameters on page 59 Note This setting determines the appropriate limits from the 3GPP standard Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier lt c gt MTYPe on page 203 6 3 4 6 3 4 1 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Input and Frontend Settings The R amp S FPS can evaluate signals from different input sources and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals The frequency and amplitude settings represent the frontend of the measurement setup e input Source Sells E 100 GE Ed EE 101 e Amplitude Settings anii ende esta ae td eases ee seen Dor ee toros 104 IER UO ESI EE 106 Input Source Settings The input source determines which data the R amp S FPS will analyze Input settings can be configured in the Input dialog box Some settings are also available in the Amplitude tab of the Amplitude dialog box e Radio E EE ATC EE 100 Radio Frequency Input The default input source for the R amp S FPS is Radio Frequency i e the signal at the RF INPUT connector of the R amp S FPS If no additional options are installed this is the only available input source Input Input e Source E Frequency Input Coupling Digital 19 Impedance YIG Preselector Mpu COUP EEUU 100 Sern o E E E E N A E E TE 101 dl 101 Input Coupling The R
350. on of file archivers available for most operating systems The advantage of tar files is that the archived files inside the tar file are not changed not com pressed and thus it is possible to read the UO data directly within the archive without the need to unpack untar the tar file first Sample iq tar files If you have the optional R amp S FPS VSA application R amp S FPS K70 some sample iq tar files are provided in the C Ap S Instr user vsa DemoSignals directory on the R amp S FPS Contained files An iq tar file must contain the following files e Q parameter XML file e g xyz xm1 Contains meta information about the UO data e g sample rate The filename can be defined freely but there must be only one single UO parameter XML file inside an ig tar file e Q data binary file e g xyz complex float32 Contains the binary I Q data of all channels There must be only one single UO data binary file inside an iq tar file Optionally an iq tar file can contain the following file Q preview XSLT file e g open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt Contains a stylesheet to display the UO parameter XML file and a preview of the UO data in a web browser UO Data File Format iq tar A sample stylesheet is available at http www rohde schwarz com file open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt A 2 4 I Q Parameter XML File Specification The content of the UO parameter XML file must comply with the XML schema Rs
351. on page 270 Power vs Slot Displays the power per slot in the current frame and over all frames The result of the Power vs Time limit check is also indicated Note The power is measured for inactive slots but not for slots outside the slot scope see chapter 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement on page 53 4 Power vs Slot NSP dBm dBm dB dBm dBm The following power values are determined EH User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 26 GSM UO Modulation Accuracy etc Measurement Results Table 4 7 Measured power values for Power vs Slot results Value Description SCPI query for result value Slot Analyzed slot number in frame s 0 7 PvT Limit Power vs Time limit for the power vs time trace of the slot defined by the standard READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt LIMit FAIL on page 297 Delta to Sync INSP The distance between the mid of the TSC and the TSC of the Slot to Measure NSP stands for Normal Symbol Period i e the duration of one symbol using a normal symbol rate approx 3 69us The measured Delta to Sync value has a resolution of 0 02 NSP For details see chapter 5 12 Delta to Sync Values on page 67 READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT Slot DELTatosync on page 296 Power Avg dBm Average power in slot in current or all frames READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt CURRent AVERage on page 293 READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT
352. onfig button and select one or more of the following displays for power results up to a total of 16 windows e PvT Full Burst power graph of all slots bursts in the selected slot scope over time e Power vs Slot table of power per slot in the current frame and over all frames Tip Also display the Magnitude Capture for a general overview of the measured data Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences Exit the SmartGrid mode Start a new sweep with the defined settings e To perform a single measurement press the RUN SINGLE key e To start a new continuous measurement press the RUN CONT key Check the PvT Full Burst results to determine if the signal remains within the limits specified by the standard in all slots to measure If the Limit Check indicates FAIL zoom into the Power vs Time graph to deter mine the time at which the power exceeded the limit Note in measurements according to standard the delta value will be identical for all slots in the scope due to the Limit Line Time Alignment Slot to Measure set ting see step 9 Check the irregular slot in more detail in the Magnitude Capture compare the green and blue bars beneath the trace If necessary zoom into the display to view it in greater detail 9 4 How to Analyze the Spectrum of GSM Signals Press the MODE key and select the GSM application Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for a GSM measurement Select
353. ons from the limit line check as defined in the 3GPP standard are applied to the limit checks of the MCWN measurements Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example CONF SPEC LIM EXC OFF Manual operation See Adapting the limit lines for wideband noise Apply Excep tions on page 156 CONFigure SPECtrum NNARrow lt State gt If enabled narrowband noise is measured as part of the MCWN measurement Nar rowband noise is measured with an RBW of 30 kHz at 3 single offset frequencies below the lowermost active carrier of the lower sub block and above the uppermost active carrier of the upper sub block Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example CONF SPEC NNAR OFF Manual operation See Narrowband Noise lt 1 8 MHz on page 156 CONFigure SPECtrum NWIDe State If enabled wideband noise is measured as part of the MCWN measurement Wide band noise is measured with an RBW of 100 kHz over the defined span typically the RF bandwidth 11 6 6 11 6 7 11 7 11 7 1 11 7 1 1 Analyzing GSM Measurements Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example CONF SPEC NWID OFF Manual operation See Wideband Noise 21 8 MHz on page 156 Adjusting Settings Automatically The commands required to adjust settings automatically are described in chapter 6 4 9 Adjusting Settings Automatically on page 156 Performing Sweeps The commands required to perform sweeps are described
354. operation See Multiple Zoom on page 165 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe State This command turns the mutliple zoom on and off Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window If you turn off one of the zoom windows all subsequent zoom windows move up one position Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 165 See Restore Original Display on page 165 See R Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 165 Retrieving Results The following commands are required to retrieve the results from the GSM measure ments User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 268 11 8 1 Retrieving Results Se Elte 269 e Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACEens 273 e Magnitude Capture Hesults AA 276 Modulation Te 277 Modulation Spectrum Results sarcdieseiisi Nd HESE EXE FERE aera 288 e Feowervelerbesute ugereest 290 e Transient Spectrum Results eene nennen 298 e Trigger to Sync Results etit ceci pecu Eo ELLE REEL LE RR REL e edd 300 e Limit Check Results oett ente cinere ek ndn ESA R 301 MOWN TER 304 e Retrieving Marker Results rtt trt eR Lc e td d t eund 313 Graphical Results The results of the trace queries depend on the selected evaluation see chapter 11 8 2 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt on page 273 FOBMSIEDATA EEN 269 FORMat Re IR TEE 270 SENSE IQ FF TEENGI egee gg
355. or further configuration CONFigtire SEIT eet cence ens area aden tera kp th bene Re t tege eh ne 234 CONFIE SPEC tronic Blue e TE 234 GONFigure SPECtrum SWITCHING ST d EE 235 GONFigure SPECtrum SWITchirig L MIT oontra rote hn aa anri nae Rennes 235 CONFigure SPEC trum MO Dulation bl MET ot terna Pee Pede eerte te nets 235 CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIS T SELect 1 iiie e esies ce crassa KEEN 236 SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE eccentric 236 READ W bechrum MODulation GATing ener ener nnns 237 CONFigure SPECtrum LIMit LEFT State This command controls the left limit check of the spectrum trace spectrum graph mea surement and which offset frequencies in the table spectrum list measurement are checked against the limit This command affects the Modulation Spectrum and Tran sient Spectrum measurements Note For measurements on multicarrier signals use either the check on the left or right side to measure the spectrum of the left or right most channel and to ignore the side where adjacent channels are located Parameters for setting and query State 110 ON OFF 1 ON check limit 0 OFF do not check limit RST 1 Example CONF SPEC LIM LEFT OFF Manual operation See Enable Left Limit Enable Right Limit on page 126 CONFigure SPECtrum LIMit RIGHt State This command controls the right limit check of the spectrum trace spectrum graph measure
356. orm several data captures and average the results to obtain an accurate value see Statistic Count on page 117 Both graphical and numeric table results are available While the graphical results are mainly used to determine the required measurement settings the numeric results pro vide the actual trigger to sync value including statistical evaluation see Trigger to Sync Table on page 33 R amp S FPS K10 Measurements and Result Displays 1 Trigger to Sync Graph 225 297 us DESS 225 301 us Fig 4 1 Trigger to Sync Graph The Trigger to Sync diagram shows two traces e Trace1 a histogram shows the probability density function PDF of all measured Trigger to Sync values Obviously the histogram can only provide reasonable results if several UO captures are performed and considered In an ideal case assuming no noise the histogram would be a rectangle over the trigger sampling time The histogram is helpful to determine the number of Trigger to Sync values to be averaged Statistic Count in order to obtain the required time resolution of the averaged Trigger to Sync value The higher the statistic count the more the graph becomes rectangular and the higher the resolution of the averaged Trigger to Sync value becomes e Trace2 the second trace is superimposed on the histogram and visualizes the probability density function PDF of the average Trigger to Sync value and the standard deviation as provided in the Trigger
357. ort gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 TRG AUX Parameters lt OutputType gt DEVice Sends a trigger signal when the R amp S FPS has triggered inter nally TARMed Sends a trigger signal when the trigger is armed and ready for an external trigger event UDEFined Sends a user defined trigger signal For more information see OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel RST DEVice Manual operation See Output Type on page 108 11 5 5 11 5 5 1 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate This command generates a pulse at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 TRG AUX Usage Event Manual operation See Send Trigger on page 108 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth lt Length gt This command defines the length of the pulse generated at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 TRG AUX Parameters lt Length gt Pulse length in seconds Manual operation See Pulse Length on page 108 Data Acquisition You must define how much and how often data is captured from the input signal MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master channel actually captures data from the input signal The data acquisition settings for the R amp S FPS GSM application in MSRA mode define the application data extract and ana
358. oting the Measurement 10 3 Extending the data basis Sporadic distortions in the EVM can be eliminated by evaluating several measure ments and determining the average over all traces Increase the Statistic Count in the Sweep settings to obtain sufficiently stable results Excluding results from adjacent channels For signals from base stations capable of using multiple carriers configure the DUT as such in the signal description In this case an additional multicarrier PvT filter sup presses power from adjacent channels This filter is also taken into account during the generation of the ideal reference signal otherwise there would be an increase in EVM because the measured signal has a smaller bandwidth compared to the refer ence signal Define which PvT filter to use depending on whether the channel to be measured has a reduced or equal power compared to its adjacent channels see Power vs Time Filter on page 124 For single carrier measurements make sure the correct Device Type setting is selected so the correct PvT filter is used for the power measurement Optimizing Limit Checks If the limit checks fail unexpectedly check the following issues Excluding results from adjacent channels In limit checks for multicarrier spectrum measurements the frequencies from adja cent carriers in the signal may distort the results of the limit check for a single carrier If you only want to check the frequencies from a single c
359. page 129 CONFigure TRGS ADPSize Value This command specifies the number of measurements after which the x axis is fixed for the histogram calculation of the Trigger to Sync measurement Parameters for setting and query Value numeric value Adaptive data size Range 10 to 1000 RST 100 Default unit NONE Manual operation See Adaptive Data Size on page 129 11 5 8 Adjusting Settings Automatically Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FPS automatically according to the current measurement settings CONFigurepMSEAUTOEFRAMe ONCE enge e oet eter onte deed 238 CONFigure MSEAUTO EEVSel ONGE iu icut eire teri toe rane acce uaa ciones 239 CONFigure MS AUTO TRIGger ONCE rere heh nnn ene n nnne nnns 239 CONFigurerMSEPOWerEAUTOSWESDp TIME 22 patte rtt tre tede e eeepc 239 SENSe TADJustFREQUeRnC 2 iari toti deerit nci aa a a aada 239 CONFigure MS AUTO FRAMe ONCE Value This command automatically performs a single measurement to detect the optimal frame configuration i e frame and slot parameters depending on the current mea surement settings and results This function is not available in MSRA mode if the Sequencer is active Note that in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode if the Sequencer is active this com mand cannot be aborted via the ABORt command Example CONF AUTO FRAM ONCE Manual operation See Automatic Frame Configuration on page 129 Configuring and Performing GSM UO
360. page 312 Marker Table Displays a table with the current marker values for the active markers This table may be displayed automatically if configured accordingly see Marker Table Display on page 162 4 Marker Table Wnd Type X value 1 Mi 13 25 GHz M 600 0 kHz 1 M 600 0 kHz 1 d 2 0 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MTAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 249 Results CALCulate n MARKer cm X on page 315 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 315 User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 44 R amp S FPS K10 Basics on GSM Measurements 5 Basics on GSM Measurements Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in GSM measure ments is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration set tings 5 1 Relevant Digital Standards The measurements and the physical layer the layer of the GSM network on which modulation transmission of RF signals reception of RF signals and demodulation take place is defined in the standards Table 5 1 GSM standards e 3GPP TS 45 004 Details on Modulation e 3GPP TS 45 005 General measurement specifications and limit values e 3GPP TS 45 010 Details on Synchronization and Timing e 3GPP TS 51 010 Detailed measurement specifications and limit values for mobile stations MS e 3GPP TS 51 021 Detailed measurement specifications and limit values for base transceiver stations BTS 5 2 Shor
361. page 59 Note This setting determines the appropriate limits from the 3GPP standard Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier lt c gt MTYPe on page 203 6 4 4 Input and Frontend Settings The R amp S FPS can evaluate signals from different input sources and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals The frequency and amplitude settings represent the frontend of the measurement setup e Radio Preduency np ucro ebur hee die 137 e Frequency Settlff ge uses aeree errare ec et Ent teg RE LA BER Ce LEER Ree cin 138 e Amplitude SUNIT cic cc cen rne pne c dte S 141 e Output SENGS EE 144 6 4 4 4 Radio Frequency Input The default input source for the R amp S FPS is Radio Frequency i e the signal at the RF INPUT connector This is the only available input source for MCWN measure ments Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Input Input d Source n_e _LLA__ __ _ SI aaa Radio Frequency Input Coupling Digital IQ Impedance YIG Preselector Mpu ero Uie ro EE 138 rat sore 138 Input Coupling The RF input of the R amp S FPS can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct cur rent DC AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must p
362. pecified in chapter 5 3GPP TS 45 004 see table 5 1 The figure below shows the modulation spectrum for both GMSK and 8PSK User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 48 5 3 Short Introduction to VAMOS Modulation Spectrum GMSK 8PSK 70 0 00 700 600 am en 300 200 100 H 100 200 300 400 so en 7o amp o Frequency Offset MHz Fig 5 2 GMSK and 8PSK modulation spectrum Increasing the bandwidth multiple slots GPRS HSCSD The customers demand for higher telecommunication speeds increases the demand for bandwidth Therefore the GSM standard has to evolve constantly An example of this development is the introduction of the EDGE EDGE Evolution specification and the GPRS EGPRS2 and HSCSD modes Until now each mobile could use only one slot per frame but the new HSCSD High Speed Circuit Switched Data and GPRS General Packet Radio Service methods will allow permanent assignment of more than one slot per mobile plus dynamic utilization of multiple slots The concept behind GPRS is dynamic assignment of up to 8 slots to each mobile for data transmission depending on demand and availability in the network HSCSD allows permanent assignment of up to 4 slots to a mobile Normal and higher symbol rates The modulation modes GMSK QPSK 8PSK 16QAM and 32QAM can be used with either normal or higher symbol rate and different Tx filters What is significant for the R amp S FPS GSM application in this respe
363. peration See Burst Type on page 96 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 332 or chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 336 Carrier The following commands are required to provide information on the carriers in the input signal CONFigure MS MCARrier CAbRb ier zcESTATel nennen 202 CONFigure MS MCARrier CAbRbler zc FREOuencn nnne 203 CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier c MTYPe eesssssssssssseseee eene enne nnne nnne 203 CONFloureM SlMC Arer EA Location 204 CONFigure MS MCARrier FALLocation NCONtiguous GSACarrier sees 205 CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier lt c gt STATe This command queries the activity of the selected carrier Note to activate a carrier define its absolute frequency using CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier c FREQuency on page 203 Suffix c 1 16 Active carrier Return values State ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF MCAR CARR3 Usage Query only Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Manual operation See Active carriers on page 99 CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier lt c gt FREQuency lt AbsFreq gt This command defines or queries the absolute frequency of the selected carrier Suffix lt c gt 1 16 Active carrier Parameters lt AbsFreq gt Frequency in Hz RST 0 Example CONF MCAR CARR3 FREQ 1GHZ Example See chapter 11 13 5
364. plate TALign PSL ge Spectrum Measurement settings Absolute power and limit remote results in dBm CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation LIMit ABSolute Use compact version of narrow frequency list to save time CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIST SELect NSParse 9592 2 Performing the Measurements INITiate IMMediate WAI Read trace data in binary format Programming Examples FORMat DATA REAL 32 Query current magnitude capture trace data TRACe1 DATA TRACe1 trace data Query the current power vs time trace TRACe2 DATA TRACe4 trace data Query the result of the power vs time limit check for max trace CALCulate2 LIMitl FAIL 1 Query max EVM trace data TRACe5 DATA TRACe2 trace data Query the maximum EVM value for slot 1 slot to measure in current measurement FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK CURR gt 0 62063819169998169 Query the maximum EVM value for slot 1 slot to measure in all 200 measured GSM frames FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK MAX 0 76938760280609131 Query the averaged EVM RMS value for slot 1 slot to measure in all 200 measured GSM frames FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS AVERage 0 19639170169830322 Query the absolute mod spectrum table results FETCH SPECtrum MODulation ALL gt 00 933200000 933200000 86 36 70 23 ABS PASSED Query the reference power of
365. ple READ BURS OSUP SDEV User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 285 Retrieving Results Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERCentile EVM READ BURSt MACCuracy PERCentile EVM This command starts the measurement and reads out the 95 percentile of the Error Vector Magnitude measurement taken over the selected number of frames When the measurement is started the R amp S FPS GSM application is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem Return values lt Result gt numeric value Default unit NONE Example READ BURS PERC EVM Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERCentile MERRor READ BURSIt MACCuracy PERCentile MERRor This command starts the measurement and reads out the 95 96 percentile of the Mag nitude Error measurement taken over the selected number of frames When the measurement is started the R amp S FPS GSM application is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem Return values Result numeric value Default unit NONE Example READ BURS PERC MERR Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERCentile PERRor READ BURSt MACCuracy PERCentile PERRor This command starts the measurement and reads out the 95 percenti
366. pter 6 3 7 1 Slot Scope on page 118 e Use a small statistic count see Statistic Count on page 117 Note MSRA operating mode 6 3 6 2 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master channel actually captures data from the input signal The Capture Time for the R amp S FPS GSM application in MSRA mode defines the length of the application data extract see also chapter 5 17 GSM in MSRA Operating Mode on page 82 For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FPS MSRA User Manual The Capture Time can also be defined using the softkey which is available from the SPAN BW or SWEEP menus Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME on page 220 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 220 Capture Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA operating mode It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements it defines the time offset between the capture buffer start and the start of the extracted application data In MSRA mode the offset must be a positive value as the capture buffer starts at the trigger time 0 Remote command SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet on page 266 Swap UO Activates or deactivates the inverted UO modulation If the and Q parts of the signal from the DUT are interchanged the R amp S FPS can do the same to compensate for it Tip Try this function if the TSC can not be found On and Q signals are interch
367. r the other repeatedly regardless of the channel s sweep mode in the same order until the Sequencer is stopped CDEFined First a single sequence is performed Then only those channels in continuous sweep mode INIT CONT ON are repeated RST CONTinuous Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements Manual operation See Sequencer Mode on page 86 SENSe BURSt COUNt lt Count gt SENSe SWEep COUNt lt SweepCount gt These commands define the number of measurements the R amp S FPS uses to average traces In case of continuous sweep measurements the R amp S FPS calculates the moving aver age over the Statistic Count In case of single sweep measurements the R amp S FPS stops the measurement and cal culates the average after Statistic Count measurements Parameters lt SweepCount gt If you set a sweep count of 0 or 1 the R amp S FPS performs one single measurement Range 0 to 32767 RST 200 Example SWE COUN 64 Sets the number of measurements to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT OPC Starts a series of 64 measurements and waits till its end Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Statistic Count on page 117 See Noise Average Count on page 152 SENSe SWEep CO
368. rches for a frame start after every UO data acquisition The required search effort depends on the trigger mode Consider the following trigger mode settings e n Free Run mode i e without any trigger the GSM application totally relies on the frame slot configuration to find the frame start The start of a measurement is not triggered Once a measurement is completed another is started immediately For an unambiguous frame configuration the GSM application searches for the frame start inside the captured UO data This is the slowest frame search mode e With a Power Trigger the measurement is triggered by the power ramp of the received GSM bursts Nevertheless the GSM application still relies on the frame slot configuration to find the frame start inside the captured UO data Once a mea surement is completed the GSM application waits for the next trigger event to start the next measurement The search for the frame start is as in Free Run mode except that the I Q data capture is triggered e With the External Trigger the measurement is triggered by an external signal connected to the EXT TRIGGER input of the R amp S FPS The GSM application assumes that the frame start i e the active part in slot 0 directly follows the trig ger event An external trigger requires a correct setting of the trigger offset The search is faster compared to the free run and power trigger modes Use an exter nal trigger to maximize the measu
369. rd the center of the pulse occurs at 2 5 T where T is the normal symbol period NSP The baseband signal due to a sequence of symbols is defined in the standard as Definition of the Symbol Period y t S cg t iT 2T Baseband signal due to a sequence of symbols 5 2 where C t the transmit pulse Note that the standard 3GPP TS 45 004 specifies in chapter 3 5 Pulse shaping for normal burst 8PSK 16QAM and 32QAM The time reference t 0 is the start of the active part of the burst as shown in figure 3 This is also the start of the symbol period of symbol number 0 containing the first tail bit as defined in 3GPP TS 45 002 For normal burst AQPSK the standard 3GPP TS 45 004 specifies in chapter 6 5 Pulse shaping The time reference t 0 is the start of the active part of the burst as shown in figure 6 This is also the start of the symbol period of symbol number 0 containing the first tail bit as defined in 3GPP TS 45 002 The transmitted pulse for the first tail symbol is illustrated in the lower part of fig ure 5 13 where it can be seen that the decision instant corresponding to the center of the transmit pulse occurs in the center of the first symbol period i e at t 0 5T EDGE Transmit Pulse 19 E oa N E 1 ao s 0 5 E T 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 Time Symbol Periods First Transmitted Symbol Amplitude P 1 5 2 Decision Instant E 1 o E a 305 Symbol P
370. reEMS AUTO TRIGOer ONCGE trt treten tree ra ene rr seen Herne rere EE ee IER Le EEN GONFigureE MS BS THreshold tute erre nte p cere i o apt ern rts GONFigureEMSI CHANnelERAMe EQUGal 2 hn nete rr trecenti orbe rh inn CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots MEASure CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOF Slots GONFigureEMSI CHANnelLMSLots OFF Set t rrt crt rhe nean rrr ea cnr ene d eR ER RR ER Eon ge CONFigureE MST GHANnelSEOT N mber FIL Ter narra teer eren euentus CONFigure MS CHANnelSEOT Number MT YPe iere hte t ns CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt TADVance CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT N mber T YE cnet oo en entrer nhe men npn tert tt torre ges CONFigure MS CHANnel SEOT Number S TATe 2 tnn enn tnt tnnt rhe tnt rn GONFigureE MS CHANnel SEOT ss EE COhNFourel M lCHANnel GL OTegzsGUlBChannelcchz T CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT s SUBChannel ch TSC USER seen 198 CONFIgure RER a WEE CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt TSC USER m CONFigur eliMS DEMOd DE e LTE tere le EE MS RT ET BR RE e ele ON RTE d E CONFigure iIMS MCARrIerAC lGarTIers e icone eter nm hh enn rne cnn er sober suet teens CONFigure MS MGARIIERB Re E CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier lt c gt F REQU6nCy orant ntn tnnt tet rn rana enn nn 203 CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier lt c gt MTYPe CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier c
371. red distortion products for the frequen cies outside of the subblocks but not in the gap for non contiguous carrier allocation For details see Outer Narrowband Table on page 39 For each measured offset frequency the following values are returned Return values lt FreqAbs gt numeric value Absolute frequency of distortion Default unit Hz lt FreqRel gt numeric value Frequency offsets from the closest carrier at which distortion power is measured Default unit Hz lt RBW gt numeric value Resolution bandwidth used for measurement Default unit Hz Retrieving Results lt Power gt numeric value Absolute or relative power level to reference power measured at distortion frequency Default unit dBm dB lt Limit gt numeric value Absolute or relative power level limit to reference power Default unit dBm dB lt AbsRelMode gt ABS REL Determines whether absolute or relative power values are returned lt LimCheck gt Result of the limit check at this offset frequency PASSED power within limits FAILED power exceeds limit Example FETC WSP NARR OUT Usage Query only Manual operation See Outer Narrowband Table on page 39 FETCh WSPectrum REFerence POWer ALL This command returns the measured power levels and reference powers of all active carriers Return values lt CarrNo gt integer Active carrier number Range 1 16 lt RefType gt Indicates whether carrier is used for refe
372. rement speed or if the frame configuration is ambiguous i e if the slot properties are cyclic with a cycle less than the frame duration Defining the Scope of the Measurement a Trigger source for MSRA Master Any trigger source other than Free Run defined for the MSRA Master is ignored when determining the frame start in the R amp S FPS GSM application For this purpose the trigger is considered to be in Free Run mode Refer to chapter 6 3 5 Trigger Settings on page 108 to learn more about appropri ate trigger settings and to chapter 6 3 3 Signal Description on page 91 for informa tion on the frame slot configuration Refer to Automatic Trigger Offset on page 130 to learn more about setting the trigger offset automatically Defining the Scope of the Measurement The R amp S FPS GSM application is slot based It can measure up to 8 consecutive GSM slots 1 frame and store the power results for all slots Power vs Time and Power vs Slot measurements see PvT Full Burst on page 27 and Power vs Slot on page 26 In previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers the term burst was used synony mously for slot In this documentation we use the term burst when the signal behaves like a pulse i e power is ramped up and down The up ramp is referred to as the rising edge the down ramp as the falling edge A burst may occur within one or more slots which is a measure of time in the captured signal T
373. rements Carrier Selection Carrier Specifies the carrier at which the reference powers for the MCWN measurement are measured if reference power measurement is enabled see Enabling a reference power measurement Measure on page 153 In Auto mode the carrier with the maximum power level is selected as a reference In Manual mode you must specify the carrier to be used as a reference in the Car rier field All active carriers can be selected see Active carriers on page 99 Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence CARRier AUTO on page 243 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence CARRier NUMBer on page 243 Defining Reference Powers Manually Alternatively to performing a measurement to determine the reference powers for MCWN measurements you can define them manually Note that reference power levels depend on the modulation characteristics For details see chapter 5 15 3 Manual Reference Power Definition for MCWN Measurements on page 74 Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence MEASure on page 244 Power Level Defining Reference Powers Manually Manually defined carrier power level to be used as a reference for MCWN measure ments If reference measurement is enabled see Enabling a reference power measurement Measure on page 153 this value is displayed for information only Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence PLEVel on page 244
374. rence REF carrier selected for reference power MAX carrier has the highest power level is used for reference power NONE normal carrier not used for reference RST RST value lt AbsCarrFreq gt numeric value Absolute frequency at which power was measured Default unit Hz Retrieving Results lt AbsPow gt numeric value Measured power level absolute Default unit dBm lt AbsRef300 gt numeric value Reference power level absolute in a 300 kHz RBW Default unit dBm lt AbsRef100 gt numeric value Reference power level absolute in a 100 kHz RBW Default unit dBm AbsRef30 numeric value Reference power level absolute in a 30 kHz RBW Default unit dBm Example FETC WSP REF POW Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 341 Usage Query only Manual operation See Carrier Power Table on page 36 FETCh WSPectrum WIDEband INNer ALL This command queries the numeric results of the wideband noise measurement for the frequencies in the gap between the GSM carrier subblocks for non contiguous carrier allocation For details see Outer Wideband Table on page 42 For each limit line segment the following values are returned Return values lt StartFreqAbs gt numeric value Absolute start frequency of limit line segment Default unit Hz lt StopFreqAbs gt numeric value Absolute stop frequency of limit line segment Default u
375. reset Channel Table 6 1 Default settings for GSM channels Parameter Value Measurement type Modulation accuracy Sweep mode CONTINUOUS Trigger settings FREE RUN Device type BTS Normal Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Parameter Value Power class 1 Frequency band E GSM 900 Modulation NB GMSK Capture time 100 0 ms Swap UO Off Statistic count 200 Slot to Measure 0 No slots to measure 1 First slot to measure 0 Synchronization Burst TSC TSC TSC 0 Set 1 Measure only on sync Evaluations Off Window 1 Magnitude Capture Window 2 PvT Full Burst Window 3 Modulation Accuracy Window 4 Power vs Slot Table 6 2 Default traces depending on result display Result display Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Magnitude Capture Clear Write S Power vs Time Average EVM vs Time Phase Error vs Time Magnitude Error vs Time Max Hold Min Hold Clear Write Constellation Graph Clear Write Modulation Spec Average trum Graph Clear Write Transient Spectrum Graph Clear Write Trigger to Sync Graph PDF of Average 6 3 2 CH Ee Overview Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Configuration Overview Throughout the measurement channel configuration an overview of the most important currently defined settings is provided in the
376. revious one Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FPS saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one Average The average is formed over several sweeps The Statistic Count determines the number of averaging procedures PDFAvg Displays the probability density function PDF of the average value Blank Removes the selected trace from the display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 256 Preset All Traces Restores the active traces and trace modes defined by the default settings for the active result displays see table 6 2 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys Displays the Traces settings and focuses the Mode list for the selected trace Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t STATe on page 255 Markers Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values in the diagram Thus you can extract numeric values from a graphical display Up to 4 markers can be configured 7 1 2 1 Result Configuration Markers are configured in the Marker dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Inthe Overview select Result Config and switch to the vertical Marker tab Press the MEAS CONFIG MKR or MKR TO key then select the Marker Config softkey Individual Marker Settings EE 160 General Marker SGUINOS E
377. rmined Modulation Spectrum values in the average Avg trace can be checked against limits defined by the standard the limit lines and the result of the limit check are indicated in the Modulation Spectrum diagram see Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 22 The GSM standards define both absolute and relative limits for the spectrum The limit check is considered to fail if both limits are exceeded The limits depend on the following parameters Frequency band Device Type only BTS type not MS type e Burst Type Modulation Filter limits are different for Higher Symbol Rate and Wide Pulse Filter case 2 and others case 1 see 3GPP TS 45 005 chapter 4 2 1 3 Limit Checks e The measured reference power 30 kHz bandwidth e The measured burst power power level e Number of active carriers for multicarrier BTS The limit is relaxed by 10 log10 N dB for offset frequencies 21 8 MHz see 3GPP TS 45 005 chapter 4 2 1 2 5 13 2 Limit Check for Transient Spectrum The determined Transient Spectrum Accuracy values can be checked against limits defined by the standard the limit lines and the result of the limit check are indicated in the Transient Spectrum diagram see Transient Spectrum Graph on page 29 The limits depend on the following parameters e Graph Limit check of maximum Max trace e Table Limit check of absolute and relative scalar values The limit masks are generated adaptively from the measured
378. rotect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 205 Impedance For MCWN measurements the impedance is always 50 Q 6 4 4 2 Frequency Settings The frequency span to be measured can be defined using a start and stop frequency or a center frequency and span alternatively it can be set to a specific characteristic value automatically Frequency and span settings can be configured via the Frequency dialog box which is displayed when you press the FREQ or SPAN key and then select Frequency Con fig Frequency Band Input Source Band Frequen Center Span Start Stop 942 5 MHz 39 0 MHz Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Frequency Amplitude Output E GSM 900 SR Tx Band 923 0 MHz 962 0 MHz Fre quen MITES 0 0 Hz Carriers 1 8 MHz Carriers 6 MHz The frequency band defines the frequency range used to transmit the signal For details see Frequency bands and channels on page 46 The following frequency bands are supported T GSM 380 T GSM 410 GSM 450 GSM 480 GSM 710 GSM 750 T GSM 810 GSM 850 P GSM 900 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements E GSM 900 R GSM 900 T GSM 900 DCS 1800 PCS 1900 The default frequency band is E GSM 900 Remote command CONFigure MS NETWork TYPE on page 192 CONFigure MS NETWork FREQuency BAND on p
379. rrier Wideband Noise Measurements The UO data captured by the default GSM I Q measurement includes magnitude and phase information which allows the R amp S FPS GSM application to demodulate signals and determine various characteristic signal parameters such as the modulation accu racy modulation or transient spectrum in just one measurement As the result of a swept measurement on the other hand the signal cannot be demodulated based on the power vs frequency trace data Frequency sweep mea surements can tune on a constant frequency Zero span measurement or sweep a frequency range Frequency sweep measurement ES User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 33 Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurements For multicarrier measurements the GSM standard defines limits for some parameters concerning noise and intermodulation products Thus a new separate measurement is provided by the R amp S FPS GSM application the Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measure ment MCWN This measurement comprises e Q based measurements on the carriers to determine their power levels and refer ence powers e Frequency sweeps with RBWs of 100 kHz to measure wideband noise and 300 kHz to measure intermodulation products e Gated zero span measurements with an RBW of 30 kHz to measure narrowband noise D MCWN measurements and MSRA mode MCWN measurements are only available in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer operating mode not in MSRA mode see chapter 5 17
380. s Basically the segments are those defined in the tables in section 6 5 1 and follow ing of the 3GPP TS 51 021 standard The frequency offsets defined there are applied relative to all outermost carriers i e below the lowest carrier and above the highest carrier For non contiguous mode the same principle is applied in the gap Theresulting segments can be limited further by the defined span see chap ter 6 4 4 2 Frequency Settings on page 138 Note If the span is too small no wideband noise results can be calculated For a measurement according to standard set the span to the TX band automatically see Setting the Span to Specific Values Automatically on page 140 e The segments are also limited by the maximum range demanded by the GSM standard 10 MHz outside the edge of the relevant transmit band e Adjacent segments are not merged to one large segment even if their limit values happen to be identical The R amp S FPS GSM application calculates where the standard demands intermo dulation measurements instead of wideband noise measurement It does not mat ter whether the intermodulation measurement is actually enabled or disabled in the Noise Measurement Settings All determined IM ranges override a wideband mea surement and replace it This can make the wideband noise measurement seg ment start later end earlier or even vanish completely or be separated in several segments The middle of the gap is
381. s e Threshold rrt rmn T Tail bits Reference SIGMA uidere eec Et reet ci ein e oth 123 TOMA qm 45 46 345 Time em E 65 Reference PVT rtis ie tane er ped 53 OI Ee in 53 Limit lines se 125 Ou eet EE 65 gl Us WE KE Limit lines Traces reien Configuring Default Mode iis ends ac cies cs T Mode remote ett ae RR dna ER 256 Number of result values sspe menarian 274 Presetting a c 24199 e Pelei Er TE s 159 Statistical evaluation MSRA mode cceeeeeeeeeee 83 Training Sequence See SG esoe exc che ape eg 97 Transient Spectrum Graph results remote teen Graph evaluation method Limit ee Reference DOWER score crt nete e dne ode Seltligs 15 e nets Table results remote Table evaluation method Trigger le E NO 130 Conditions remote ricis 213 Configuration Softkey ssssssssss 108 146 Drop out time 112 149 Extern l iaascisescezecivesaseiziccasek ctas gast eade a diaz 52 121 External remote Sachse 216 Free RUM siii eati doe ttov re te etii ren a edo COR eee 52 Holdoff 113 150 ysteresis iss niece toe iaaa iin geg 112 150 UE o 53 Offset eee 112 149 Offset synchronization sssini 121 Output 107 113 145 150 xe lt 52 121 Remote control 4 213 239 E EE 52 TE 112 150 216 MIG GEHICVE EE 112 149 External trigger remote
382. s Parameters lt Value gt lt numeric value gt RST depends on the result display The unit and range depend on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DISP TRAC Y MAX 0 Defines the y axis with a minimum value of 60 and maximum value of 0 Manual operation See Absolute Scaling Min Max Values on page 164 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum Value This command defines the minimum value of the y axis for all traces in the selected result display The suffix t is irrelevant Parameters Value numeric value RST depends on the result display The unit and range depend on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DISP TRAC Y MAX 0 Defines the y axis with a minimum value of 60 and maximum value of 0 Manual operation See Absolute Scaling Min Max Values on page 164 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision Value This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y axis for all diagrams where possible The suffix t is irrelevant Parameters Value numeric value WITHOUT UNIT unit according to the result dis play Defines the range per division total range 10 lt Value gt RST depends on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y PDIV 10 Sets the grid spacing to 10 units e g dB per division Manual operation See Per Division on page 164 Analyzing GSM Measurements DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t g
383. s if the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level Parameters lt Attenuation gt Range see data sheet Increment 5dB RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Example INP ATT 30dB Defines a 30 dB attenuation and decouples the attenuation from the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 105 INPut ATTenuation AUTO lt State gt This command couples or decouples the attenuation to the reference level Thus when the reference level is changed the R amp S FPS determines the signal level for optimal internal data processing and sets the required attenuation accordingly Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation to the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 105 INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines an electronic attenuation manually Automatic mode must be switched off INP EATT AUTO OFF see INPut EATT AUTO on page 212 If the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level Parameters lt Attenuation gt attenuation in dB Range see data sheet Increment 1 dB RST 0 dB OFF Example INP EATT AUTO OFF INP EA
384. s RegISISIS rore ert e d n e a 319 STATus QUEStionable SYNC Register The STATus QUEStionable SYNC register contains application specific information about synchronization errors or errors during symbol detection If any errors occur in this register the status bit 11 in the STATus QUEStionable register is set to 1 Each active channel uses a separate STATus QUEStionable SYNC register Thus if the status bit 11 in the STATus QUESt ionable register indicates an error the error may have occurred in any of the channel specific STATus QUEStionable SYNC reg isters In this case you must check the register of each channel to determine which channel caused the error By default querying the status of a register always returns the result for the currently selected channel However you can specify any other chan nel name as a query parameter Table 11 7 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable SYNC register Bit No Meaning 0 BURSt not found This bit is set if no burst is found in the measurements premeasurements for phase frequency error or carrier power vs time 1 SYNC not found This bit is set if the synchronization sequence or training sequence of the TSC is not found in the measurements premeasurements for phase frequency error or carrier power vs time 2 No carrier This bit is set when no carriers are found by the auto frequency sequence 3 to 14 These bits are not used
385. s a data block of indefinite length The use of the indefinite for mat requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length 11 2 Common Suffixes In the GSM application the following common suffixes are used in remote commands Suffix Value range Description m 1 4 Marker n 1 16 Window lt s gt 0 7 Slot t 1 4 Trace 11 3 Activating GSM Measurements GSM measurements require a special application on the R amp S FPS A measurement is started immediately with the default settings INS Timeo Bate DU PR Cate ccs 1 cerco A EE 186 INS Trament CRESE EE 186 INSTrument CREate REPLACE nnne nnnnnnin rni sana pee sasa sas k a sana daas saa dn 186 Activating GSM Measurements INS TramenbDELele hoes ies ENEE 187 INSTrument LIS T2 nit oo rie nex IR peter E RR Ene eran b RR Iu De E E RERE 187 kee Beni 188 INST Tote E D E 189 SYSTem PRESet CHANnsI EXECUte 2 12 1c ertt Loa tlc connus c cci n aspe 2 YR d dade dd 189 AH Re EEN 189 INSTrument CREate DUPLicate This command duplicates the currently selected measurement channel i e creates a new measurement channel of the same type and with the identical measurement set tings The name of the new channel is the same as the copied channel extended by a consecutive number e
386. s enemies nnns 268 e Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results 316 e Status Repot ng System sees iia edi cedi sedi n de 317 Neie ee de EE 322 e Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility 323 Programming Examples cossiros enia eerie deo eed ed 331 Introduction Commands are program messages that a controller e g a PC sends to the instru ment or software They operate its functions setting commands or events and request information query commands Some commands can only be used in one way others work in two ways setting and query If not indicated otherwise the com mands can be used for settings and queries The syntax of a SCPI command consists of a header and in most cases one or more parameters To use a command as a query you have to append a question mark after the last header element even if the command contains a parameter A header contains one or more keywords separated by a colon Header and parame ters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank Introduction If there is more than one parameter for a command these are separated by a comma from one another Only the most important characteristics that you need to know when working with SCPI commands are described here For a more complete description refer to the User Manual of the R amp S FPS Remote command examples Note that some remote command examp
387. s see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FPS User Manual 8 2 How to Export and Import I Q Data UO data can only be exported in applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications Capturing and exporting UO data 1 Press the PRESET key 2 Press the MODE key and select the IQ Analyzer or any other application that supports UO data 3 Configure the data acquisition 4 Press the RUN SINGLE key to perform a single sweep measurement 5 Select the EJ Save icon in the toolbar How to Export and Import UO Data 6 Select the UO Export softkey 7 Inthe file selection dialog box select a storage location and enter a file name 8 Select Save The captured data is stored to a file with the extension ig tar Importing UO data 1 Press the MODE key and select the IQ Analyzer or any other application that supports UO data If necessary switch to single sweep mode by pressing the RUN SINGLE key Select the FJ Open icon in the toolbar Select the I Q Import softkey Select the storage location and the file name with the iq tar file extension o m Ro N Select Open The stored data is loaded from the file and displayed in the current application Previewing the UO data in a web browser The iq tar file format allows you to preview the I Q data in a web browser 1 Use an archive tool e g WinZip or PowerArchi
388. se e Wide Pulse For access bursts only a GMSK Pulse filter is supported Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt FILTer on page 196 Timing Advance Access Burst only Specifies the position of an access burst within a single slot as an offset in symbols from the slot start Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt TADVance on page 199 Training Sequence TSC Sync Note for Access bursts this setting is labelled Sync but the functionality is the same The Training Sequence TSC or Sync values are known symbol sequences used to synchronize the measured signal with the expected input signal in a single slot The available values depend on the modulation as indicated in the table below For user defined TSCs select User and define the training sequence in the User TSC User Sync table For more information on TSCs see Training sequences TSCs on page 50 Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt TSC on page 200 AQPSK CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt SUBChannel lt ch gt TSC on page 199 User TSC User Sync Note for Access bursts this setting is labelled User Sync but the functionality is the same Defines the bits of the user defined TSC or Sync The number of bits depend on the burst type and the modulation and is indicated in table 6 3 For AQPSK modulation the training sequence is defined for each subchannel see chapter 5 4 AQPSK Modulati
389. sed GMSK Pulse NARRow Narrow Pulse WIDE Wide Pulse RST GMSK Example CONF CHAN SLOT FILT GMSK Manual operation See Filter on page 96 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 332 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt STATe State This command activates this slot this means that e g this slot is not considered as inactive in the PvT evaluation Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Suffix lt Number gt lt 0 7 gt Select the slot to configure Parameters for setting and query lt State gt ON OFF Example CONF CHAN SLOT ON Manual operation See Slot State On Off on page 96 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 332 or chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 336 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt MTYPe lt Modulation gt This command specifies the modulation type Suffix lt Number gt lt 0 7 gt the slot to configure Parameters for setting and query lt Modulation gt GMSK GMSK Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying 1 bit symbol QPSK QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift keying 2 bits symbol PSK8 8PSK EDGE Phase Shift Keying 3 bits symbol QAM16 16QAM 16 ary Quadrature Amplitude Modulation 4 bits symbol QAM32 32QAM 16 ary Quadrature Amplitude Modulation 5 bits symbol
390. seems to take a long time try the following tips Using external triggers to mark the frame start The R amp S FPS GSM application needs the frame start as a time reference It either searches for a frame start after every UO data acquisition or relies on a trigger event that marks the frame start An external trigger or a power trigger that mark the frame start can speed up measurements See also chapter 5 5 Trigger settings on page 52 In MSRA mode trigger events are not considered when determining the frame start in a GSM measurement as the trigger is defined by the MSRA Master for all applications simultaneously and most likely does not coincede with the frame start for the GSM sig nal Avoiding unnecessary high sample rates According to the GSM standard modulation spectrum results must be performed at frequencies up to 6 MHz from the carrier in some cases When the frequency list to be used is set to 6 MHz in the Measurement settings see Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List on page 127 the R amp S FPS GSM application uses a sample rate of 19 5 MHz as opposed to the usual 6 5 MHz sample rate The higher sample rate extends the required measurement time Only use the 6 MHz frequency list setting if you actually require Modulation Spectrum results according to standard Improving EVM Accuracy If the EVM results show unexpected power levels check the following issues R amp S FPS K10 Optimizing and Troublesho
391. sented by OFF or the numeric value 0 Querying boolean parameters When you query boolean parameters the system returns either the value 1 ON or the value 0 OFF Example Setting DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe ON Query DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe would return 1 Character Data Character data follows the syntactic rules of keywords You can enter text using a short or a long form For more information see chapter 11 1 2 Long and Short Form on page 182 Querying text parameters When you query text parameters the system returns its short form Common Suffixes Example Setting SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE NORMal Query SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE would return NORM 11 1 6 4 Character Strings Strings are alphanumeric characters They have to be in straight quotation marks You can use a single quotation mark or a double quotation mark Example INSTRument DELete Spectrum 11 1 6 5 Block Data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data The ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 follow ing digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the trans mission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted 0 specifie
392. set MHz Frequency offsets from the closest carrier at which intermodulation power is measured Freq MHz Absolute frequency of intermodulation product Order Order of intermodulation product RBW kHz Resolution bandwidth used for measurement nes User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 38 Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurements Result Description dB relative power level to reference power measured at IM frequency dBm absolute power level measured at IM frequency A to Limit power difference to limit defined in standard negative values indicate limit check failed If Intermodulation is off this table is empty Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH OIMP see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 249 Results FETCh WSPectrum IMPRoducts OUTer ALL on page 307 Inner Narrow Band Table Similar to the Outer Narrowband Table however the measured distortion products in the gap between the GSM carrier blocks are displayed for non contiguous carrier allo cation The frequency offsets are defined as offsets from the closest carrier i e the uppermost carrier of the lower sub block and the lowermost carrier of the upper sub block Offsets are lower than 1 8 MHz 400 KHz 600 KHz 1200 KHz The rows are sorted in ascending order of the absolute measurement frequency For contiguous carrier allocation or if narrowband noise measurement is disabled this table is empty Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH IN
393. similar to the INITiate lt n gt IMMediate command used for a single measurement Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 189 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements Usage Event Manual operation See Sequencer State on page 86 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer MODE lt Mode gt This command selects the way the R amp S FPS application performs measurements sequentially Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 189 A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FPS User Manual Note In order to synchronize to the end of a sequential measurement using OPC OPC or WAI you must use SING1e Sequence mode For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FPS User Manual Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Mode SINGIe Each measurement is performed once regardless of the chan nel s sweep mode considering each channels sweep count until all measurements in all active channels have been per formed CONTinuous The measurements in each active channel are performed one afte
394. sing the softkeys in the GSM menu Now you can analyze the Magnitude Error Phase Error or EVM for that slot 14 Compare the current results of the EVM with those of previous measurements to find out if the error occurs only sporadically or repeatedly R amp S FPS K10 How to Perform Measurements in the GSM Application 9 3 How to Analyze the Power in GSM Signals 1 Press the MODE key and select the GSM application 2 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for a GSM measurement 3 Select the Signal Description button and configure the expected signal by defin ing the used device and slot characteristics as well as the modulation e Define the expected burst type and modulation for each active slot e Define the training sequences or syncs with which each slot will be compared to synchronize the measured data with the expected data e For AQPSK modulated signals define a TSC for each subchannel and each active slot e For access bursts also define a Timing Advance i e the position of the burst within the slot e For signals from base stations capable of using multiple carriers define addi tional settings on the Multicarrier tab 4 Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s frequency band and center frequency 5 Select the Amplitude tab in the Input Frontend dialog box to define the correct power class for the base station or mobile devi
395. st type Note The Slot settings are dependant on each other and only specific combinations of these parameters are available in this dialog box see chapter 5 8 Dependency of Slot Parameters on page 59 Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt TYPE on page 202 Modulation Defines the modulation used in the slot The possible modulations depend on the set burst type see chapter 5 8 Dependency of Slot Parameters on page 59 The graphical slot structure is adapted according to the selected modulation Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt MTYPe on page 197 SCPIR This parameter is only available for AQPSK modulation It specifies the Subchannel Power Imbalance Ratio SCPIR The value of SCPIR affects the shape of the AQPSK constellation see chapter 5 4 AQPSK Modulation on page 51 For an SCPIR of 0 dB the constellation is square as in normal QPSK while for other values of SCPIR the constellation becomes rectangular Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt SCPir on page 197 Filter Specifies the pulse shape of the modulator on the DUT and thus the measurement fil ter in the R amp S FPS GSM application For details see chapter 5 7 3 Measurement Filter on page 58 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration The following filter types are supported for normal and higher symbol rate bursts e GMSK Pulse e Linearised GMSK Pulse Narrow Pul
396. strictly standard conformant multiple slot PvT limit line check This is based on time alignment to a single specified slot the Slot to Measure and allows the user to check for correct BTS timeslot alignment in the DUT according to the GSM standard In addition a less stringent test which performs PvT limit line alignment on a per slot basis Per Slot is also available Note When measuring access bursts the parameter Limit Time Alignment should be set to Per Slot since the position of an access burst within a slot depends on the set timing advance of the DUT Remote command CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate TALign on page 233 6 3 8 2 Spectrum The modulation and transient spectrum measurements allow for further configuration Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Power vs Time Spectrum Common Settings Modulation amp Transient Spectrum Enable Left Limit on Enable Right Limit On Filter Type Normal 3dB l 5 Pole Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List 1 8 MHz sparse Transient Spectrum Reference Power Enable eft Limit Enable Right ENTE aaa iii dette tech trente 126 alc C ate 126 Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List sess 127 Transient Spectrum Reference PONWOLE rnt AER ENEEAAEEE 127 Enable Left Limit Enable Right Limit Controls whether the results for the frequencies to the left or to the right of the center freq
397. t Y SCALe RPOSition Position This command defines the vertical position of the reference level on the display grid for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant The R amp S FPS adjusts the scaling of the y axis accordingly Parameters lt Position gt 0 PCT corresponds to the lower display border 100 corre sponds to the upper display border RST 100 PCT frequency display 50 PCT time dis play Example DISP TRAC Y RPOS 50PCT Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Ref Position on page 164 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue Value The command defines the power value assigned to the reference position in the grid for all traces t is irrelevant For external generator calibration measurements requires the optional External Gen erator Control this command defines the power offset value assigned to the reference position Parameters Value RST 0 dBm coupled to reference level Example DISP TRAC Y RVAL 20dBm Sets the power value assigned to the reference position to 20 dBm Manual operation See Ref Value on page 164 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue MAXimum Value This command defines the maximum value on the y axis for all traces in the specified window The suffix t is irrelevant Parameters Value numeric value Default unit dBm DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue MINimum Value This com
398. t FIETer YIG STATO itr ccr uio rer esee eee oec va cnc cora eoe eaves 206 eise le 206 INP et H 207 INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt This command selects the coupling type of the RF input Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC AC coupling DC DC coupling RST AC Example INP COUP DC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Coupling on page 100 INPut DPATh lt State gt Enables or disables the use of the direct path for frequencies close to 0 Hz Parameters lt State gt AUTO 1 Default the direct path is used automatically for frequencies close to 0 Hz OFF 0 The analog mixer path is always used RST 1 Example INP DPAT OFF Usage SCPI confirmed INPut FILTer YIG STATe State This command turns the YIG preselector on and off Note the special conditions and restrictions for the YIG filter described in YIG Prese lector on page 101 Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 0 for UO Analyzer GSM VSA and MC Group Delay measurements Example INP FILT YIG OFF Deactivates the YIG preselector Manual operation See YIG Preselector on page 101 INPut IMPedance Impedance This command selects the nominal input impedance of the RF input Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher imp
399. t Radio and support of additional modulation coding schemes and higher symbol rate FDMA Frequency Division Multiplex Access GMSK Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying GPRS General Packet Radio Service GSM Global System for Mobile Communication HSCSD High Speed Circuit Switch Data IF Intermediate Frequency MS Mobile Station NSP Normal Symbol Period PCL Power Control Level PDF Probability Density Function PVT Power vs Time QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying Q Data File Format iq tar SCPIR Subchannel Power Imbalance Ratio SFH Slow Frequency Hopping TDMA Time Division Multiplex Access TSC Training Sequence Code UL Uplink BTS to MS VAMOS Voice services over Adaptive Multi user Channels on One Slot YIG Yttrium Iron Garnet A 2 VQ Data File Format iq tar UO data is packed in a file with the extension iq tar An ig tar file contains UO data in binary format together with meta information that describes the nature and the source of data e g the sample rate The objective of the iq tar file format is to separate UO data from the meta information while still having both inside one file In addition the file format allows you to preview the UO data in a web browser and allows you to include user specific data The iq tar container packs several files into a single tar archive file Files in tar format can be unpacked using standard archive tools see http en wikipedia org wiki Comparis
400. t capturing data only when a useful signal is transmitted For external triggers do not forget to set the correct Trigger Offset to the beginning of the GSM frame 7 Optionally to perform statistical evaluation over several measurements switch to the Sweep tab in the Data Acquisition dialog box and define a Statistics Count 8 Select the Demodulation button to determine how bursts are detected and demodulated 9 Select the Display Config button and activate one or more of the following result displays for modulation accuracy and error parameters up to a total of 16 win dows e Modulation Accuracy e EVM e Magnitude Error e Phase Error Tip Also activate the Magnitude Capture result display for a general overview of the measured data Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 10 Exit the SmartGrid mode 11 Start a new sweep with the defined settings e To perform a single measurement press the RUN SINGLE key e To start a new continuous measurement press the RUN CONT key 12 Check the Magnitude Capture for irregular behavior e g an unexpected rise or fall in power If such an effect occurs determine whether it occured in the current slot Scope and current slot to measure compare the green and blue bars beneath the trace If necessary zoom into the display to view it in greater detail 13 If necessary change the slot scope or slot to measure to display the slot of inter est e g u
401. t introduction to GSM GMSK EDGE and EDGE Evolution The GSM Global System for Mobile Communication standard describes the GSM mobile radio network that is in widespread use today In a first step to enhance this network 8PSK modulation has been defined in addition to the existing GMSK Gaus sian Minimum Shift Keying modulation With 8PSK the mobile or base station oper ates in the EDGE mode While the 8PSK modulation transmits 3 bits within a symbol GMSK can only transmit 1 bit within a symbol In a second step to enhance this network higher symbol rate HSR QPSK 16QAM and 32QAM modulation narrow and wide pulse shapes for the Tx filter have been defined Here EDGE Evolution and EGPRS2 are synonyms for this second enhance ment This means that GSM includes different modes GMSK EDGE and EDGE Evolution The terms EDGE and EDGE Evolution are used here only when there are significant differences between the modes In all other cases the term GSM is used Time domain vs frequency domain A TDMA Time Division Multiple Access and FDMA Frequency Division Multiple Access scheme is used to transfer data in the GSM network This means that the digi tal information is transmitted discretely in the time domain mainly used to distinguish User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 45 Short introduction to GSM GMSK EDGE and EDGE Evolution between different users as well as in the frequency domain mainly used to distinguish between B
402. t synchronization to the end of the measurement is possible only in single sweep mode For a description of the trace modes see the Trace Mode Overview section in the base unit manual Parameters Mode AVERage The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Aver age Count determines the number of averaging procedures BLANk Hides the selected trace MAXHold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FPS saves the sweep result in the trace mem ory only if the new value is greater than the previous one MINHold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FPS saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one PDFavg The probability density function PDF of the average value WRITe Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep Analyzing GSM Measurements Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM JI Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Modulation spectrum graph measurement LAY ADD WIND 1 RIGH MSFD Result 2 INITiate IMMediate JI Switch off the display of all available traces DISPlay WINDow2 TRACel MODE BLANk DISPlay WINDow2 TRACe2 MODE BLANk Switch on the display of all available traces again DISPlay WINDow2 TRACel MODE AVERage DISPlay WINDow2 TRACe2 MODE WRITe Lr
403. tation There may be multiple instances of subblocks within an RF bandwidth A gap is defined as A frequency gap between two consecutive sub blocks within an RF bandwidth where the RF requirements in the gap are based on co existence for un coordinated operation Multicarrier and Wideband Noise Level subblock subblock subblock with 3 with 4 with 3 Carriers carriers carriers Fig 5 20 Non contiguous carrier allocation Non contiguous carrier allocation The R amp S FPS GSM application now allows you to measure such non contiguous car rier setups containing up to 16 carriers and a single gap two subblocks The position of the individual carriers is defined as absolute frequency values In addition the posi tion of the gap between the GSM subblocks is defined explicitely by the number of the carrier after which it begins The burst type and modulation can be defined individually for each carrier to reflect different GSM configurations Limit checks for non contiguous carrier allocation In order to perform useful limit checks for such non contiguous carrier allocation the limit lines are automatically adapted to the gap so that other signals do not distort the GSM limit check 5 15 3 Manual Reference Power Definition for MCWN Measurements For MCWN measurements reference powers are required to calculate relative results in the final measurement These power levels can either be determined by a reference measurement or th
404. tch to the Demodula tion tab Demodulation Setting Slot Scope Frame Slot Demodulation Synchronization Burst TSC Measure only on Sync 1 Q Correlation Threshold 85 9o Demodulation Symbol Decision Tail amp TSC Bits piece Standard te deet LL 121 Measure oniy OB SVG iiia ette ea t e ic tec ea etd d na d SCECAREEN SEN 122 VO Correlation tee 122 oee BI To EE 122 Talg TSC BiS E 123 Synchronization Sets the synchronization mode of the R amp S FPS GSM application Burst T SC First search for the power profile burst search according to the frame configuration in the capture buffer Second inside the found bursts search for the TSC of the Slot to Measure as given in the frame configuration Burst TSC is usually faster than TSC for bursted signals Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration TSC Search the capture buffer for the TSC of the Slot to Measure as given in the frame configuration This mode corresponds to a correlation with the given TSC This mode can be used for continuous but framed signals or bursted signals Burst Search for the power profile burst search according to the frame configuration in the capture buffer Note For Burst no demodulation measurements e g Modulation Accuracy are supported Only Power vs Time Modulation Spec trum Transient Spectrum measurements are supported None Do not synchronize at all If an external or power trigger is chosen
405. te offset frequency in Hz lt Level gt Measured level at the offset frequency in dB or dBm lt Limit gt Limit at the offset frequency in dB or dBm lt Abs Rel gt Indicates whether relative dB or absolute dBm limit and level values are returned lt Status gt Result of the limit check in character data form PASSED no limit exceeded FAILED limit exceeded Example READ WSP MOD 0 998200000 998200000 84 61 56 85 REL PASSED 0 998400000 998400000 85 20 56 85 REL PASSED Usage Query only FETCh WSPectrum MODulation REFerence READ WSPectrum MODulation REFerence IMMediate This command starts the measurement and returns the measured reference power of the Modulation Spectrum These commands are retained for compatibility with previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers only For newer remote control programs use the READ SPECtrum MODulation REFerence IMMediate or FETCh SPECtrum MODulation REFerence commands instead The result is a list of partial result strings separated by commas Return values lt Level1 gt measured reference power in dBm lt Level2 gt measured reference power in dBm 11 13 Programming Examples lt RBW gt resolution bandwidth used to measure the reference power in Hz Example READ WSPectrum MODulation REFerence IMMediate Usage Query only READ AUTO LEVTime This command is used to perform a single measurement to detect the req
406. tected in the input signal and which slots are to be evaluated The Demodulation settings are available from the configuration Overview The Frame and Slot settings are identical to those in the Signal Description dialog box see chapter 6 3 3 1 Frame on page 91 and chapter 6 3 3 2 Slot Settings on page 94 Slot TEE 118 Damod lation Setlligs atc recede ripe co p Eee nei Re nona E RREE RS 121 6 3 7 1 Slot Scope The slot scope defines which slots are to be evaluated see also chapter 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement on page 53 R amp S FPS K10 Configuration The settings in this dialog box are available when you do one of the following e Inthe Overview select the Demodulation button then switch to the Slot Scope tab e Press the MEAS CONFIG key then the Slot Scope softkey LN mE Demodulation Settings i Slot Scope Frame Slot Demodulation Single Slot Measurements Slot to Measure Multi Slot Measurements No Slots to Measure First Slot to Measure Norm Norm Norm Jotto Medaslfe tint rhet eene ab edi i ede eet ea a st dra etes ba ded eb a eee dba tds 119 Numberof Slots to EE o roevetect teer de rv Peer Ra nr ER ve EE vx eve a 120 First Slot to I e ET EE 120 Frame Configuration Select Slot to Configure ecce 120 Slot to Measure This parameter specifies the slot to be measured in single slot m
407. th GMSK modulation For Normal Bursts with 8PSK 16QAM 32QAM or AQPSK modulation or Higher Sym bol Rate Bursts with QPSK 16QAM or 32QAM modulation use this parameter to get a trade off between performance symbol error rate of the K10 and measurement speed Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt AUTO LINear SEQuence AUTO Automatically selects the symbol decision method LiNear Linear symbol decision Uses inverse filtering a kind of zero forcing filter and a symbol wise decision method This method is recommended for high symbol to noise ratios but not for Higher Symbol Rate bursts with a narrow pulse The inverse fil ter colors the noise inside the signal bandwidth and therefore is not recommended for narrow band signals or signals with a low signal to noise ratio Peaks in the EVM vs Time measurement see EVM on page 17 may occur if the Linear symbol deci sion algorithm fails In that case use the Sequence method Linear is the fastest option SEQuence Symbol decision via sequence estimation This method uses an algorithm that minimizes the symbol errors of the entire burst It requires that the tail bits in the analyzed signal are correct It has a better performance lower symbol error rate compared to the Linear method especially at low signal to noise ratios but with a loss of measurement speed This method is recommended for normal bursts with
408. the FETCh BURSt commands FETCh SPECtrum MODulation ALL eese nennen hte tenens 288 READ SPECt m MODulaton ALI EE 288 FETCh SPECtrum MODUulation REFerence anaiai pace aisiara eiia 289 READ SbtCirum MODulaton HE Ferencef MMediatel 289 READ SPECt m MODulatonm GATING auno rtt Ene edet etra voe tn eroe tane ne ER cxt 289 READ WSPectrum MODulation GATing rio ua enun anaidai ad cae 289 FETCh SPECtrum MODulation ALL READ SPECtrum MODulation ALL This command starts the measurement and returns the modulation spectrum of the mobile or base station This command is only available for Modulation Spectrum Table evaluations see Modulation Spectrum Table on page 23 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command The result is a list of partial result strings separated by commas with one list for each measured frequency in the frequency list Return values lt Placeholder gt curently irrelevant Freq1 Absolute offset frequency in Hz lt Freq2 gt Absolute offset frequency in Hz lt Level gt Measured level at the offset frequency in dB or dBm depending on CONF SPEC MOD LIM lt Limit gt Limit at the offset frequency in dB or dBm depending on CONF SPEC MOD LIM lt Abs Rel gt Indicates whether relative dB or absolute dBm limit and level values are returned depending on CON
409. the amplitude settings Amplitude settings can be configured via the AMPT key or in the Amplitude dialog box gt To display the Amplitude dialog box do one of the following e Select Input Frontend from the Overview and then select the Amplitude tab e Select the AMPT key and then the Amplitude Config softkey Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Input Source Frequency Amplitude Output Power Class Preamplifier ei Input Coupling AC Impedance EEN 142 Reference E8val oie reete eri e e cr evene da P a ED E e cda 142 L Shifting the Display Offset 143 Mechanical Attenuatton enne nnnm nnne nnne enean 143 L Attenuation Mode value cene 143 Using Electronic Altenuatilon iioii eret ect tiec tre LE ere ELE PERDERE 143 justes uo mS 144 Power Class The following power classes are supported 1 8 BTS 1 5 MS GMSK E1 E2 E3 MS all except GMSK M1 M2 M3 Micro BTS P1 Pico BTS The default power class is 2 Remote command CONFigure MS POWer CLASs on page 193 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the hardware of the R amp S FPS is adapted according to this value it is re
410. the mod spectrum FETCh SPECtrum MODulation REFerence 11 13 11 13 30000 Jem ete Exporting Captured I Q Data Query the sample rate for the captured I Q data Note The returned value depends on Capture time SENSe SWEep TIME Mod frequency list CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIST SELect Therefore only query the sample rate afterwards TRACe IQ SRATe 6500000 The number of samples can be calculated as follows 11 13 2 Programming Examples floor CaptureTime 577 us floor ls 577 us 6 5 MHz floor 6503750 5 6503750 samples Query the captured I Q data TRACe1 1Q DATA MEMory 0 6503750 SampleRate Alternatively store the captured I Q data to a file MMEMory STORe IQ STATe 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal This example demonstrates how to configure a GSM measurement of an AQPSK modulated signal in a remote environment f a Preparing the application Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt dees Frequency and Level Set center frequency to 935 MHz SENSe FREQuency CENTer 935 MHZ Set Ref Level to 10 dBm DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel RF 10 DBM Slot 0 configuration lt lt lt s sss s Setup slot 0 for VAMOS AQPSK modulation Act
411. ther than Free Run is set TRG is displayed in the channel bar and the trigger source is indicated Note Trigger source for MSRA Master Any trigger source other than Free Run defined for the MSRA Master is ignored when determining the frame start in the R amp S FPS GSM application see chapter 5 5 Trigger settings on page 52 For this purpose the trigger is considered to be in Free Run mode Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 216 Free Run Trigger Source Trigger Settings No trigger source is considered Data acquisition is started manually or automatically and continues until stopped explicitely Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 216 External Trigger 1 2 Trigger Source Trigger Settings Data acquisition starts when the TTL signal fed into the specified input connector meets or exceeds the specified trigger level See Trigger Level on page 112 Note The External Trigger 1 softkey automatically selects the trigger signal from the TRG IN connector For details see the Instrument Tour chapter in the R amp S FPS Getting Started manual External Trigger 1 Trigger signal from the TRG IN connector Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration External Trigger 2 Trigger signal from the TRG AUX connector Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 on page 107 Remote command TRIG
412. ties it is useful to define the peak power as a reference However the standard requires the reference power to be calculated from the RMS power Note To perform the measurement according to the 3GPP standard set the reference power to RMS and the Slot to Measure to the slot with the highest power See 3GPP TS 45 005 chapter 4 Transmitter characteristics For GMSK modulation the term output power refers to the measure of the power when averaged over the useful part of the burst see annex B R amp S FPS K10 Configuration For QPSK AQPSK 8 PSK 16 QAM and 32 QAM modulation the term output power refers to a measure that with sufficient accuracy is equivalent to the long term aver age of the power when taken over the useful part of the burst as specified in 3GPP TS 45 002 with any fixed TSC and with random encrypted bits See 3GPP TS 51 021 chapter 6 5 2 Switching transients spectrum The reference power for relative measurements is the power measured in a bandwidth of at least 300 kHz for the TRX under test for the time slot in this test with the highest power RMS Default The reference power is the RMS power level measured over the useful part of the Slot to Measure and averaged according to the defined Statistic Count Peak The reference power is the peak power level measured over the selected slot scope see chapter 6 3 7 1 Slot Scope on page 118 and its peak taken over Statistic Count measurements G
413. tings to configure the result display Note that the available settings depend on the selected window e Taco e a a 255 Cal EE 257 XE D D 261 Traces The number of available traces depends on the selected window see Specifics for on page 91 Only graphical evaluations have trace settings DISPlay WINDow ns TRAGCe t STATe 2 2 1 recette ener nh tune a rains 255 DISPlayk WINDow lt n gt f TRAC lt t gt MODE rene en aandaa ie nnns nsns 256 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe State This command turns a trace on and off The measurement continues in the background Analyzing GSM Measurements Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 for TRACe1 0 for TRACe 2 to 6 Example DISP TRAC3 ON Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 on page 159 See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys on page 159 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE Mode This command controls whether a trace is displayed or not and in which mode Each trace can only display a certain mode or nothing at all Blank table 11 4 below indi cates which measurements can display which traces and which trace modes Note even if a trace is not displayed the results can still be queried see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 270 In case of max hold min hold or average trace mode you can set the number of single measurements with SENSe SWEep COUNt Note tha
414. tion check CALC1 LIM5 EXC COUN MAX Query number of exceptions of range B Counted number of exceptions CALC1 LIM6 EXC COUN CURR Maximum number of exceptions allowed to pass the exception check CALC1 LIM6 EXC COUN MAX Query limit check results Overall FETC SPEC MOD LIM FAIL Wideband noise CALC1 LIM1 FAIL Intermodulation 100 kHz RBW CALC1 LIM2 FAIL Intermodulation 300 kHz RBW CALC1 LIM3 FAIL Exception counting range A CALC1 LIM5 FAIL Exception counting range B CALC1 LIM6 FAIL List of abbreviations A Annex Reference A 1 A 2 A 2 1 A 2 2 A 1 List of abbreviatlons tree eegeEee gees 345 UO Data File Format iq tar ueeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeennnennnnneenn nnne 346 UO Parameter XML File Specification sse 347 en Data Binary LN 350 List of abbreviations 16QAM 16 ary Quadrature Amplitude Modulation 32QAM 32 ary Quadrature Amplitude Modulation 3GPP 3 Generation Partnership Project 8PSK Phase Shift Keying with 8 phase states AQPSK Adaptive Quadrature Amplitude Modulation ARFCN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number BTS Base Transceiver Station DL Downlink MS to BTS DUT Device Under Test EDGE Enhanced Data Rates for GSM Evolution EGPRS Enhanced General Packet Radio synonym for EDGE EGPRS2 Enhanced General Packe
415. tor magnitude EVM as well as the phase and magnitude errors are cal culated and displayed for each symbol Thus the TRAC DATA query returns one value per symbol The number of symbols depends on the burst type modulation and number of carriers used for transmission as well as the oversampling factor used inter nally by the R amp S FPS GSM application The following table provides an overview of the possible number of symbols Table 11 5 Number of trace result values for EVM Phase Error Magnitude Error measurements Burst Modula Multi No of trace Comment Type tion carrier points BTS AB GMSK any 348 87 symbols ov oversampling factor 4 NSP ov NB GMSK OFF 588 147 symbols ov oversampling factor 4 NSP ov this corresponds to the useful part of the burst see 3GPP TS 45 004 2 2 Start and stop of the burst NB GMSK ON 568 samples ov oversampling factor 4 He symbols NSP This corresponds to the useful part of the burst Hr excluding the tail bits to allow the multicarrier filter to settle NB not any 142 symbols NSP only one sample per symbol ov 1 GMSK this corresponds to the useful part of the burst excluding tail symbols see 3GPP TS 45 005 Annex G normative Calculation of Error Vector Magnitude HSR any any 169 symbols RSP only one sample per symbol ov 1 this corresponds to the useful part of the burst excluding tail symbols see
416. trigger when the R amp S FPS triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FPS is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 218 6 4 5 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Level Output Type Trigger 2 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 218 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe LENGth on page 219 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe IMMediate on page 219 Trigger Settings Trigger settings determine when the input s
417. ts the bits of the user definable TSC The number of bits must be in accordance with the defined burst type and modulation as indicated in Number of TSC bits depending on burst type and modulation CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO TSC USER must be defined first see CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT s TSC on page 200 Suffix s lt 0 7 gt The slot to configure Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt String containg the user defined bits e g 10101111101010101100111100 for a GMSK normal burst Example CONF CHAN SLOT TSC USER Manual operation See User TSC User Sync on page 97 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 332 Table 11 2 Number of TSC bits depending on burst type and modulation Burst Type Modulation Number of Bits Normal GMSK 26 Normal 8PSK 78 Normal 16QAM 104 Normal 32QAM 130 Higher Symbol Rate QPSK 62 Higher Symbol Rate 16QAM 124 Higher Symbol Rate 32QAM 155 Access Burst GMSK 41 11 5 1 4 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt TYPE lt BurstT ype gt Specifies the type of the burst Suffix lt Number gt lt 0 7 gt Parameters for setting and query lt BurstType gt NB HB AB NB Normal Burst HB Higher Symbol Rate Burst AB Access Burst RST NB Example CONF CHAN SLOT TYPE NB Manual o
418. two commands are provided which are almost identical The READ command starts the measurement and reads out the result When the mea surement is started the R amp S FPS GSM application is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt commands FETCh BURSESPOWer SEOT s ALL AVERAge 1 iioii dee opa saa ce ENER KEEN 291 READ BURSt SPOWer GL OT Glotz ALL AVERage rennen 291 EEGENEN ERAN 291 READ BURStSPOWerSLOT lt Slol gt ALLICRES tos eieiei RENERT AER ENNEN SERA 291 FETCh BURStSPOWer SLOT ss ALL MAXimumY nece enean anra REESEN Een 292 READ BURG GbOMWer GL OT SGlotz ALL M Avimum nennen 292 FETCHBURStSPOWer SLOT lt S gt CURREN AVERAGE iiciin insndiaiiiii aiaiai 293 READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT sSlIot CURRent AVERage seen 293 FETCH BURSESPOWerSLOT lt s gt CURRGENEOCRESU asics trece ito rrt ENNER 294 READ BURSTtSPOWerSLOTsSlot CURRenECERESELU ci eet ai reuse 294 FETCh BURStSPOWer SLOT s CURRent MAXimum esses 295 READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT sSlIot CURRent MAXimum cesses 295 FETCHBURStSPOWer SLOT lt 5 gt DEL TatoewncH enne 296 READ BURG GbOMWer SLOT lt Slot gt D I Tatosvnc een 296 Retrieving Results FETCHBURSESPOWerSLOTSSSLIMIEERAILO2 2 riding aiaa To pat ere a 297 READ BURSt SPOWer SL OT Glop LIMEEAIL nennen nnne 297 FETCh BURSt SPO
419. type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 187 lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the name of the new channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 187 Example INST CRE REPL Spectrum2 IQ IQAnalyzer Replaces the channel named Spectrum2 by a new measure ment channel of type IQ Analyzer named IQAnalyzer Usage Setting only INSTrument DELete lt ChannelName gt This command deletes a measurement channel If you delete the last measurement channel the default Spectrum channel is activa ted Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel you want to delete A measurement channel must exist in order to be able delete it Example INST DEL Spectrum4 Deletes the channel with the name Spectrum4 Usage Event INSTrument LIST This command queries all active measurement channels This is useful in order to obtain the names of the existing measurement channels which are required in order to replace or delete the channels Return values lt ChannelType gt For each channel the command returns the channel type and lt ChannelName gt channel name see tables below Tip to change the channel name use the INSTrument REName command Example INST LIST Result for 3 measurement chann
420. uency or both are considered in the limit check of the spectrum trace spectrum graph measurement This parameter effects the Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 22 and Transient Spectrum Graph on page 29 measurements Note For measurements on multicarrier signals using either the check on the left or right side only allows you to measure the spectrum of the left or right most channel while ignoring the side where adjacent channels are located Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum LIMit LEFT on page 234 CONFigure SPECtrum LIMit RIGHt on page 234 Filter Type Defines the filter type for the resolution filter for the Modulation Spectrum and Transi ent Spectrum measurements Normal 3 dB Gauss filter 5 pole according to the GSM standard Remote command SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE on page 236 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List This setting is only required by the Modulation Spectrum Table evaluation see Mod ulation Spectrum Table on page 23 In this evaluation the spectrum of the signal at fixed frequency offsets is determined The list of frequencies to be measured is defined by the standard Additionally sparse versions of the specified frequency lists with fewer intermediate frequencies are provided for quicker preliminary tests Note Modulation RBW at 1800 kHz As opposed to previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers in which the modul
421. uired refer ence level and the trigger offset automatically Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use CONFigure MS AUTO LEVel ONCE and CONFigure MS AUTO TRIGger ONCE for new remote control programs Parameters PASSED Fixed value irrelevant Dummy Fixed value 0 irrelevant Return values lt ReferenceLevel gt The detected reference level Default unit variable lt TriggerOffset gt The detected time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep lt TriggerLevel gt The detected trigger level Range 50 dBm to 20 dBm Example READ AUTO LEVT PASSED 9 2404 0 00000007695 1 4 0 Usage Query only READ SPECtrum WMODulation GATing This command reads out the gating settings for gated Wide Modulation Spectrum measurements It is identical to READ SPECtrum WMODulation GATing and is maintained for compatibility reasons only Example READ SPEC WMOD GAT Usage Query only Mode GSM Programming Examples The following examples demonstrate how to configure and perform GSM measure ments in a remote environment Programming Examples e Programming Example Determining the EVNM sess 332 e Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Gional rrenen 336 e Programming Example Measuring the Power for Access Bursts 338 e Programming Example Measuring Gtatteiice eee en annee ennnen ennaa 341 e Programming E
422. ull attenuation is provided by the mechanical attenuator if possible Both the electronic and the mechanical attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed in the status bar Remote command INPut EATT STATe on page 213 INPut EATT AUTO on page 212 INPut EATT on page 212 Input Settings Some input settings affect the measured amplitude of the signal as well For details see chapter 6 3 4 1 Input Source Settings on page 100 Output Settings The R amp S FPS can provide output to special connectors for other devices For details on connectors refer to the R amp S FPS Getting Started manual Front Rear Panel View chapters How to provide trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FPS User Manual Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Output settings can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key or in the Outputs dia log box Output Digital IQ IF Video Output IF Out Frequency Trigger 2 Tei e Eer 107 IF Out ITT 107 NoiSe SOUCO encornar a L EE TAEAE EAA RRRS 107 TOO Ee aaO AS 107 GE 108 e EE 108 L Pulse EE 108 besten 108 IF VIDEO Output This function is not available for the R amp S FPS GSM application IF Out Frequency This function is not available for
423. ult Config softkey Result Comigo aoM gg eee 158 Estelle de 164 Result Configuration Some evaluation methods require or allow for additional settings to configure the result display Note that the available settings depend on the selected window see Specifics for on page 91 KE 158 ERD TEE 159 ll Et BEE 163 Traces The number of available traces depends on the selected window see Specifics for on page 91 Only graphical evaluations have trace settings Traces Marker Scaling Quick Config Bi l Magnitude Capture Result Configuration Trace 1 TRACE Z Trace 3 TVACC EE 159 Trace WO EE 159 Preset All TRACES io edd ANEREN paa im enn a aaa Aaa a aai aeaea 159 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Gohtkeys AAA 159 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Selects the corresponding trace for configuration The currently selected trace is high lighted orange Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe on page 255 Selected via numeric suffix of TRACe lt t gt commands Trace Mode Defines the update mode for subsequent traces The available trace modes depend on the selected result display Not all evaluations support all trace modes Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FPS saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the p
424. ulticarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Meaesuremenmts AAA 130 Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function When you activate an application a new measurement channel is created which deter mines the measurement settings for that application These settings include the input source the type of data to be processed I Q or RF data frequency and level settings measurement functions etc If you want to perform the same measurement but with dif ferent center frequencies for instance or process the same input data with different measurement functions there are two ways to do so Change the settings in the measurement channel for each measurement scenario In this case the results of each measurement are updated each time you change the settings and you cannot compare them or analyze them together without stor ing them on an external medium e Activate a new measurement channel for the same application In the latter case the two measurement scenarios with their different settings are displayed simultaneously in separate tabs and you can switch between the tabs to compare the results Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function For example you can activate one GSM measurement channel to perform a GSM modulation accuracy measurement for an unknown signal and a second channel to perform a multicarrier measurement using the same GSM input source Then you can monitor all results at the same time in the MultiView tab Th
425. uously until stopped While the measurement is running the Continuous Sweep softkey and the RUN CONT key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started Note Sequencer Furthermore the RUN CONT key controls the Sequencer not indi vidual sweeps RUN CONT starts the Sequencer in continuous mode Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 223 Single Sweep RUN SINGLE While the measurement is running the Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the high lighted softkey or key again Remote command INITiate lt n gt IMMediate on page 224 Continue Single Sweep While the measurement is running the Continue Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 223 6 4 7 Reference Measurement Settings Reference power levels can either be defined manually or determined automatically by a reference measurement prior to the noise measurement Reference power settings can be configured in the Reference Meas tab of the Mea surement Settings dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Press the MEAS CONFIG key and then select the Reference Meas softkey
426. uracy E 5 H H E 95 ile error value in percent below which 95 of all Dee EVM results for all frames in entire measurement fall READ BURSt MACCuracy PERCentile EVM Mag Magnitude error for the Slot to Measure READ BURSt MACCuracy H H Error RMS and peak error values for the current frame in per EES EE Cent READ BURSt MACCuracy 8 5 H e 95 ile error value in percent below which 95 of all EES Magnitude Error results for all frames in entire measure READ BURSt ment fall MACCuracy PERCentile MERRor Phase Phase error for the Slot to Measure READ BURSt MACCuracy H H Error RMS and peak error values for the current frame in per PERROT PEAK lt ReSUlttypez cent READ BURSt MACCuracy j n 95 ile error value in percent below which 95 of all PEBBOSSBMSS CBosUTEEypes Phase Error results for all frames in entire measurement READ BURSt fall MACCuracy PERCentile PERRor Origin Origin offset suppression for the demodulated signal in READ BURSt MACCuracy Offset the Slot to Measure Indicates the suppression of the OSUPpress lt Resulttype gt Sup DC carrier the higher the suppression the better the pression DUT dB UO Off I Q offset for the demodulated signal in the Slot to Mea READ BURSt MACCuracy set sure IQOFfset Resulttype UO A measure for gain imbalances and quadrature errors READ BURSt MACCuracy Imbal between the inplace and quadrature compon
427. urce signal is displayed as an X Y diagram The application analyzes the specified slot over the specified number of bursts 2 Constellation 1 Cir Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CONS see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 249 EVM Displays the error vector magnitude over time for the Slot to Measure User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 17 R amp S FPS K10 Measurements and Result Displays 1 Avg e2 Max 3 Min e4 ClrwW 3 5 sym 145 5 sym Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH ETIMe see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 249 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 270 Magnitude Capture Displays the power vs time trace of the captured UO data Pre trigger samples are not displayed The analyzed slot scopes 1 to 8 slots of a single GSM frame are indicated by a green bar the Slot to Measure in each frame by a blue bar at the bottom of the diagram For details see chapter 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement on page 53 For negative trigger offsets the trigger is displayed as a vertical red line labeled TRG User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 18 R amp S FPS K10 Measurements and Result Displays 5 Magnitude Capture 0 0s 20 0 ms Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH MCAP see f on page 249 Results gt on page 276 gt on page 276 on page 270 Magnitude Error Displays the magnitude error over time for the S 3 Magnitude Error el Avg 2 Max e3 Min e4 Clrw 3 5 sym 145 5 sym Remote
428. ure SGbtChrum SWlTchingal IMMedlatel nennen 324 GONFigure TROSDUIMMediale EE 324 CONFloure W bechum MODulationt MMedatel sees 324 CONFigure MS MUL TrBURSECONS te Mla torpet SEENEN nete 324 CONFloure MS MULTBURGCDE Modulatton nennen nnns 324 GONFigure MS MUETEBURSEPTEMplale irent nre tite htt ne eerie 324 CONFigure MS MULTi SPECtrum MODuUulation ecciesie 324 CONFigure MSEMULETIESPECtr m SWITCchihg iarriric cce nca zucca 325 GONFigureDMSIMUIETIES TA KEEN 325 CONFigure MS BSEaEeLi irre cia KEEN sua ENEE to tb Eye est FRE EENEG 325 CONFigurer MSIE EN GE 325 Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility CONFigure MS MCARrier ACT Carriers ccccccccceecseecneseneeeeeeneneteneneneneaeeeeneeaeenenanaae 325 EE Lee DEER e ENKE 326 CONFigure MS MCARrier FILT F 2 2 csesceesceeeeceeeceenenenenananeaeaeneneneeeeeataneteneneneneneae 326 CONFigurer MS MCARNEM STATE EE 327 GONFigure MSEMCARrierMIDBTS a2 ia irent roe e eere vod oz P REP iDc2lqR YI pepe S Ty PETER YES 327 GONFigurel MS E MTY dE 327 CONFigure MS POWer AUTO ONCE Anke EEEEENEEEEEEN ENNER EE tana 328 CONFig re MS SSE rei EE 328 CGONFigu re WSPectrum MODulaton OMIT ine nia aaa a 329 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy FERRor AVERage sisse 329 FETCH BURSIEMACCuracy FERRoEODRREHBE desserrer 329 FETCh BURSIEMAGCuracy FERRorMAXimum coated eaaet eo eunte ene aka i ENNER EEN 329 FETCH BU
429. urement to read out the maximum power for the selected slot in the current frame This command is only available when the Power vs Time measurement is selected see PvT Full Burst on page 27 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command Suffix lt Slot gt lt 0 7 gt Slot number to measure power on The selected slot s must be within the slot scope i e First slot to measure s First slot to measure Number of Slots to measure 1 Return values Result numeric value Maximum Default unit dBm Retrieving Results Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Set the slot scope Use all 8 slots for the PvT measurement Number of slots to measure 8 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots 8 First Slot to measure 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet 0 W Activate PvT Power vs Time measurement LAY ADD 1 LEFT PTF Note READ starts a new single sweep annd then reads the results Use FETCh to query several results READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 CURRent MAXimum Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 26 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt DELTatosync READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt DELTatosync This command starts the measurement of the Delta to S
430. urst and AQPSK TSCs of both subchannels restrictions see Restriction for auto frame configuration on page 50 and SCPIR Remote command CONF AUTO FRAM ONCE see CONFigure MS AUTO FRAMe ONCE on page 238 Automatic Trigger Offset If activated the trigger offset for external and IF power triggers are detected and automatically measured This function is not available in MSRA mode For details on the trigger offset refer to Trigger Offset on page 112 Remote command CONF AUTO TRIG ONCE see CONFigure MS AUTO TRIGger ONCE on page 239 6 4 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements For multicarrier measurements some parameters defined by the GSM standard require a swept measurement with varying resolution bandwidths Thus a new sepa rate measurement is provided by the R amp S FPS GSM application to determine the wideband noise in multicarrier measurement setups see chapter 4 2 Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurements on page 33 Selecting the measurement type GSM measurements require a special operating mode on the R amp S FPS which you activate using the MODE key P To select the MCWN measurement type do one of the following e Select the Overview softkey In the Overview select the Select Measure ment button Select the MC and Wide Noise Spectrum measurement e Press the MEAS key In the Select Measurement dialog box select the MC and Wide Noise Spectrum measurement The measureme
431. use CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT s TSC instead Suffix lt s gt 0 7 Number of the slot to configure Query parameters lt ResultType gt TSC SET Queries the currently used TSC number or the set If no query parameter is defined only the TS or the TSC is returned TSC Only the TSC or TS is returned SET The set of the TSC is returned Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 0 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 5 1 5 2 6 1 6 2 7 1 7 2 TS0 TS1 TS2 USER training sequence for normal burst 0 7 One of the 7 pre defined training sequence codes is used 0 1 0 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 5 1 5 2 6 1 16 2 7 1 7 2 TSC number and set for normal burst rates TSO TS1 TS2 Training synchronization sequence for access bursts USER A user defined training sequence is used see CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt TSC USER on page 201 RST 0 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Example II TSC 3 Set 1 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO TSC 3 1 JI Query TSC number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO TSC TSC I gt 3 JI Query Set number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO TSC SET I gt 1 Manual operation See Training Sequence TSC Sync on page 97 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 332 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt TSC USER Value This command se
432. used to analyze each data channel Thus it is of interest to know which application is analyzing which data channel The MSRA Master display indicates the data covered by each application restricted to the channel bandwidth used by the corresponding standard for GSM 200 kHz by vertical blue lines labeled with the application name Analysis interval However the individual result displays of the application need not analyze the com plete data range The data range that is actually analyzed by the individual result dis play is referred to as the analysis interval In the R amp S FPS GSM application the analysis interval is automatically determined according to the basis of evaluation for example the Slot to Measure or the slot scope The currently used analysis interval in seconds related to capture buffer start is indi cated in the window header for each result display R amp S FPS K10 Basics on GSM Measurements Analysis line A frequent question when analyzing multi standard signals is how each data channel is correlated in time to others Thus an analysis line has been introduced The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applications It can be positioned in any MSRA application or the MSRA Master and is then adjusted in all other applications Thus you can easily analyze the results at a specific time in the measurement in all applications and determine correlations If the marked point in time is contained i
433. ut output and amplitude settings are described in chapter 11 5 2 1 RF Input on page 205 chapter 11 5 2 2 Configuring the Outputs on page 207 chapter 11 5 3 2 Amplitude Settings on page 210 Frequency Settings The frequency span to be measured can be defined using a start and stop frequency or a center frequency and span alternatively it can be set to a specific characteristic value automatically Useful commands for frequency settings described elsewhere CONFigure MS ARFCn on page 208 SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 208 Configuring and Performing MCWN Measurements SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 209 SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 210 Remote commands exclusive to frequency settings in MCWN measurements SEN Se PS EOUBRGV S PAIN a eee cett ed ba eto ront eere ee ve ea sg edad eua 241 SENSe FREQuency SPAN MODIE rie o neern eb EES ASSEN 241 SENSE FRE Quent S TAR enaA a a a E E EA AEEA 242 SENSe FREQUENCY STOP eei ence hee re Ep ea ghataeslanyateceesbstededeesdgateenssbaseyedesis 242 SENSe FREQuency SPAN lt Span gt This command defines the frequency span Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Span on page 140 SENSe FREQuency SPAN MODE lt Mode gt This command sets the span for the MCWN measurement to a predefined value Parameters lt Mode gt TXBand The span for the MCWN measurement is set to the TX band 2 MHz for single carrier BTS or
434. uter Wideband Table on page 42 11 8 11 Retrieving Marker Results Useful commands for retrieving marker results described elsewhere cCALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y on page 314 Retrieving Results Remote commands exclusive to retrieving marker results CAL e IER NEEN un EEN 314 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz SREL ative seen enne nns 314 GALGulat lt n gt DEL Tamarkersm gt Y Pernara aranana aE annn a aAa RE EEEE 314 GAL Gulate m EE 315 CAL Culatesm MARKersSmi tY GE 315 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X Position This command moves a delta marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker and positions a reference marker to the peak power Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute x value of delta marker 1 Manual operation See X value on page 161 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates
435. ve Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level rising edge NEGative Triggers when the signal drops to the trigger level falling edge RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Slope on page 112 TRIGger SEQuence SOURce Source This command selects the trigger source Note on external triggers If a measurement is configured to wait for an external trigger signal in a remote control program remote control is blocked until the trigger is received and the program can continue Make sure this situation is avoided in your remote control programs 11 5 4 2 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters lt Source gt IMMediate Free Run EXTernal Trigger signal from the TRIGGER IN connector EXT2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER AUX connector RFPower First intermediate frequency IFPower Second intermediate frequency IQPower Magnitude of sampled UO data For applications that process UO data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications RST IMMediate Example TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal Manual operation See Trigger Source on page 110 See Free Run on page 110 See External Trigger 1 2 on page 110 See UO Power on page 111 See IF Power on page 111 See RF Power on page 111 See Trigger Source on page 148 Configuring the Trigger Output The following commands are required to send the trigger sign
436. ver to unpack the iq tar file into a folder 2 Locate the folder using Windows Explorer 3 Open your web browser gt xzy xml How to Export and Import UO Data 4 Drag the UO parameter XML file e g example xml into your web browser file D ay xml e D x xzy xml xzy xml of iq tar file Saved by FSV IQ Analyzer Comment Here is a comment Date amp Time 2011 03 03 14 33 05 Sample rate 6 5 MHz Number of samples 65000 Duration of signal 10 ms Data format complex float32 Data filename xzy complex 1ch float32 Scaling factor 1v Comment Channel 1 of 1 Power vs time y axis 10 dB div x axis 1 ms div Spectrum y axis 20 dB div x axis 500 kHz div E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet http Avww rohde schwarz com Fileformat version 1 How to Perform a Basic Measurement on GSM Signals 9 How to Perform Measurements in the GSM Application The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to perform common GSM measurements with the R amp S FPS GSM application 9 1 How to Perform a Basic Measurement on GSM Signals 170 How to Determine Modulation Accuracy Parameters for GSM Gonals 171 How to Analyze the Power in GSM Gionals 173 How to Analyze the Spectrum of GSM Gion
437. vs Time Filter The Power vs Time filter is used to suppress out of band interference in the Power vs Time measurement see PvT Full Burst on page 27 The following filters are available Single carrier filters e 1MHz Gauss e 500 kHz Gauss e 600 kHz Multicarrier filters e 400 kHz MC e 300 kHz MC The magnitude and step responses of the different Power vs Time filters are shown in figure 5 8 and figure 5 9 respectively In general the smaller the filter bandwidth the worse the step response becomes in terms of ringing effects and the better the suppression of interference at higher frequencies Gaussian type filters are especially useful for signals with sharp edges as the step response does not exhibit overshoot Overview of filters in the R amp S FPS GSM application Magnitude Response of Power vs Time Filters 1 MHz Gauss 500 kHz Gauss 600 kHz 400 kHz MC 300 kHz MC Magnitude dB Frequency MHz Fig 5 8 Magnitude Response of the Power vs Time Filters Step Response of Power vs Time Filters MHz Gauss 500 kHz Gauss Magnitude dB 15 Time us Fig 5 9 Step Response of the Power vs Time Filters 5 7 2 Multicarrier Filter The Multicarrier filter is a special PVT filter that is applied to the captured data if the device is defined as a multicarrier type This filter is used to suppress neighboring channels which may disturb
438. w window indicates the zoom areas in the original trace while the zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows The zoom area that corre sponds to the individual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner between the scrollbars Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 268 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z0OM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA on page 267 Restore Original Display Restores the original display and closes all zoom windows Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M STATe on page 267 single zoom DISPlay WINDow n Z00M MULTiple czoom STATe on page 268 for each multiple zoom window X Deactivating Zoom Selection mode Deactivates any zoom mode Selecting a point in the display no longer invokes a zoom but selects an object Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 267 single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 268 for each multiple zoom window 8 Qe z Import Export Functions IO Data Import and Export Baseband signals mostly occur as so called complex baseband signals i e a signal representation that consists of two channels the in phase lI and the quadrature Q channel Such signals are referred to as UO signals UO signals are useful because the specific RF or IF frequencies are not needed The complete modulation information and even distortion that originates from the RF
439. weep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem Return values Result numeric value Standard deviation Default unit NONE Example READ BURS IQOF SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the peak value of the Magnitude Error When the measurement is started the R amp S FPS is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the mea surement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the Magnitude Error see table 4 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value Magnitude error Default unit NONE Example READ BURS MERR PEAK SDEV User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 284 R amp S FPS K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements WEEN Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy M
440. xample Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers 341 11 13 14 Programming Example Determining the EVM This example demonstrates how to configure an EVM measurement in a remote envi ronment dees eer Preparing the application Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt s pisa CE Frequency and Level Set center frequency to 935 MHz SENSe FREQuency CENTer 935 MHZ Set Ref Level to 10 dBm DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel RF 10 DBM 99 2 2 Trigger settings Use these settings only if an external trigger is connected to the TRIGGER INPUT connector of the analyzer Otherwise ignore these commands Define the use of an external trigger TRIGger SOURce EXT Determine the offset from the trigger event to the frame start start of active part of slot 0 Define a trigger offset of 2 us TRIGger HOLD 2us ess Configuring Data Acquisition Define a capture time of 1 second gt 200 GSM frames SENSe SWEep TIME 1 s Define a statistic count of 200 i e 200 GSM frames are evaluated statistically SENSe SWEep COUNt 200 eege Configuring the result display Delete result display 3 and 4 and Programming Examples activate the following result displays 1 Mag
441. xceptions to the limit line that occur red for the specified limit check in the selected measurement window Suffix lt k gt 112 The number of the limit check to query 1 Limit check for wideband noise 2 Limit check for intermodulation at 100 kHz no exceptions allowed 3 Limit check for intermodulation at 300 kHz no exceptions allowed 4 Limit line for narrowband noise no exceptions allowed 5 Exceptions in subblock A 6 Exceptions in subblock B Return values lt NoExcept gt integer Number of exceptions Example CALCulate2 LIMitl EXC COUN CURR Queries the number of bands with exceptions to the limit line check that occurred for wideband noise in window 2 Retrieving Results Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 341 Usage Query only Manual operation See Spectrum Graph on page 35 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt EXCeption COUNt MAX This command queries the maximum number of bands with exceptions to the limit line check that are allowed by the standard for the specified limit check in the selected measurement window Suffix lt k gt 1 2 The number of the limit check to query 1 Limit check for wideband noise 2 Limit check for intermodulation at 100 kHz no exceptions allowed 3 Limit check for intermodulation at 300 kHz no exceptions allowed 4 Limit line for narrowband noise no exceptions allowed 5 Exceptions in ra
442. y set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the mea surement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the EVM results see table 4 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value EVM Default unit NONE Example READ BURS RMS SDEV User Manual 1176 8480 02 06 282 R amp S FPS K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements WEEN Usage Query only For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 332 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the result of the Frequency Error When the measurement is started the R amp S FPS is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the mea surement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the Frequency Error see table 4 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value Frequency error Default unit Hz Example READ BURS FREQ SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSIt MACCuracy IQlMbalance AVERage FETCh BURSIt MACCuracy IQlM
443. ync value for the selected slot in the current frame This command is only available when the Power vs Time measurement is selected see PvT Full Burst on page 27 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command Suffix lt Slot gt lt 0 7 gt Slot number to measure power on The selected slot must be within the slot scope i e First slot to measure S slot S First slot to measure Num ber of Slots to measure 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value For equal timeslot length the expected offset For non equal time slots the measured offset See CONFigure MS CHANnel FRAMe EQUal on page 195 Default unit dBm Retrieving Results Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Set the slot scope Use all 8 slots for the PvT measurement Number of slots to measure 8 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots 8 First Slot to measure 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet 0 W Activate PvT Power vs Time measurement LAY ADD 1 LEFT PTF Note READ starts a new single sweep annd then reads the results Use FETCh to query several results READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 DELTatosync Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 26 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt

R&S®FPS-K10 GSM Measurements User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S&reg;FPS-K10 GSM Measurements User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S®FPS-K10 GSM Measurements User Manual